CANTONMENT BOARD LAHORE CANTT

CONSTRUCTION OF FAMILY WING

HOSPITAL 250 BEDS AT SARFRAZ RAFIQUI ROAD

LAHORE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

214 AB-1/W Willoughby Road,

Tariqabad, Rawalpindi, Pakistan. Tel: 051- 5121811 Fax: 051- 5121812 Engineering Consultants

CIVIL WORK SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

S.# DESCRIPTION PAGE #

CIVIL

Section – 0 General Requirements Page 1 - 4

Section – 1 Clearing, Grubbing & Setting out of Works Page 5 - 6

Section – 2 Excavation and Backfilling Page 7 - 11

Section – 3 Termite Control Page 12 of 14

Section – 4 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Page 15 - 48

Section – 5 Brick Masonry Page 49 - 56

Section – 6 Plastering and Rendering Page 57 - 59

Section – 7 Floor Finishes Page 61 of 74

Section – 8 Wall Tiling Page 75 of 78

Section – 9 Carpentry and Joinery Page 79 of 89

Section – 10 Painting and Decorating Page 91 of 102

Section – 11 Aluminium Doors & Windows Page 103 of 108

Section – 12 Glass & Glazing Page 109 of 112

Section – 13 Miscellaneous Metal Works Page 113 of 121

Section – 14 Suspended Ceilings Page 123 of 125

Section – 15 Water Supply & Sewerage Page 127 of 140

SERVICES

Section – 0 Particular Specifications Page 141 –151

Section – 1 Cable Support System Page 153 - 160

Section – 2 Cable and Wiring Page 161 - 164

Section – 3 Accessories Page 165 - 166

Section – 4 Lighting Fittings and Fixtures Page 167 - 169

Section – 5 Low Voltage Switchgear Page 171 - 181

Section – 6 Fans & Hand Dryers Page 183

Section – 7 Data/Voice Networking System Page 185 - 187

Section – 8 Fire Alarm System Page 189 – 193

i

Section – 9 Power Transformer Page 195 - 199

Section – 10 Nurse Call System Page 201 - 208

Section – 11 Public Address System Page 209 - 215

Section – 12 Earthing Page 217 - 219

Section – 13 Lighting Protection System Page 221 - 222

Section – 14 PABX Page 223 – 225

Section – 15 CCTV Cameras & Equipment Page 227 – 250

Section – 16 Medical Gas & Pipe Line System Page 251 – 257

Section – 17 HVAC System Page 259 – 326

ii

1

SECTION – 0

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

0.0 General Requirements

0.1 General Description

0.1.1 Location of Site

The proposed Site is located within the premises of Lahore Cantonment on

Sarfraz Rafiqui Road.

0.1.1 GENERAL

a. These conditions shall be read in conjunction with those laid down in

MES Schedule of Rates 2014 (amended upto date), those shown on

drawings and those included in the Particular condition of the contract.

The provisions given hereunder shall take precedence and decision of

Accepting officer shall be final in case of variance or any doubt in

interpretation. The method of construction and workmanship where not

specified / stated in the above-mentioned documents, shall conform to

the current recognized best engineering practices and principles.

b. The contractor will be deemed to have satisfied himself before submitting

his tender as to the correctness and sufficiency of the rates quoted by

him which shall, except in so far as it is otherwise provided in the

contract, cover all his obligations under the contract. Contractor shall

further be deemed to have satisfied himself as to the scope of work, site

conditions/strata and other local facilities available affecting the

execution and completion of work. No extra charges on any

misunderstanding in this regard shall be allowed subsequently.

.

0.1.2 Execution of Work

All Work shall be executed in accordance with requirements and in a

manner set forth in the Conditions of Contract, Specifications; Drawings

and Bill of Quantities and in accordance with the instructions given by

the Engineer or Engineer's Representative. The Contractor shall confine

his operations to the areas that are actually required for the Works. The

2

Contractor shall be required co supply and maintain his own storage

facilities, site office, sanitary facilities, and all temporary connections for

electricity, water, sewerage and telephone etc. at his cost, subject to the

approval of the Engineer.

0.2 Applicable Standards

Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, all the Work and

materials shall meet the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials

(ASTM) Specifications. American Concrete Institute (ACI) and British Standard

Specifications (BSS) as per Drawings and Specifications.

0.3 Test Laboratory and Testing

0.3.1 Testing, except as otherwise specified herein, shall be performed by an

approved testing agency as proposed by the Contractor and at no extra

cost to the Employer. The Engineer may require all testing to be carried

out under his supervision only.

0.3.2 The quality control testing shall be arranged and performed by the

Contractor's competent personnel in accordance with a Site Testing and

Quality Control Programme / Facility to be established by the

Contractor, and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall keep a

complete record of all quality tests performed and submit the same to the

Engineer. All quality control and related tests shall be carried out in

accordance with applicable standards and codes under the supervision of

the Engineer.

0.4 Storage and Handling Facility

The Employer will provide the Contractor possible space within the area of Site

of Works for the storage of plant, equipment and materials for Contract Works.

On no account shall such temporary installation conflict/interfere with any of

the permanent installations, services and any operational function of the

Employer. The handling and storage of all plants, equipment and materials at

Site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and at no risk and cost to the

Employer.

3

The Contractor shall protect all materials against corrosion, mechanical damage

or deterioration during storage and erection on Site. The protection methods

shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

0.5 Temporary Facilities

The Contractor shall provide, erect/install, maintain. alter as necessary and

remove on completion except as otherwise directed by the Engineer all

temporary facilities and services as described hereinafter and/or in the

Contract documents and / or instructed and approved by the Engineer.

0.5.1 Contractor's Site Office

The Contractor's temporary site office and stores etc. including all

buildings, utilities and facilities shall be available for use not later than

15 days after the date of the Site handing over. Installation of temporary

services at the Site shall be given priority over all other construction at

the Site.

0.5.2 Temporary Fencing & Lightning

The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own cost all temporary

lights, guards, fencing and watching to the approval of the Engineer for

the safety and protection of the Works.

0.5.3 Temporary Services

a. Temporary Waters Electricity Services The Contractor shall make his

own arrangement for water for construction, drinking & other

purposes. The Contractor shall also provide temporary power for the

operation of construction equipment and lighting. The Contractor shall

be responsible for the supply, maintenance, repair & operation of

these services at his own costs throughout the construction period.

The Contractor shall also provide adequate sanitary facilities for the

use of the Contractor's staff and Work people at his own cost. The

Contractor shall remove these services at his own cost upon

completion of Works.

b. First Aid Facilities

The Contractor shall provide and maintain First Aid Facilities on the

Site at his own cost First Aid kits of the type, model, number and

equipped properly according to the requirements of the local health

4

authorities and as approved by the Engineer must be furnished by the

Contractor at Site.

c. Fire Fighting Facilities

The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate-firefighting

facilities on the Site at his own cost to the approval of the local Fire

Authority and the Engineers Fire Fighting equipment like fire buckets,

fire extinguishers or other effective means ready for instant use shall

be installed at suitable places at the project.

5

SECTION – 1

CLEARING, GRUBBING & SETTING OUT OF WORKS

1.0 Clearing, Grubbing and Setting Out of Works

1.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered by this section of Specifications consists of furnishing all

labour, materials, necessary equipment, services, miscellaneous and necessary

items, required to satisfactorily complete the clearing, grubbing and setting out

of the Works, as indicated on Drawings, specified herein and subject to the

terms and conditions of the Contract.

1.2 Clearing

Clearing shall consist of cutting up or trimming of trees, if any, and the

satisfactory disposal of trees and other vegetation designated for removal

together with the down timber, snags, bushes, and rubbish occurring within

the areas to be cleared. Trees, other vegetation, stumps, roots, and bushes in

areas to be clear shall be cut-off below the original ground to extract the roots

except such individual trees, groups of trees and vegetation as may be indicated

on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer to be left siding. Individual

trees, groups of trees, and other vegetation, to be standing, shall be thoroughly

protected from damage incident to construction operations by the erection of

barriers or by such other means as the circumstances 'required, and as

approved by the Engineer. Clearing operations- shall be conducted so as not to

cause and damage or ham to existing structures and installations and to those

under construction, and so as to provide for the safety of employees and others.

1.3 Grubbing

Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all occurring stumps;

roots larger than 38 mm in diameter, matted roots in the designated grabbing

areas, stumps, roots, logs or other timber more than 38 mm in diameter,

matted roots and other debris shall be excavated and removed to a depth not

less than 450 mm below any subgrade, shoulder or slope. In areas where the

cut is over 1.0m, grubbing shall not be necessary. In areas to be paved, or in

are indicated on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer as future paved

6

areas where .excess excavation from grading operations is placed, grubbing will

be necessary.

1.4 Disposal

Unless directed otherwise, timber and other refuse shall be disposed off by

burning at locations approved by the Engineer in a manner that will avoid all

hazards such as damage to and existing structures, construction in progress,

trees and vegetation‟s. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with

all pertinent laws and regulations pertaining to the burning of fires and

observance of any security regulations applicable thereto.

Disposal by burning shall be kept under constant attendance' until the fires

have burned out or have been extinguished. No materials viii be permitted to be

pushed or placed on adjacent property without prior written approval of the

owner of such property.

1.5 Setting Out of Works

The Contractor shall set out the Works and shall be responsible for true and

perfect levels and setting out of the same and for correctness of the direction,

positions, levels, dimensions and alignments of all party thereof. If any error in

this respect shall appear during the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall

at his own expense rectify such error to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any

checking by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from his complete

unshared responsibility for correct setting out of Works. The Contractor shall

construct. And maintain accurate bench marks so that the lines and level can

be easily checked by the Engineer.

1.6 Drainage Ditches / Dewatering

The Contractor shall construct and maintain such ditches / drains in addition

to those shown on Drawings or as may be ordered by the Engineer to

adequately drain the areas under construction of the water from an' source

including subsoil water in foundations. If due to any negligence the area is

flooded the same shall be drained with adequate Measures by the Contractor at

his own cost.

7

SECTION – 2

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

2.0 Excavation and Backfilling

2.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered by this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all

plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all

operations in connection with excavation, de-watering; filling back-filling and

disposal of all surplus and unsuitable material for constriction works and

foundations; complete in strict accordance with this section of the

Specifications and the applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and

conditions of the Contract and as per existing laws imposed by the local

authorities.

2.2 Sub-Soil Conditions

2.2.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have acquainted himself with the sub-

soil conditions on the Site and his bid shall be frilly covering the works

involved.

2.2.2 The Contractor shall make his `own deductions for sub-surface

conditions which may affect methods or cost of constructions of the work

hereunder and he shall make no claim whatsoever for damages or

compensation, should he find conditions during the progress of the

Work, different from those as calculated and/or anticipated by him.

2.2.3 The Contractor shall be deemed to have made local and independent

inquiries as to and shall take the whole risk of the nature of the ground;

subsoil or material to be excavated or penetrated and the Contractor

shall not be entitled to receive any extra or additional payment nor to be

relieved from any of his obligations by reasons of the nature of such'

ground, subsoil of material.

2.3 Excavation

2.3.1 Excavation shall include the removal of all material of every name and

nature. If rock or concrete is encountered, it should be removed carefully

and without excessive noise and vibration, Use of explosives shall not be

permitted and no extra rates or any payment in such a case shall be

made to the Contractor.

8

2.3.2 The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to commence any excavation

and he shall submit to the Engineer full details of his proposals. If the

Engineer may require modifications to be made in the Contractor's

proposals, the Contractor shall give effect to such modifications but shall

not be relieved of his responsibility with respect to such work.

2.3.3 For major excavations, the Contractor shall submit for the prior approval

of the Engineer full details and Drawings showing the proposed method

and procedure for supporting and strutting, dewatering and maintenance

of adjacent structures. The design, provision, installation, erection,

maintenance and removal of such temporary works shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor (FIDIC Fourth Edition 1987) and all costs

in these respects shall be deemed to be included in the rates quoted by

the Contractor.

2.3.4 The Contractor's attention is drawn particularly to his obligations under

Clause 29 of the Conditions of Contract in respect of those works which

are in close proximity to existing buildings / structures.

2.3.5 The excavation shall conform to the dimensions and elevations as

indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Foundations

on made up ground shall have to be taken down to natural bottom soil

as per Drawings, direction and approval of the Engineer.

2.3.6 Excavation shall extend to a sufficient distance from wall and footings to

allow for placing and removal of forms, installation of services and for

inspection but the same shall not be paid separately and is deemed to be

included in the unit rates of the Contractor.

2.3.7 In the event of any excavations being carried out deeper than

required/specified levels, the same shall be filled in by the Contractor at

his own cost to the required levels with lean concrete 1:3:6 under the

footings and foundation slabs as per the instructions of the Engineer.

2.3.8 In the event of any excavations being carried out wider than the

required/specified dimensions, the same shall be filled in by the

Contractor at his own cost to the required levels with properly compacted

well graded sand free from any deleterious, substance as per directions

of the Engineer.

9

2.3.9 No excavation shall be back-filled nor any Permanent Work commenced

until the foundation has been inspected by the Engineer and his

permission to proceed given.

2.3.10 In case, any excavation is carried out and the pits and trenches, are filled

with accumulated sand or debris from blowing windstorm, dust-storms,

moving .sand dunes or by any other reasons' thereof after the levels were

checked by Engineer, then the excavation or leveling shall have to be

carried out again in the same manner as before unless and until

concreting is done in the foundation/trenches. No separate payment

shall be made on any such accounts.

2.4 Shoring and Bracing

2.4.1 The Contractor shall provide at his own cost, where required, all shoring,

bracing, walls, supports etc. to the sides of the excavation to prevent

sliding or, any movement. When necessary, excavated sides shall be

sloped as directed by the Engineer with no extra cost to the Employer.

2.4.2 Fill, where required to raise the sub-grade for concrete slabs, shall be

clean unadulterated earth; free from deleterious and organic substances

and shall also be free from wood, stones and other debris. In case, sand

shall be provided for filling, the same shall be clean and free from

harmful substances.

2.4.3 All materials, when used in fill shall be compacted to 95% modified

AASHTO density by power roller, mechanical rammer, or other approved

equipment, in layers not more than mm thick. In sand filling, each layer

shall be uniformly spread, saturated with water or dried and then

compacted. The Contractor shall arrange at his own cost the testing of

the filling.

2.4.4 Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls etc. prior to the

damp proofing /water proofing treatment as specified elsewhere in these

documents. Backfills shall be brought up evenly on each side of

structures as far as practicable. Heavy equipment for spreading and

compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to the structures less

than the distance equal to the height of the backfill above the top of

footing.

10

2.4.5 The filling material shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-and

shall conform to AASHTO Soil Classification System.

2.4.6 Filling around pipes and cables shall be carried out carefully by placing

tine material to cover the pipe or cable completely before the normal

filling is placed.

2.5 Compaction

Fill and/or backfill within the building or wherever required within the premises

shall be compacted to a density of not less than 95% of the maximum density at

optimum moisture content.

2.6 Rough Grading

2.6.1 Necessary rough grading shall be carried out by the Contractor to

establish the finish grade or construction requirements of the Site,

grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform levels or slopes between

points on existing and finished grades. Abrupt changes in slopes shall be

rounded. Additional fill required to complete rough grading shall be

provided as directed by the Engineer.

2.6.2 Where pavings or slabs, are specified, all rough grading shall be done to

the sub-grade of the base course, removing all large stones and debris

and shall be compacted uniformly to the correct lines and levels ready to

receive the paving or slab. Refilling; where required shall be executed

with suitable selected materials in layers not exceeding 150 mm in

thickness and thoroughly compacted to the required density.

2.7 Bottom Elevations of Footings/Foundations

The elevations noted in the Drawings-are only approximate and must be

adjusted in the field with the approval of the Engineer depending on the soil

conditions encountered. No concreting shall begin until the soil bearing

capacity test is substantiated by visual inspection by the Engineer. The

Contractor in planning his work shall make arrangements and provision ' to

construct the lowest level footing first

2.8 Disposal of Surplus Earth and Rubbish

All surplus earth, unsuitable material and rubbish shall be disposed off the Site

as directed by the Engineer. The term disposal shall include all operations of

loading, unloading, stacking, spreading, rehandling, filling depressions leveling

11

and grading as per instructions of the Engineer. The maximum limit for

disposal of surplus material shall be 35 km. No lead shall be paid for this

disposal. The contractor should inspect the disposal site before filling the

tender.

12

13

SECTION – 3

TERMITE CONTROL

3.0 Specifications for Termite Control

3.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered by this section of Specifications consists of furnishing all

labour, materials, equipment, services, miscellaneous and necessary items

required to complete Termite Control Work, related works as indicated on

Drawings, specified herein, in the Bill of Quantities and subject to the terms

and conditions of the Contract.

3.2 Materials

Pesticide shall be Tennakil, Termidor 25 EC or any approved equivalent.

3.3 Method of Application

Pesticide solution shall be applied with approved pressure spraying equipment

maintaining a pressure of 1N/mm2 (10 Kg/cm2) to all applications on or in

earth. Spraying to wood shall be done by hand compression sprayers with an

'approximate pressure of 0.15 N/mm2 (1.5Kg/cm2). One litre of Termidor 25

EC shall be mixed with 40 gallons of water. This solution shall be sprayed over

50m2 of surface area.

3.4 Extent of Application

3.4.1 All excavations, all walls and bottoms of all pits or trenches for footings

or foundations are to be sprayed. Pesticide shall penetrate to a depth of

300 mm minimum in porous earth at bottom and 75 mm minimum at

sides of excavations.

3.4.2 Stockpiled excavated material to be used as backfill is to be spray treated

as above. After backfilling to plinth level. Area of the whole building upto

3m outside the building line is again to be sprayed penetrating a

minimum of 300mm into soil.

3.4.3 After grading, compaction and leveling and before formation of hard core

soiling under floor slabs, all areas to receive slabs shall be sprayed with

pesticides penetrating a minimum of 300 mm into soil.

3.5 Location and Scheduling

3.5.1 Saturation of earth is to be done by adequate personnel and in such a

manner as to in no way disrupt' the progress of Work.

14

3.5.2 Care shall be exercised to ensure that no marks or damage occurs to the

finished building as a result of the work under this section and the

Contractor shall verify and ensure that no material used herein will

impede the growth of grass or plants at areas where spraying is done.

3.6 Standard

All methods of termite protection used herein shall be in accordance with best

standard practices of National Pest Control Association, USA, and the British

Wood Preserving Association.

3.7 Guarantee

The Contractor is to guarantee that the building shall be free from termite

(white ants), wood bores and other pests or rodents which cause damage to

wood or other organic material for atleast 10 years from the date of acceptance

of the building. In the event of any damage caused within the guarantee period,

the Contractor shall replace at his own cost such damaged material; finishes

and affected portion thereof and suitably preserve and treat the entire premises

with the best method known to the trade to prevent the spreading of termites.

15

SECTION – 4

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

4.0 Plain and Reinforced Concrete

4.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered by this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all

plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all

operations in connection with plain and/or reinforced concrete work complete

in strict accordance with this section of Specifications, applicable Drawings and

subject to the terms and conditions of this Contract.

4.2 General

4.2.1 Until and unless specified or directed otherwise by the Engineer, all

materials and workmanship shall be based on the latest versions of

applicable ASTM Standards in force at the time of inviting tenders.

4.2.2 Any defective work in the opinion of the Engineer shall be removed and

reconstructed without undue delay to the approval of the Engineer and

the Contractor shall bear all additional costs incurred.

4.2.3 Any previous checks by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the

Contractor of his responsibility in respect of quality and accuracy of

Work.

4.2.4 Full care shall be taken to install embedded items. Embedded items shall

be inspected and checks for reinforcements and other materials and

items shall be completed and approved before concrete is placed.

4.2.5 The Contractor shall get the bar bending schedules of reinforcement

checked and approved from the Engineer prior to the cutting of

reinforcement.

4.2.6 The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of ambient

temperature of Site. Ambient temperature shall be measured using

mercury thermometers or other thermometers acceptable to the

Engineer.

4.2.7 Throughout the concrete work, the Contractor shall employ full time on

the Works suitable number of qualified and experienced Engineers whose

sole duties shall be as follows;

Design of concrete mixes

16

Quality control of concrete

Supervision of mixing, transporting, placing, compacting, finishing,

curing and protecting concrete.

Supervision of sampling and testing.

Preparation and submission of test certificates and reports.

Completion and keeping of record.

Such other duties as the Engineer may direct.

4.2.8 All concrete work including reinforcement etc. shall be carried out in

accordance with the applicable requirements of ACI/ASTM/BS

Standards and to the instructions of the Engineer.

4.3 Materials

4.3.1 Cement

a) Ordinary Portland cement shall be grey normal setting cement of

approved make and source and of the specified gravity; fineness

and chemical composition fully conforming to British Standard

Specifications BS-12 and, shall be capable of satisfying all tests

such as the tensile strength tests contained therein.

b) Sulphate resistant cement where required shall be sulphate

resistant Portland cement of the approved make fully conforming

to BS-4027 and satisfying the requirements for fineness, chemical

composition, strength; setting time and soundness, etc.

c) For all types of cement described in sub-clauses 4.03.1 (a) & (b)

above. The initial setting time shall not be less than 45 minutes

and final setting time not more than 10 hours.

d) The supply of cement must be so programmed by the Contractor

that at no time the quantity of cement stock shall be less than

that required for an average consumption of four weeks. Lorry or

trick or other means of transportation for the conveyance of

cement to the Site of Work shall be clean, dry, metal-lined and

covered from top with water proof sheets, so that cement is

sufficiently protected from any deterioration during transit.

17

e) Cement shall be delivered in sealed bags and be stored in

moisture protected and well-ventilated sheds and each cement

supply shall be

stored separately.

f) The Contractor shall provide at his own cost on the Site all

necessary

sheds, which shall be perfectly dry, waterproof and adequately

protected against ingress of water for the storing of cement to be

delivered to the Work, to ensure adequate supplies being available

for the Work.

g) Cement, which is damp or contains lumps which cannot be

broken to

original fineness by finger pressure will be condemned irrespective

of age and must be removed from the Site.

h) If any time the Engineer considers that any batch of cement may

have

deteriorated on Site during storage for any reason, he will direct

that tests shall be made and the batch of cement on the Site which

may be in question shall not be used until it has been shown by,

test to be of satisfactory quality at a laboratory approved or

appointed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear all costs of

such testing. The Contractor without delay shall remove any

rejected cement from the Site. Cement reclaimed from cleaning

bags or leaking containers shall not be used in the Works and

immediately be removed from the Site.

i) Cement shall be consumed in the sequence of its arrival at Site

unless

otherwise directed by the Engineer.

4.3.2 Aggregates

a) All fine and coarse aggregates to be used shall be supplied from

approved sources, which shall not be changed without permission

in writing from the Engineer. Aggregates shall conform to the

requirements of applicable ASTM C33-82.

18

b) Fine aggregates, shall be from an approved source of supply of a

uniform quality conforming to ASTM C-33-82 and shall be clean

and sharp and, free from clay, earth, vegetable and organic

matters, alkaline or acid reactions or other deleterious salts or

such harmful matters and impurities.

c) Fine aggregates shall conform to the requirements of the relevant

ASTM C-33-82 Specifications, and shall be graded as follows;

Sieve Number/Size Percentage (by weight) passing

9.5 mm (3/8") 100

4.75 mm (No. 4) 95 – 100

2.36 mm (No. 8) 80 – 100

1.18 mm (No. 16) 50 – 85

0.6 mm (No. 30) 25 – 60

0.3 mm (No. 50) 10 – 30

0.15 mm (No. 100) 2 – 10

d) Coarse aggregates shall be approved river gravel or hard crushed

stone from a source approved by the Engineer and shall be clean,

inert, hard, non-porous and free from laminated particles, sand,

dust, salt, lime, chalk, clay, organic impurities or other deleterious

matter.

e) Coarse aggregate shall also conform to the requirements of Table 2

of ASTM C-33 and shall be graded as follows:

For Reinforced Concrete (Nominal Size of Graded Aggregates 20.0

mm to 2.36 mm)

Sieve Number/Size Percentage (by weight) passing

25.0 mm 100

20.0 mm 95 – 100

9.5 mm 20 – 55

4.75 mm (No. 4) 0 – 10

2.36mm(No.8) 0 – 05

f) All aggregates shall be stored on properly constricted paving and

in bins and there shall be a physical partition between the

stockpiles of coarse and fine aggregates. No mixed up aggregates

19

shall be used in any concrete. Under no circumstances aggregates

shall be allowed to be in contact with ground.

g) If required, aggregates shall be washed and screened to die

sequence of receipt of supplies unless otherwise directed by the

Engineer.

h) All aggregates shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Any

aggregates not found to be of the required standard shall be

rejected by the Engineer and shall have to be removed from Site

without delay. Concrete structures executed with rejected

aggregates shall be dismantled and rebuilt at the Contractor's -

expense.

i) Special fine gravel of 9mm size shall be used if called for n the

Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

j) Physical properties of aggregates shall be in accordance with Table

3 of ASTM C33.

4.3.3 Water

Water to be used in the Work shall be potable water and shall be free

from all impurities whether suspended or dissolved. Further, the water

shall not contain any chemical impurities, salts etc. of any kind. Water

shall be tested for its fitness in Works in accordance with AASHTO

Method T26-S 1.

4.3.4 Admixtures

a) Suitable admixtures from Feb, Sika, Fosroc, Pagel etc as may be

used in concrete mixes with the prior approval of the Engineer.

The amount of admixtures added to each batch of concrete

requires careful control and shall be added in the doses as

recommended by the manufacturers and approved by the

Engineer. The cost of the admixtures shall be deemed to be

included in the rates.

b) For use of an admixture, the information required by the Engineer

shall be submitted to him for each admixture for his approval.

20

4.4 Classification of Concrete

Classification of concrete to be used in various parts of the Works shall be as indicated

on the Drawings and mentioned in the Bill of Quantities. The concrete of various

grades shall be re portioned as set out in Table-1 appended hereto. Regular / Normal

Concrete. Concrete made by using Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) and other basic

ingredients i.e. Coarse aggregate, Fine aggregate and Water, having min 28 days

Cylinder Compressive strength less than 28 MPa (4000psi). For ease of use, it is

further classified into following types:-

4.4.1. Type A:- The Concrete having min 28 days Cylinder Compressive strength 24

MPa (3500 psi). It shall be used for Structural members (RCC slabs, beams, columns,

PCC works etc) or any other structural work where such strength is specified by the

Designer.

4 4.2. Type B:- The Concrete having min 28 days Cylinder Compressive strength 21

MPa (3000 psi). It shall be used for Structural members (RCC slabs, beams,

columns, walls, partitions) and any other structural work where such strength is

specified by the Designer.

4.4..3. Type C:- The Concrete having min 28 days Cylinder Compressive strength 10.5

MPa (1500 psi). It shall be generally used for some structural members like

foundations, hard standings, concrete blocks etc, and any other works where such

strength is specified.

4.4. 4. Type D:- The Concrete having 28 days Cylinder Compressive strength lesser

than 10.5 MPa (1500 psi). It shall be used for non structural works like floor underlay,

lean concrete etc requiring low strength, or where specified as 1:4:8 and 1:6:12 etc

.

4.4.5. Special Concrete:- The Concrete requiring min 28 days estimated Cylinder

Compressive strength, equal or more than 28 MPa (4000 psi) or requiring special

features to meet higher strength, environmental, architectural and survivability

requirements. Regular / Normal Concrete. Concrete made by using Ordinary

Portland Cement (OPC) and other basic ingredients i.e Coarse aggregate, Fine

21

aggregate and Water, having min 28 days Cylinder Compressive strength less than 28

MPa (4000psi). For ease of use, it is further classified into following types:-

Table-I showing minimum required compressive strengths on 150 mm dia x 300

mm long test cylinders and minimum quantity of cement required per m3 of

finished concrete for various mixes and under various conditions is given below:

TABLE – 1

Class of Minimum Qty. of Work Cylinder

Concrete Cement Kg/m3 Strength

At 7 days At 28 days

(psi) (psi)

Spl 400 3015 4500

Spl 385 2685 4000

A 416 2000 3500

B 327 1800 3000

C 229 1000 1800

D 200 800 1500

4.5 Proportioning of Concrete Mixes. concrete shall be proportioned by weight

for design of concrete mixes, unless specifically agreed by the Engineer to proportion

them by volume, which permission shall be given only if the arrangements made at

Site are satisfactory. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer proposed mix

designs for concrete to be used, based on preliminary laboratory tests to determine

proportion of cement;' aggregates and water in the concrete conforming to the quality

and strength requirements specified herein. Preliminary test results of at least three

different mixes of each class of concrete with varied water-cement ratio shall be

submitted. The results of 7 days and 28 days cylinder tests shall be used to establish

the ratio between 7 days and 28 days strengths of used concrete.-The Engineer may

make adjustments in the ratio of fine to coarse aggregates in the mix for a certain

work. Preliminary design of mixes and testing shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor at his own cost. The proportion of voids in the coarse aggregate shall be

22

controlled and if it exceeds 45%, the Contractor without any charge shall increase

sand and consequently the cement. If the proportion is less than 45%. sand shall be

decreased but not the cement.

4.5.1 Maximum Allowable Water Content

All concrete specimens shall be made, cured and tested in accordance

with ASTM Standard. A curve representing the relation between the

water content and the average 28 days compressive strength or earlier

strength at which the concrete is to receive its full working load shall be

established for a range of values including all the compressive strengths

shown on the plans. The curve shall be established by at least four

points, each point representing average values for at least four test

specimens. The maximum allowable water content for the concrete shall

be as determined from this curve and shall correspond to a strength 15%

greater than indicated on the plans. However, the water cement ratio

shall not exceed 0.45. No substitution shall be made in the materials

used in the Work without additional tests in accordance herewith to

indicate that the quality of the concrete is satisfactory,

4.5.2 Slump Test

The slump for concrete, determined in accordance with ASTM C-143 Test

for Concrete, shall be minimum of 25 mm and maximum of 75 mm

provided the requisite strength is obtained. Corrective additions to

remedy deficiencies in aggregate gradations shall be used only with the

written approval of the Engineer. When such additions are permitted, the

material shall be measured separately for each batch of concrete.

4.6 Batching and Mixing

Concrete shall be mixed by a mechanical batch type mixing plant with adequate

facilities for accurate measurements and control of each material entering the

mixer and for changing the proportions to conform to varying conditions of the

Work. The mixing plant assembly shall permit ready inspection of operations at

all times. The plant and its location shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.

Water shall be measured for every batch with due allowance for water already

present in aggregates.

23

4.6.1 Batching Units

Batching units shall be supplied with the following items:-

a) Weighing unit shall be provided for each type of material to indicate

the scale load at convenient stages of the weighing operations.

Weighing units shall be checked at times directed by and in the

presence of the Engineer and required adjustments shall be made

before further use.

b) Water mechanism shall be tight, with- the valves interlocked so that

the discharge valve cannot be opened before the filling valve is fully

closed and shall be fitted with a graduated gauge.

c) Discharge gate shall control the mix to produce a ribboning and

mixing of cement with aggregates. Delivery of materials from the

batching equipment to the mixer shall be accurate within the

following limits:

Materials Percentage by Weight

Cement +1%

Water +1%

Aggregate smaller than 3/4" +2%

Aggregate larger than 3/4" +3%

4.6.2 Mixing Units

a) Mixers shall not be charged in excess of rated capacity nor be

operated in excess of rated speed. Excessive mixing requiring

addition of water to preserve required consistency shall not be

permitted. The entire batch shall be discharged and discarded

before re-charging.

b) Mixing time shall be measured from the instant water is

introduced into the mixer drum containing all solids. All mixing

water shall be introduced before one-fourth of the mixing time has

elapsed. Mixing time for mixers of one cubic meter or less shall be

not less than 2 minutes; for larger than one cubic meter capacity

mixers, time shall be increased by 15 seconds for each additional

half cubic meter or fraction thereof, which may be varied if the

charging and mixing operations fail to result in the required

24

uniformity in composition and consistence within a batch and

from batch to batch. If an air-entraining agent is allowed to be

used, additional mixing time shall be allowed so as to provide the

specified air-content.

c) Unless waived by the Engineer, device such as discharge-lock to

lock the discharge mechanism, until the required mixing time has

elapsed, shall be provided on each mixer. Mixing shall continue for

at least 40 revolutions of mixer drum.

d) No hand mixing under any circumstances even with extra cement

shall be permitted. If during concreting, the mixing plant fails, the

concrete already poured shall be removed, unless directed

otherwise by the Engineer. Mixers, which have been out of use for

more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any

further concrete is med.

4.6.3 Mixing with Concrete Mixers (Electrical/Mechanical Operated)

a) Hand mixing of concrete is forbidden. Concrete for concrete

structures shall be mixed on Site drum type mixers.

b) The capacity and number of mixers provided by the Contractor

shall be such as to meet requirements but without producing an

appreciable excess of concrete at any time. Special attention shall

be devoted to this point in hot weather when the setting of the

concrete is considerably accelerated.

c) The volume of the mixed material per batch shall not exceed the

manufacturers rated capacity of the mixer.

d) To ensure that the concrete materials can be mixed .most readily

into a homogeneous mass, wherever possible, the cement

aggregates and water should be fed into the drum simultaneously.

e) Each batch of materials including water shall be mixed in the

drum of the mixer until the concrete is of uniform colour and

consistency. The minimum time of mixing shall be three minutes

for drum mixers. The mixing time shall be measured from the time

25

all materials required for the batch, including water, are in the

drum of the mixer.

f) The drum shall be completely emptied before recharging and any

water retained in the mixing drum is completely discharged.

g) The mixing water shall be regularly sampled and tested for salt

content and contamination.

h) On completion of each working period, the drum of the mixer shall

be thoroughly cleaned and all adhering concrete shall be removed.

i) Concrete shall be discharged from the mixers and conveyed to the

work in such a manner that no segregation or leakage of the

constituent materials takes place. The method and equipment

used for transporting concrete shall be subjected to the approval

of the Engineer. The means of transportation shall ensure that the

concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of

placing.

4.7 Samples and Testing

4.7.1 General,

Test cylinders of concrete shall be prepared and stored by the Contractor

in accordance with the ASTM C-172, as and when directed by the

Engineer.

Test cylinders and the concrete materials shall be tested in an approved

laboratory and the Contractor shall bear all charges for the same,

including such other tests as may be determined by and acceptable to

the Engineer.

4.7.2 Water

Water shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO Method of Test T26-

51.

4.7.3 Cement

Cement shall be tested as prescribed in BS-12.

4.7.4 Aggregate

Aggregates shall be tested as prescribed in ASTM C-33. In addition, fine

aggregates shall be tested for organic impurities in conformity with ASTM

C- 40.

26

4.7.5 Reinforcement

Reinforcement bars shall be tested as prescribed in ASTM A 615-82(S l)

for deformed steel bars and mild steel plain bars. Refer clause 4.10 of

this section for specification requirements of reinforcement works.

4.7.6 Testing of Concrete

a) The Contractor shall provide for test purposes one set of six

cylinders taken for each class of concrete being poured on each

day. The Engineer may however, order for more cylinder tests if

any irregularity is found in the concrete.

b) All test cylinders shall be 150 mm dia 300 mm long.

c) All test cylinders of the same set shall be made from the same

batch of concrete. Test cylinders shall be made from the concrete

batch actually being poured.

d) Three cylinders of the set shall be tested at 7 days and remaining

three shall be tested at 28 days or at such ages as directed by the

Engineer.

e) All test specimens shall be made and cured in accordance with

ASTM C-31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C-39.

f) Specimens shall be cured under laboratory conditions except that

the Engineer may require curing under field conditions in which

case strength of field cured specimens shall not be less than 85%

of that of companion laboratory condition cured specimens.

g) All cylinder moulds shall be steel moulds perfectly true, having all

internal and meeting faces machined to a smooth surface.

h) If the strength tests of the laboratory cured specimens for any

portion of the Work falls below the minimum allowable

compressive strength at 28 days required for the class of concrete

used in that portion, the Engineer shall have the right to order

replacement of the affected work.

i) All test specimens shall bear distinguishing mark showing

number, date of casting, quality of concrete and place from where

sample was taken. A proper daily record of test specimens made

27

and test results obtained shall be maintained by the Contractor

and weekly test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.

j) The Engineer may require load tests for the part of the structure

from where test specimens have shown unsatisfactory results at

the cost of the Contractor. In the event that load tests indicate bad

quality of concrete, measures as prescribed by the Engineer shall

be taken to correct the deficiency at no additional cost to the

Client. The nature, description and details of load test shall be

determined by the Engineer and shall be binding on the

Contractor.

4.8 Transporting and Placing Concrete

4.8.1 Concreting shall be conveyed and deposited as quickly as possible

after mixing and shall proceed so that, as far as possible, a

complete section of the Work is done in one operation. The

concrete may be distributed in barrows, skips, and chutes and by

any other method such as pumps, conveyor belts etc. all to the

approval of the Engineer.

4.8.2 Transportation of concrete shall be in a manner approved by the

Engineer and shall be so as to avoid segregation or loss of

ingredients of concrete.

4.8.3 All foundations and portions of Work to be concreted shall L

approved by the Engineer in writing before concrete is poured.

4.8.4 All forms and reinforcement shall to completed, cleaned, inspected

and approved before pouring of concrete. No concrete is to be

deposited till the Engineer has inspected and approved in writing-

all reinforcement, foundations, forms, details, positioning of all

fixtures and materials to be embedded in concrete, control levels

and screeds, etc. and is satisfied with the arrangements the

Contractor .has made to efficiently proceed with the work such as

sufficient labour, materials, plants etc. Such an approval will not

relieve the Contractor from any of his obligations under this

Contract. No concrete shall be deposited without the written

permission from the Engineer who shall have no authority to

28

waive off this condition. Any concrete without such written

authorization shall be liable to be rejected.

4.8.5 Placing of concrete shall not be permitted when, in the opinion of

the Engineer the sun, heat; wind, cold, snow, or limitations or

facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent proper placing,

finishing and curing of concrete.

4.8.6 All concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and consolidated by

means of pneumatic or mechanical immersion type vibrators of

suitable size having minimum frequency of 8000 RPM. Care shall

be taken to avoid segregation due to excessive vibration. The

Contractor shall maintain on Site at all times one or more standby

vibrators. Tapping or other external vibration of forms shall not be

allowed unless so directed the Engineer. In that case formwork

shall be adequate to withstand vibrations. Compaction shall be

done until the whole mass assumes a jelly like appearance and

consistency with water just appearing on the surface. Concrete

shall be sufficiently tamped and consolidated around the steel

bars, care shall be taken that the vibrator does not touch steel or

formwork, and is worked into all parts of the moulds in order that

no voids or cavities are left. Steel shall not be disturbed during

operations of concreting. Concrete shall be brought up in even

layers not more than 200 mm thickness and worked against side

of forms to give a smooth and uniform surface. No surplus water

shall be allowed to come outand lie on the surface of concrete. The

concrete must be of such a consistency that when ramming,

consolidating and tamping is completed, a thin film of water is

just appearing on the surface. In vibrating; care shall be taken to

avoid displacing the reinforcement.

4.8.7 Hardened concrete, debris and foreign-materials shall be removed

from interior of forms and from inner surface of mixing and

conveying equipment.

4.8.8 Runways and gangways shall be provided for wheeled concrete

handling

29

equipment and workmen; and such equipment shall not be

wheeled over reinforcement, nor shall runways be supported on

reinforcement.

4.8.9 Concrete shall not be dropped freely from a height of more than

3.5m in columns and 1.25 m elsewhere. In cases where an

excessive drop is inevitable, the Contractor shall provide spouts.

Down pipes, chutes, or side ports to forms with pockets, which

will let concrete stop and flow easily into the form without any risk

of segregation. The discharge of the spouts, down pipes or chutes

shall be controlled so that the concrete may be effectively

compacted into horizontal layers not more than 200 mm thick.

4.8.10 Concrete is to be deposited as quickly as possible after mixing and

to proceed continuously. Concrete which has attained its initial

set or has contained its mixing water for more than 30 minutes

shall not be allowed to be placed in the work.

4.8.11 When concrete is laid on hard core, such as sub-grade for floor

slabs, or other absorbent material, the surface is to be watered,

consolidated and, where specified, blinded before the concrete is

deposited.

4.8.12 Fresh concrete shall not be placed on previously laid concrete or

on old concrete surfaces until the latter has been cleaned of all

dirt, scum and laitance by wire brushes. The clean surface shall

then be thoroughly wetted and grouted with cement slurry as

approved by the Engineer.

4.8.13 Care shall be taken not to disturb newly placed concrete by

vibrator, indirect loading or otherwise. No traffic or loading shall

be allowed on the concrete until it has thoroughly set and

hardened

4.8.14 Construction joints in concrete shall only be given at locations

indicated on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer. If

approved by the Engineer; the concrete at the end of the day's

work shall be finished off against a temporary shutter stop, which

shall be vertical and securely fixed. Such stops shall be removed

30

within 24 hours of lacing of concrete. Construction joints not

shown on the Drawings shall be reinforced with steel bars or

dowels, if deemed necessary by the Engineer, and shall be

furnished by the Contractor without any additional cost.

4.8.15 No concrete shall be placed during rains or inclement weather and

all fresh concrete shall be suitably protected from rain fall and

excessive heat or cold.

4.8.16 Should any part of the exposed surface present a rough, uneven

or imperfect appearance; when the shuttering is removed, it shall

be picked

out to such depth and refilled and properly re-surfaced and

entirely redone as per directions and approval of the Engineer at

the cost of the Contractor.

4.8.17 On removal of the forms and before the concrete skin has had

time to harden, all faces of the concrete inside and outside to be

kept exposed (i.e. unplastered) shall be ribbed over with

carborundum stone, and washed with cement to remove all

marks, projections hollows, or any other defect. No extra payment

shall be made for is work.

4.8.18 All exposed surfaces and lines of the concrete- work are to be tale

and fair without cracks, bends, windings and distortions of all

kinds, without any extra charges by the Contractor. All concrete

work to remain exposed and unplastered is to be fairfaced,

smooth, pleasing and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

4.8.19 A float or screed is to be worked over the exposed surfaces of all

concrete work on the flat or curve, so as to render the surfaces

perfectly smooth, clear and to the necessary slopes or falls or as

required to receive the floor or roof finishes according to the

Drawings and as directed by the Engineer without any extra

charge by the Contractor.

4.9 Protection and Curing

All exposed concrete shall be cured. Curing shall be accomplished by

preventing loss of moisture, rapid temperature change and mechanical

31

injury or injury from rain or flowing water for a period of at least seven

(7) days. Curing shall be started as soon as the concrete has hardened

sufficiently for the surface not to be marked. Curing shall be done either

by covering with. sand, hessian, canvas or other approved fabric mats,

which shall be kept continuously wet. If required and so directed by the

Engineer, formed .surface with forms in position shall also be cured by

keeping all forms continuously wet. As an alternative, curing of concrete

on all exposed surfaces which could not be kept covered, such as sides of

the beams, under side of the slabs, may also be done by sealing concrete

surface with liquid membrane-forming curing compounds white pigment

type conforming to ASTM C-309 or equal so us to arrest loss of moisture

from concrete, with the approval of the Engineer. Care shall be taken so

as to spray the compound/chemical on all the exposed faces of concrete

so that no loss of moisture takes place. The Contractor shall take special

care that curing of concrete is satisfactorily carried out and in

accordance with methods specified herein and / or as instructed b, the

Engineer. Any negligence in this regard may result in total rejection of

such concrete works, which in the opinion of the Engineer have not been

adequately cured. Period of curing for any concrete shall be 7 days or

more as directed by the Engineer. All concrete pours and concrete

structures shall be clearly marked with non-washable paints to indicate

the date of placing concrete. During hot weather, curing shall be done

even at night. It shall be obligatory on the part of the Contractor to

obtain a certificate from the Engineer that the curing has been properly

done. A suitable format shall be: printed and kept on Site to be signed by

the Engineer for every part of the Work.

32

4.10 Reinforcement Steel

4.10.1 General

a) The work covered by this subsection of the Specifications

consists of furnishing all materials, tools, labour and in

performing all operations in connection with the providing,

straightening, cutting; bending, fixing, binding

including binding wire, chairs, pins, spacer blocks complete

in strict accordance with this subsection of the

Specifications, the applicable Drawings, approved bar

bending schedule, and the terms and conditions of the

Contract.

b) The Contractor shall procure reinforcing steel only from

reputable manufacturers / suppliers duly approved by the

Engineer.

c) Verification of the source of supply shall be prepared by the

Contractor and submitted to the Engineer along with

necessary certificates and test reports.

d) 'The Contractor shall prepare detailed bar cutting and

bending schedules on the basis of the working Drawings

and in consideration of ACI-315 and of any requirement

resulting from the applied bar bending process.

e) The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the completion

of any reinforcement in time, in order to facilitate its

inspection and check of conformity with the working

Drawings well before the concreting. Relevant formalities

shall be agreed upon between the Contractor and the

Engineer at the appropriate time.

f) Reinforcement bar sizes have generally been shown on the

Drawings in the form of designated bar numbers. These

designated bar numbers are based on the diameter of bars

in mm.

33

4.10.2 Material

a) Reinforcement shall be deformed reinforcement, except that

plain reinforcement bars are permitted for spirals.

Reinforcing steel bars (Plain and deformed) shall be from

the new billet stock of mild steel and shall conform to the

American Standard (ASTM).

i) Hot rolled deformed bars to ASTM – A615 grade 60.

ii) Hot rolled plain bars to ASTM – A615 grade 40.

b) For each consignment, the Contractor shall furnish to the

Engineer the manufacturer's mill test certificates to

guarantee that the steel supplied meets all the

requirements of the relevant specifications of ASTM

regarding yield / characteristic, strength, tensile strength,

elongation, bending etc.

c) Bendability

All the bars shall be capable of being bent cold through 180

degree round a pin without cracking on the outside of the

bent portion as per ASTM-A615.

d) 18 gauge galvanized wire to BS 4482 shall be used for

binding the steel reinforcement.

e) Samples shall be tested for above requirements in an

approved laboratory before starting the cutting of bars or

when so required by the Engineer; and all cost of such tests

shall be borne by the Contractor.

f) All reinforcing steel bars shall be free from loose mill scale,

loose rust, oil, grease, dirt or other harmful substances.

4.10.3 Storage

Reinforcement bars shall be stored on platform sufficiently above

ground surface and be free from scales, oil, and structural: defects

prior to placement in Works. Rusted or dirty steel bars shall not

be used in the Works unless brushed and cleaned by proper steel

wire brushes and after being approved for use by the Engineer.

34

4.10.4 Reinforcement Cutting and Placing

All reinforcement steel shall be cut and bent cold in strict

accordance with bar bending schedules prepared by the

Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall

prepare bar bending schedule from approved structural working

Drawings and as per instructions of the Engineer. The bending

schedules shall be drawn on approved forms and submitted to the

Engineer for checking and approval. The steel reinforcement shall

be cut and bent to sizes as per Drawings and approved bending

schedules. In case, any bars cut, bent or even fixed in position,

are found incorrect in dimensions size and shape and are not

according to the requirements of the Drawings or instructions of

the Engineer notwithstanding any previous approval of the

Engineer, the Contractor shall replace such steel bars, cut bent or

fixed in position, by correct sizes bars at his own cost and no extra

payment shall be made to the Contractor on such account.

Suitable spacers, chairs as approved by the Engineer shall be

used for the purpose of supporting and spacing of bars. In case;

any bars are bent or displaced they shall be straightened or

replaced prior to pouring. All reinforcement bars within the limit of

a day's pour shall be in place and firmly tied with 18 gauge wires.

Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be

used. Reinforcement bars shall not be used for supporting the

workmen and concreting work. Separate supporting system shall

be used for this purpose.

Concrete cover to all reinforcement bars shall be provided as

shown in the Drawings using steel chairs and concrete spacer

blacks.

The concrete spacer blocks shall be cast from cement sand mix in

a ratio of 1:2 in suitable required sizes. These shall be well cured

and dry before use in the Works. The spacers shall meet the

specified requirements of water absorption. All spacers shall be

35

properly fixed in their required positions and as directed by the

Engineer.

4.10.5 Laps and Splices

No splicing of bars shall be allowed at positions other than

shown on the Drawings. All lap lengths shall be of the

minimum sizes as indicated on the Drawings and in

accordance with ACI 318-2005. Splices of adjacent bars

shall be staggered, unless approved otherwise by the

Engineer. All reinforcing steel fixed in position shall be

inspected by the Engineer and no concrete shall be poured

until steel placement has been approved in writing by the

Engineer. For inspection purposes, the Contractor shall

give to the Engineer reasonable notice before the scheduled

pouring time. Clear concrete cover to reinforcement steel

shall be as specified or indicated on the Drawings.

4.10.6.Mesh Reinforcement

a) Where indicated mesh shall be of the sizes as shown on the

Drawings and conform to BS 4482 or 4449 with mesh sizes

to BS 4483 or ASTM A-185 (Welded Steel Wire Fabric for

Concrete Mesh reinforcement when used in slabs shall be

supported at proper elevations by standard accessories. In

slabs on ground (porous fill), precast concrete spacer blocks

may be substituted for chairs.

b) Overlaps in fabric reinforcement shall be a minimum of two

meshes, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings,

correctly aligned and atleast 50% of the wire intersections

shall be tied with 18 gauge tying wire. Laps shall be

staggered in adjacent rows of sheets.

36

4.11 Formwork

4.11.1 General

The formwork shall be inclusive of all labour, material,

workmanship and alike: All formwork and supports thereto shall

be designed by the Contractor and relevant drawings shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval before the Work is put in

hand. Such an approval shall not relieve the Contractor from all or

any of the rise obligations of the Contractor or give rise to any

claims.

4.11.2 Making Forms

The formwork for columns, beams, slabs, foundations, pits,

lintels, fins, panels, purdees, parapets and all other works

whether to be precast or castin-situ shall be of steel plates,

scaffolding pipes and joints or other approved material and shall

be rigidly formed and designed by the Contractor to the shapes

and forms as per Drawings in accordance with the best of the

existing practices, so as to be able to withstand without

displacement, deflection or deformation or movements of any kind,

the pressure of the moist concrete and all other loads. For

concrete work to show fair finish, the timber forms shall_ be

properly lined with plywood, steel or G.I. sheets to the approval of

the Engineer so as to give a fair faced concrete of a homogeneous,

perfectly even and smooth appearance in exposed surfaces of all

beams, columns, walls, slabs, etc.

4.11.3 Fair faced Finish

The form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform

texture on the concrete. It shall be M.S. steel sheets, plywood,

tempered concrete grade hardboard, metal or plastic, or other

approved material capable of producing the desired finish. The

arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and

symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the practical

minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing capable

of preventing excessive deflection. Material with raised grain, torn

37

surface, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which will

impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Tie

holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely

removed.

b) Shop Drawings.

Shop-Drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor for

Engineer's approval, showing grooves, joints etc. if

indicated on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer

before taking up the job of formwork in hand.

c) Repair

No repair of surfaces designated fair faced shall be allowed.

Any concrete failing to achieve the desired finish or with

defective surfaces shall be removed and replaced at

Contractor's expense. The Engineer may reject any defective

concrete surface and order it to be cut out in part or in

whole and replaced at the Contractor's expenses.

4.11.4 Rigid with Allowance for Camber & Bulges

The formwork shall be fabricated and erected imposition, perfect

in alignment, levels and true to plumb and shape and securely

braced so as to enable it to withstand all weights, dead and live, to

be endured during placing of concrete and its subsequent

hardening till the formwork is struck. It shall be sufficiently rigid

as not to loose its shape and shall be made to compensate for

bulging, and deflection to give the finished concrete the required

lines, plumb, size and shape.

4.11.5 Exposed Surfaces Left Unplastered

In addition to the provision made elsewhere, for all the concrete

work covered in this Contract which are to remain exposed in the

finished work and left unplastered, the formwork shall be

smoothly faced by using M.S. steel sheets or lining the shuttering

with smooth G.I. sheets or non-absorbent material like formica

sheets or in any manner as approved by the Engineer so as to

make a perfectly smooth surface of the finished concrete. Where

38

any surface defects on the exposed concrete surfaces occur and

which do not impair the structural performance, being in excess of

the designed surfaces and the architectural appearance of the

Work in the opinion of the Engineer such defects may be removed

by guniting and grinding with carborundum stone or in any other

approved manner, at the cost of the Contractor, otherwise the

whole or part of the Work shall be removed and made good by the

Contractor, at his own cost. For precast concrete members, the

forms shall be rigid, exact and smooth.

4.11.6 Materials and Labours

The Contractor shall supply all materials runners, and labour,

necessary for a good and speedy erection of formwork such as

steel plates, shuttering planks, struts, bolts, stays, gangways,

boards, fillets etc. and shall do all that is essential in executing

the job in a workman-like manlier to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.

4.11.7 Formwork Not to Interfere or Injure Work

The formwork shall be so designed and arranged as not unduly

interfere with concrete during its placing and easy to be removed

without injuring the finished concrete. Wedges, clamps, bolts and

rods shall be used, when permitted and where practicable, in

making the formwork rigid and in holding it to true position.

4.11.8 Openings in Formwork

Wherever concreting is required to be carried out within forms of

depth exceeding 2 meters, temporary openings in the side of the

form shall be provided to facilitate the pouring and consolidation

of the concrete. Small temporary openings shall be provided at

bottom of the forms to permit the removal of nebbish etc. but the

same shall be suitably closed before pouring.

4.11.9 Opening and Other Details

Provision shall be kept in the, formwork such as openings,

recesses, holes, pockets, fillets, etc. for housing services and other

architectural details in the finished concrete or on its surface and

39

edges as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer

and to fix all necessary inserts, dowels, pipes, holdfasts etc. in

concrete as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the

Engineer.

4.11.10 Joints in Formwork

All joints in the formwork shall be sufficiently closed to prevent

undue leakage of mortar from concrete for concrete surfaces not to

be exposed in the finished work. The joints in the finished work

shall be close jointed and perfectly smooth so as not to allow any

leakage of the mortar from the concrete and show any appearance

of leaking mortar on concrete surfaces.

4.11.11 Treatment and Inspection of Forms

All rubbish particularly chippings, shavings and saw dust shall be

removed from the interior of the forms, before placing concrete.

Forms shall be coated with approved shuttering oil before

reinforcement is placed. Surplus oil on forms and any oil thus

applied on reinforcing steel shall be removed. If the forms are not

used within 24 hours, a fresh coat of oil shall be given before

placing of concrete.

4.11.12 Striking Shuttering

No struts or timbering which serve the purpose of supporting the

shuttering or centering shall be struck and removed without

permission from the Engineer in writing and the work of striking

and removal after the receipt of such permission shall be

conducted under the personal supervision of the competent

foremen in the employment of the Contractor and the Contractor

even after the permission from the Engineer shall hold himself

fully responsible for any consequences whatsoever. In all cases the

Engineer will direct and control the minimum period of time for

which the forms, shuttering or centering shall remain in place

before being struck; but, for the general guidance of the

Contractor, the following are to be considered as the minimum

periods for the main classes of Work.

40

Type to Formwork Normal Weather Cold

Weather

Footing Side 12 hours 18 hours

Vertical sides of Beams,

Wall and Columns

(unloaded) 12 hours 18 hours

Slab soffits 10 days 14 days

Beam soffits 14 days 20 days

The Engineer may require, however, that any wallings, soldiers,

struts or other timbers or supports, the removal of which may

cause the transference of load to the finished work, to be kept in

place for three weeks after the placing of the concrete.

4.11.13 Injury or Damage

The Contractor shall be responsible for any injury to the Work and

any consequential damages caused by or arising from the removal

and. Striking of forms, centering and supports, due to striking too

soon. Any advice, permission or approval given by the Engineer

relative to the removal and striking of forms, centering and

supports shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibilities

herein defined.

4.11.14 Treatment after Removal of Forms

Any minor surface honey-combing or other irregularities are to be

properly made good immediately upon the removal of the

formwork and the surface made good to the satisfaction of the

Engineer at the Contractor's own expense. Any small voids shall

be neatly repaired with cement mortar consisting-of one part of

cement to two parts of sand and the whole surface rubbed over

with carborundum stone and cement wash to bring the whole to a

smooth and pleasing finish and uniform colour.

4.12 Construction Joints

Construction joints shall be located as indicated on the Drawings and/or

as approved or directed by the Engineer. Prior to constriction of any

41

structure, the Contractor shall submit a proposal showing location of

construction joints and sequence of construction to suit his concreting

programmed for the approval of the Engineer. Joint in columns shall be

made at the underside of the deepest beam framing thereto. Beam stems

and slabs shall be poured monolithically unless allowed otherwise by the

Engineer in writing. Joints not specified or shown on the Drawings if so

required and approved by the Engineer; shall be so located as to least

impair the strength and appearance of the Work. Except and where

indicated on the Drawings; no jointing shall be made in footings, or

foundations without written approval of the Engineer. Construction

joints shall be at right angles to the member and shall be formed against

firm stop boards. The stop board shall be removed as soon as possible

after placing the concrete but without the risk of movement of the

concrete and the concrete surface shall be well brushed with a hard

brush and washed off with a spray of water; two to four hours after

casting, to expose the aggregate and provide key for the next pour.

In all water retaining structures and other substructure pits and

trenches; P.V.C. or my other approved water stops shall be provided at

the construction joints in the manner shown on the Drawings and/or

approved by the Engineer.

Whenever a section of concrete is left unfinished, for any reasons with

the approval of the Engineer, leaving surface which will be hard-set

before additional concrete can be joined to it, such dovetails, grooves or

other bonds shall be provided as may be necessary to ensure. a good

bond with the new wok at the cost of the Contractor: Before deposition

fresh concrete, upon or against any concrete which is already set, the

surface of the set concrete shall be roughened with a cutting tool, any

laitance removed, `thoroughly cleaned from all foreign matter, well

watered and covered with approved bonding agent and cement grout,

and special care shall be taken to ram the fresh concrete thoroughly up

and against the set concrete; and, if deemed necessary by the Engineer,

42

the joints shall be reinforced with steel bars or dowels to be all furnished

and done by the Contractor without any additional cost.

4.13 Concrete Floor Slab Finishing

Concrete slabs shall be finished as described herein. In preparation for

finishing, floor slabs shall be struck off to the required level at or below

the elevation or grade of 1 mm in lm. Where drains occur, the floors

shall be pitched to the drains as indicated on the Drawings or as directed

by the Engineer.

4.13.1 Monolithic Finish

All concrete surfaces in floors, except where other finish is

specified, shall be finished by steel floats or straight edges to bring

the surface to the required finish level as shown on the Drawings.

While the concrete is still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear

a man's weight without deep imprint. it shall be wood floated to a

true even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. Sufficient

pressure shall be used on the wood floats to bring moisture to the

surface. The concrete shall then be hand trowelled to produce

smooth impervious surface free from trowel marks. If necessary,

the process shall be repeated so that the final finish shall produce

ringing sound from the trowel. No separate payment shall be made

for finishing floor slabs in the aforementioned manner.

4.13.2 Concrete Topping

Where indicated on the Drawings, base slab under concrete

topping shall receive a screeded finish. After the base slab is

thoroughly cured and when directed, concrete topping shall be

laid to the thickness as indicated on the Drawings in alternate

panels of suitable sizes as directed by the Engineer.

4.14 Anchor bolts, Inserts, Sleeves, Chases, Recesses, Steel Frames

The Contractor shall furnish and place in position accurately, as shown

on the Drawings, all inserts, sleeves, climes, recesses, etc., supplied by

the Contractor, subcontractors or other contractors, as directed. Full

cooperation and coordination shall be maintained with other contractors,

subcontractors in this regard.

43

4.15 Watertight Concrete

All water retaining structures and those subject to water pressure shall

be provided with dense, impervious and watertight concrete. Suitable

admixtures from Feb, Sika, Fosroc, Master Builders or Pagel or equal

approved shall be used as per manufacturers recommendations to get

dense, impervious and watertight concrete.

Special care shall also be observed to make shuttering watertight. The

shuttering

joints shall be well made to make them leakproof. Tin strips to join the

shuttering planks will not be used as they result in leakage of concrete

mix. New steel, timber or plywood shuttering shall be used for Work

under this section.

4.16 Cleaning and Removal of Rubbish

On completion n of Works herein, the Contractor shall remove all

concrete debris, rubbish, shuttering materials, scraps etc., from the

vicinity of the structures completed. All areas shall be cleaned to the

satisfaction and approval of the Engineer. The rubbish shall• be disposed

of within or outside the Site premises free of cost as directed by the

Engineer.

4.17 Coordination

The Contractor shall provide chases and openings required for other

sections of the Works and will cooperate and coordinate with other

trades in placing their pipes, ducts, regrets and other built-in items as

the Work proceeds, entirely at his own cost and risk.

4.18 External Exposed Concrete Surface

All external exposed concrete surfaces of cast-in-situ or precast units

shall be given smooth or pattern finish as shown in the Drawings

schedule or as directed by the Engineer.

4.19 Water Retaining Structures

4.19.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered under this subsection of Specifications consists of

furnishing all labour, tools, scaffolding, hoisting equipment, appliances

44

and materials of every kind and character, and in performing all

operations in connection with procurement; transportation and delivery,

supply and installation of special provisions for water retaining

structures to ensure water tightness in all possible respects in strict

accordance-with requirements of Drawings and Bill of Quantities as

specified herein, and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer and

subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

4.19.2 General

a) Special consideration shall be given to the control of cracking and

the provision of dense impervious concrete. Special consideration

will also be given to the design of the concrete mix and to the

supervision of the placing and compacting in order to provide a

dense impermeable concrete. The mix shall be of the stiffest

consistency having a workability which will- ensure that it can be

satisfactorily placed in the formwork and compacted without risk

of segregation, honey-combing, sweating or bleeding. Special care

shall be given to the method and order of placing the concrete and

to the construction of joints in order to achieve full continuity and

complete water tightness.

b) The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of ambient

temperature at Site.

c) Ambient temperature shall be measured using mercury

thermometers or other thermometers acceptable to the Engineer.

d) Throughout the concrete work, the Contractor shall employ full

time on the Works suitable number of qualified and experienced

Engineers whose sole duties shall be as follows;

- Design of concrete mixes

- Control of quality of concrete

- Supervision of mixing, transporting, placing, compacting,

finishing, curing and protecting concrete including thermal

control of concrete pours.

- Supervision of sampling and testing.

- Preparation and submission of test certificates and reports.

45

- Compilation and keeping of record.

- Such other duties as the Engineer may direct.

4.19.3 Cement Content

The minimum cement content for all water retaining structures shall be

385 kg/m3 and the maximum cement content of 500 kg/m3. The-

maximum water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.4.

4.19.4 Admixtures

c) Suitable admixtures from Feb, Sika, Fosroc or Master Builders or

Pagel may be used in concrete mixes with the prior approval of the

Engineer. The amount of admixtures added to each batch of

concrete requires careful control and shall be added in the doses

as recommended by the manufacturers and approved by the

Engineer. The cost of the admixtures shall be deemed to be

included in the rates.

d) For use of an admixture, the information required by the Engineer

shall be submitted to him for each admixture for his approval.

4.19.5 Junction of Floor and Wall

Where the walls are designed to be monolithic with the bottom slab and

beam system, a continuous upstand section of the wall shall be cast at

the same time integrally with slab. A suitable arrangement of the

reinforcement and formwork shall be made to facilitate this. The height

of this upstand, which shall not be less than specified shall be sufficient

to enable the next lift of formwork to fit tightly and avoid leakage of the

cement paste from the newly deposited concrete: Such leakage, where it

occurs is liable to cause porosity in the finished concrete and is not

desirable at all.

4.19.6 Pipes Through Walls and Floor

When it is necessary for pipes to pass through a wall or bottom floor, it is

preferable to cast the pipes into the panel when it is concreted. If this is

not practicable, it will be necessary to box our In either case, it is

desirable that the position of the pipe shall not coincide .with a joint.

46

When an opening has been boxed out the sides of the opening shall be

treated as constriction joint.

All piping and fittings shall be tested as a unit for leaks immediately

prior to concreting. The testing pressure above atmospheric pressure

shall be fifty (50) percent in excess of the pressure to which the

piping3and fittings may be subjected but the minimum testing pressure

shall be not less than 1.0 N/mm2 150 psi above atmospheric pressure.

The pressure test shall be held for four hours with no drop in pressure

except that which may be caused by air pressure.

No liquid, gas or vapour, except water not exceeding 32°C nor 0.135

N/mm2 pressure, is to be placed in the pipes until the concrete has

thoroughly set.

The concrete cover of the pipes and fittings shall be not less than I inch.

The piping and fittings shall be assembled by welding, brazing; solder

seating, or other equally satisfactory method. Screw connections shall be

prohibited. The piping shall be so fabricated and installed that it will not

require any cutting, bending, or displacement of the reinforcement from

its proper locations.

Drain pipes and other piping designed for pressure of not more than 1

psi above atmospheric pressure need not be tested.

4.19.7 Arrangement of Reinforcement

Particular attention shall be given to the spacing of reinforcement at

points so that access to the concrete surface can be provided to enable it

to be prepared to receive the following batch of concrete.

The length of lap and anchorage provided shall be in accordance with the

requirements of ACI 318-95.

47

4.19.8 Formwork

Ties used to secure and align the formwork shall not pass completely

through any part of the water retaining structure unless effective

precaution can be taken to ensure water tightness after their removal.

The ends of any embedded ties shall have cover equal to that required for

the reinforcement. The gap left from the end of the tie to the face of the

concrete shall effectively be sealed. Any steel left in the structure shall be

adequately protected against corrosion.

4.19.9 Construction

The degree of success in achieving a watertight structure depends on the

quality of workmanship in making and placing concrete, good on site

organization, proper ground water control, clean and dry excavation,'

careful storage of materials, close fitting formwork, correctly fixed

reinforcement and clean joints. It is essential that the concrete, when

placed, is thoroughly compacted to form a dense uniform mass. The mix

shall be of adequate workability and compaction by vibration.

Immediately after the removal of formwork, the concrete surface shall be

carefully inspected and any defects made good as soon as possible.

4.19.10 Curing

Even after minimum curing period specified in the clause pertaining to

curing in drying of the concrete and to restrict the range of temperature

changes which it is subjected to.

4.19.11 Inspection and Repair

As soon as possible after completion of the water retaining structures,

the stricture shall be examined for defects which may lead to water

penetration or leakage. All openings exposed to the weather shall be

covered and all water on the floors shall be removed and the surfaces

allowed to dry before the inspection. Water retaining strictures shall be

tested in accordance with BS 5337 or other approved standard.

Defects that are revealed through which water may penetrate or leak

shall be repaired by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction of the

Engineer. Where internal repairs are to be made, the area of weakness

shall be isolated by suitable means and any cracks sealed by an

48

approved process by a specialist contractor experienced in this type of

work.

49

SECTION – 5

BRICK MASONRY

5.0 Brick Masonry

5.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered by this section of the Specifications consists of all work required in

connection with construction of all type of brick masonry work in foundation,

superstructure, facia, drains, manholes and elsewhere as shown on the drawings,

cement mortar, all related items and appurtenances including all items supplied by

other trades and customarily built-in and installed under masonry work or required to

complete masonry work; all labour, plant; tools, scaffolding, hoisting equipment and

all other materials; and in performing all operations in connection with brick work,

i.e., erecting, placing, bedding, building in, curing and protecting all masonry works,

complete in accordance with requirements of Drawings, Bill of Quantities,

Specifications as stated herein, and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer and

subject to the terms and conditions of this Contract.

5.2 Materials

5.2.1 Portland Cement

All Portland cement for mortar shall conform to the stipulations and

requirements specified in “Section 4 - Specifications of Plain and

Reinforced Concrete”.

5.2.2 Fine Aggregates

Source

Fine aggregate shall be obtained from approved sources and shall

conform to the requirements specified herein below:

Grading

Fine aggregate shall consist of well graded sand stone screening other

invert material of similar characteristics or a combination of these.

Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of BS 882 and/or PS

243. Only Fine aggregate of grading zones 1 to 3 (BS 882) shall be used.

Aggregate of zone A may be used for special mixes only after written

approval of the Engineer.

Cleanliness

50

Fine aggregate shall be clean and free from clay lumps, soft and flaky

particles, shale, alkali, organic matter, loam, mica and injurious

amounts of deleterious substances shall not exceed 3 percent by weight.

5.2.3 Water

Water used for making mortar, laying of masonry, or any other operation

of constructions shall be potable water free from objectionable quantities

of silt, organic matter, alkali, slats and other impurities and shall comply

with the requirements of water for mixing and curing of concrete and

shall be tested and approved by the Engineer.

5.2.4 Admixtures

Mortar plasticizers shall comply with the requirement of BS 4887.

5.2.5 Mortar

Pre mixed mortars shall comply with the general requirement for

materials and mix proportions shall be as given in this Specification.

5.2.6 Damp – Proof Course

Flexible damp-proof course material shall comply with BS 743 where

applicable and shall comprise of the bituminous roofing felt not less than

3mm thick.

The damp-proof membrane shall be laid on an even bed of cement sand

mortar (1:1) and lapped 150mm at all joints. The damp-proof membrane

shall cover the full width of the blocks.

5.2.7 Bonding Ties

Bonding Ties shall be expanded metal strips as shown on the Drawings

or as directed by the Engineer.

5.2.8 Wall Ties

Wall ties shall comply with BS 1243 and shall be hot dip galvanized steel

as approved by the Engineer.

5.2.9 Brunt Bricks

The bricks shall be well burnt without being vitrified. They shall be of

uniform colour, regular in shape and parallel faces. They must be

homogeneous in texture & emit clear ringing sound when struck. They

shall be free from flaws and cracks. They shall not absorb water more

51

than 1/5th of their weight being soaked for one hour and shall show no

signs of efflorescence on drying.

Size and Strength

The nominal size of the bricks shall be 9"x4 3/8"x 2 11/16" (228 x 111 x

68 mm) and the minimum size shall not be less than 8 5/8" x 4 1/8" x 2

5/8" (219 x 105 x 67 mm). The compressive strength shall not be less

than 1250 lbs/sq, inch.

5.3 Mortar

5.3.1 All mortar for masonry shall be in proportion of one part of cement to six

parts of sand (fine aggregate) or as directed by the Engineer. The ingredients shall be

mixed by volume in purpose made gauge boxes. Hand mixing shall be done on clean,

hard platform or metallic sheets or trough of only such quantities as required for

immediate use with just sufficient water to produce mortar of stiffest consistency and

sufficient workability. Water shall be added in a manner so that segregation of cement

does not take place. Mixing of mortar shall produce a homogeneous workable mass.

5.3.2 Cement shall be Portland cement as specified under the section "Plain

and Reinforced Concrete" as per BS 12.

5.3.3 Fine aggregate (sand) shall be clean, hard, durable, soft and free from

flaky particles as specified herein above shall be subject to the approval of

the Engineer. Mortar shall be mixed only in sufficient quantities for

immediate use and all mortar not used within 30 minutes after addition

of water to the mix shall be rejected Retempering of mortar will not be

allowed.

5.3.4 The dry materials (cement and sand) shall be dry mixed for approx. two

(2) minutes and for three minutes after addition of water making total

minimum time of five (5) minutes in a mortar mixer. When hand mixing is

permitted, dry mix, rake well, turn over materials for each batch before

adding water, until uniform colour of mixed materials indicated through

distribution of cementations material. After dry mixing is complete, add

water until the correct consistency is obtained.

52

5.4 Construction Requirements

5.4.1 Precautions

a) Erect no masonry when the ambient temperature is 40 degree

Fahrenheit or less except by permission. Build upon no frozen work and

lay no masonry having a film of frost on their surfaces.

b) Should cuts be required in walls for the passage of conduit etc. the entire

cut out shall be filled with= mortar.

5.4.2 Selection of Bricks

The bricks shall be selected for face work before incorporating in the

work. The brick for the face work, in particular shall be of uniform size,

shape, even colour and smooth texture. No extra payment shall be made

for such selection of bricks or extra fair face work unless otherwise

provided in the B.O.Q.

5.4.3 Soaking of Bricks

Before use, all bricks shall be soaked in clean water in a tank for at least

two hours.

5.4.4 Bond

Unless otherwise specified; all bricks shall be laid in English bond with

frogs upward.

5.4.5 Tools

All equipment used for mixing mortar, transporting it and for laying

bricks shall be clean and free from set mortar, dirt, or other injurious

foreign substances. It shall be thoroughly cleaned, at the end of each

day's work.

5.4.6 Progress

Brick work shall be carried up in a uniform manner. No portion shall be

raised more than 1 meter (3 feet) above another at the same time.

Temporary spaces left during construction shall be stepped and not

toothed. Straight edges supplied to brick layer shall have courses marked

on them with saw cut or measuring rod shall be provided and layer of

courses shall be checked all over the building from time to time so as to

help all courses level.

53

5.4.7 Fixtures

Hold-fasts and similar fixtures shall be built-in within surrounding brick

work in their correct position in specified mortar. They shall be built in

as the work progresses and not inserted later on into space left for them.

5.4.8 Laving of Bricks

Each brick shall be set with both bed and vertical joints properly filled

with mortar and thoroughly bedded. Thickness of joints shall not be less

than 6mm (1/4") and shall not be more than 12 mm (1/2"). The height of

4 courses and 3 joints as laid shall not exceed 25 mm in height of 4

bricks piled dry one upon the other.

No half bricks or bats shall be used except where necessary to complete

the bends etc. At comers, alternate courses of bricks shall be laid

header-wise and stretcher-wise, so as to bind the two walls together. All

brick work shall be truly plumbed and each set of four brick courses

shall be checked with plumbed and straight edges. The joints of brick

work which is to be pointed or plastered shall be raked out to a depth of

12 mm (half inch). The raking shall be done before the mortar sets each

day. All anchors ties and reinforcing shall be placed where required.

Unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings metal ties in cavity

walls/brick facing shall be spaced in a staggered manner with a

minimum spacing of 3 feet horizontally & 18 inches vertically.

5.4.9 Anchors

Install reinforcing bars/ anchors projecting into the masonry a minimum

of 6" and into the facing brick a minimum of 3" during the constriction at

18” centres vertically and 36" horizontally.

5.5 Brick Work in Arches

All the bricks used in arches must be selected carefully. The joints of all the

bricks in each course shall be laid radially and bricks shall be cut to ensure

uniformity in, the width of .the joints.

5.5.1 Workmanship

Arches shall be constricted true to radius on rigid centering with 1/8"

variation permitted. The centering shall be accurately constricted of wood

preferably; or metal, depending on the radius of the arch. However, if

54

masonry centering is used, the top shall be covered with building paper

to permit masonry to move as the mortar shrinks.

5.5.2 Method of Construction

Arches shall be constructed in segments day by day as required by

construction drawings. Brick work adjoining the arches shall be built

level with the arch construction, so that the arch is not under load at any

stage of constriction.

Where arches are reinforced, the grout shall be poured in stages as each

segment is built. Grout must be kept clean of loose mortar, and of

mortar, and of mortar projections at all times.

The construction of inverted arches if required shall require special effort

to ensure that the stretcher bricks are cut td .a true radius in order to

provide .a proper bed for the arch. The following procedure may be

followed:-

a) Erect a wood frame, flush with the outer face of a wall, upon

which the radius centre may be marked.

b) Nail a radius rod to this point which has been marked as extrados

and intrados of the arch with allowance for 1/2" mortar joints.

c) As the work progresses up, the bricks intersecting the line of the

extrados should be laid temporarily in position, marked and

accurately cut to fit the radius.

d) After laying about eight courses of brick in this manner the arch

itself may be started using the radius rod to check the real points

& curve.

5.5.3 Cut Brick Work

Bricks shall be cut dressed or grooved as required or shown on the

drawings.

No extra payment shall be made for such work.

5.5.4 Bed Plates of Concrete

Bed plates of cement concrete Class-C shall be provided under each

beam or joints. They shall conform to the dimensions given in the

drawings. The payments of bed plates will be made as per relevant BOQ

item of cement concrete Class-C.

55

5.6 Curing

The brick work laid in cement mortar shall be water cured by keeping it wet for

at least 10 days.

5.7 Coordination

5.7.1 The Contractor shall provide chases and openings in brick work required

under other sections to sizes and locations as shown in the Drawings.

5.7.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades in setting built-in items,

take special care in cutting; fitting, setting units so that built-in

members are in their true, respective positions.

5.7.3 The Contractor shall also coordinate during brick work for the items

provided in other sections such as door frames, hold fasts, miscellaneous

metal work occurring in the masonry and sleeves, anchors, supports,

nailing strips, braces, jambs etc. to be built-in the masonry.

5.7.4 Special care shall be taken in building walls of door frames. Contractor

shall see that frames are square and in plumb. Check frames before

building brick work around or against them. The Contractor shall see

that electric conduits are not housed into frames so as to prevent

extension of frame anchors.

5.7.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage or abortive work due

to lack of coordination on his part or due to negligence of his Site

supervisory staff in coordination of various sections of works and no

compensation shall be made to the contractor on such account. The

Contractor shall reinstate/make good such affected works at his own

cost.

5.8 Protection and Cleaning

5.8.1 All brick work shall be protected during construction from the effect of

rain and frost or any natural force. If the work already carried out gets

damaged shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost without

any extra payment whatsoever.

5.8.2 Exposed masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with water and fiber brushes

or as directed by the Engineer.

5.8.3 Protect adjacent work during cleaning operations. Make good any

damages from neglect of this account.

56

5.9 Samples

Samples of all kind of materials to be used on the job shall be submitted to the

Engineer and to be approved by him before quantities are procured for the

Works. Source of supply or quality or materials not be changed unless

authorized in writing by the Engineer.

5.10 Testing

All the materials and completed masonry work shall be subjected to standard

testing and if found below the Specifications and BSS or ASTM standards; shall

be rejected. Rejected material shall be removed from the Site immediately at the

Contractor's expense. All testing shall be done at the Contractor's cost.

57

SECTION – 6

PLASTERING AND RENDERING

6.0 Plastering and Rendering

6.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered by this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,

labour appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with

lathing, plastering and rendering, complete in strict accordance with this section of

the Specifications and the, applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and

conditions of the Contract.

6.2 General

6.2.1 Except as may be otherwise shown or specified, all plaster and render

shall be cement plaster. Plastered ceilings and walls shall include

partitions, piers, columns, beams; ceilings, plastered jambs and other

returns, reveals, and backs of recesses and alcoves, and joints and heads

of windows and doors, unless otherwise specified or shown on the

Drawings. Plaster on walls shall be carried down to dado, skirting and

projected bases. Plasterwork shall also include all plasterwork on and

under concrete surfaces to be left exposed and concrete not specified to,

be left fair faced, as indicated on Drawings. 6.2.2 A 19mm thick render

coat shall be applied to walls with a slightly Toughened surface where

wall finishes of applied nature, such as ceramic tiles, marble tiles,

terrazzo tiles etc., are to be installed over wall surfaces.

6.3 Materials

6.3.1 Portland cement shall be normal setting cement of approved make

complying in all respects with BS 12.

6.3.2 Sand shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C-33 and BS 1199.

6.3.3 Water shall be clean and free from oils, acids. alkalis, salts and organic

or other injurious matter and as described in concrete work.

6.3.4 Mortar plasticizer shall comply with BS 4887 and shall be used in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

6.4 Mixing of Plaster

Except where hand mixing of small batches is approved by the Engineer,

mechanical mixers of an approved type shall be used for the mixing of plaster.

58

Frozen, caked, or lumped materials shall not be used. Mechanical mixers,

mixing boxes and tools shall be cleaned after mixing each batch and kept free of

plaster from previous mixes. Plaster shall be thoroughly mixed with the proper

amount of water until uniform in colour and consistency. Retempering will not

be permitted, and all plaster which has begun to stiffen shall be discarded.

6.5 Proportioning of Plaster on External and Base Plaster

6.5.1 All plaster shall be Portland cement plaster, all coats of which shall be

mixed in the following proportions by volume:

One part cement: 4 parts sand or specified otherwise.

6.5.2 All coats of plaster in water retaining structures shall be waterproofed by

the addition of an approved waterproofing additive/admixture from Sika,

Fosroc; BCR or Master Builders or Pagel or approved imported

equivalent.

6.6 Preparation of Surfaces of Plaster

6.6.1 Surfaces to receive plastering shall be brushed to remove all loose

particles; dust, laitance, efflorescence, etc. and any projecting fins on

concrete surfaces shall be hacked off. Glossy or greasy surfaces shall

also be suitably cleaned and chipped off to remove all traces of mould oil.

6.6.2 Where unduly smooth in-situ concrete surfaces are encountered, such

surfaces must be hacked properly before applying plaster.

6.6.3 Surfaces shall thoroughly be sprayed with water and all free water

allowed to disappear before plaster is applied.

6.6.4 Irregularities in the surfaces to be plastered shall be filled with cement

mortar 24 hours before plastering is commenced.

6.6.5 Before plastering is commence, all junctions between differing materials

shall be reinforced. This shall apply where walls join columns and beams

particularly where cracks are likely to develop and places directed by the

Engineer. The reinforcement of such joints shall consist of a strip of

galvanized expanded metal lathe/mesh, atleast 15.0 mm wide, which

shall be plugged, nailed or stapled to the surfaces to be plastered at the

intervals not exceeding 300 mm. The joints in mesh shall be lapped

minimum 150 mm.

59

6.6.6 It shall be responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all electrical

conduits, pipes, concealed or embedded items, ducts, brackets, doors,

window and ventilator frames, and all other fixtures on walls, ceilings,

columns or required elsewhere have been fixed in position before the

plastering is commenced.

6.6.7 Cuttings and chasings in the block work shall be repaired as per the

instructions of the Engineer at least twenty four hours before the

plastering is commenced.

6.6.8 Plaster stops and angle beads of expanded metal shall be used for

protection of arrises, edges and plaster ends as shown on the Drawings

and as directed by the Engineer.

6.6.9 Plaster containing cracks; blisters, pits, discoloration or any defects shall

not be acceptable. Any such defective plaster rejected by the Engineer

shall be removed and replaced in conformity with these Specifications by

the Contractor at his own cost to the satisfaction and approval of the

Engineer.

6.7 Sampling of Plaster

Samples may be taken by the Engineer at any time from plaster work in place.

Areas represented by samples which show over sanding will be rejected.

6.8 Patching

Plaster containing cracks, blisters, pits, checks, or discoloration will not be

acceptable. Such plaster shall be removed and replaced with plaster conforming

to this Specification and approved by the Engineer. Patching shall match with

existing work in texture and colour.

6.9 Concrete / Masonry Joints

All joints of concrete and block walls shall be specially treated as described here

or as shown on Drawings A 150 mm wide approved expanded metal shall be

fixed at the joints and then plaster shall be applied. The expanded metal shall

be with a weight of 3.0 lbs./sq. yd.

60

61

SECTION – 7

FLOOR FINISHES

7.0 Floor Finishes

7.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all

plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all

operations in connection with laying of floor finishes, skirting and dado,

complete in strict compliance with this section of Specifications, the applicable

Drawings and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract.

7.2 General

7.2.1 Samples and Approval

a. All applied floor finishes materials such as terrazzo tiles, marble and

ceramic tiles etc. to be used in the Works shall receive prior approval of

the Engineer.

b. Samples of all the materials to be used shall be submitted to the

Engineer for his selection and approval before their use in the Works.

The Contractor shall strictly follow the instructions of the manufacturers

and the floor finishes shall be laid accordingly.

c. Floor finishes shall be laid true to the line and level in approved manner

satisfactory to the Engineer.

d. Any work covered under this section of the Specifications not conforming

to the requirements of the specified quality and workmanship will not be

acceptable and shall be rejected and the Contractor shall be required to

remove and replace such work at his own cost as per the instructions of

the Engineer.

7.2.2 Floor Screed Beds

a. All floor finishes of an integral nature such as cement concrete

flooring, waterproof flooring shall be laid direct on to structural or

site reinforced concrete slabs. In these cases, the slabs must first

have been fully cured, then hacked, chipped or otherwise

roughened to provide a good adhesion key, then brushed, hosed

and cleaned thoroughly of all loose concert e, dirt, dust, grease, oil

and other impurities. The surfaces shall then be thoroughly

62

wetted for a period of atleast a day before the application of the

floor finish, and given a thin brush applied cement slurry grout.

The floor finishes of integral nature shall then be laid as described

in their respective subsections.

b. All floor finishes of an applied nature such as terrazzo tiling,

ceramic/marble tiling, etc. shall be laid on a floor screed as

described below at 7.03 or as per the instructions of the Engineer.

The floor screed shall be laid to a thickness calculated to be the

overall nominal floor thickness less the actual thickness of the

applied finish.

c. Care is to be taken to relate finished floor levels to specified floor

levels. The screed is to be completely flat, level and smooth, with

no projections, low or high areas, etc., and finished with a wood

float. Where required, the screed shall be laid to falls as shown on

Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

7.3 Cement Sand Screed

7.3.1 Preparation of Base

a. The laitence on the base shall be entirely removed by complete

chipping, hacking & exposing the clean coarse aggregate. All loose

concrete and dirt should be removed by thorough washing or

hosing. The Contractor shall not undertake any finishing work

until the surfaces are approved by the Engineer.

b. The base concrete shall be wetted thoroughly for a period of

atleast a

day before the application of floor finishes and any excess water is

brushed off before laying the screed.

c. Just before the screed is to be laid, a neat grout should be

brushed into the base. The grout should consist of water and

cement mixed to the consistency of a thick fluid. An approved

bonding agent may be used as an alternative to the grout. Excess

of the grout shall be removed by thorough sweeping just prior to

placing the topping material.

63

7.3.2 Laying of Screed

a. Cement sand screed upto a thickness of 40 mm shall be mixed in

the proportions of 1:3 by volume with fine aggregate of approved

size and gradation. Screeds over 40 mm thick should be mixed in

the proportions of 1:2:4 (cement: sand: aggregate) to the approval

of the Engineer.

b. Where specified, Aquaguard or an equal approved waterproofing

additive shall be mixed in the waterproof cement sand screed in

the ratio as per manufacturer‟s instructions or as directed by the

Engineer and shall be finished with a steel float.

c. Where screeds are to receive terrazzo, marble porcelain or ceramic

tiles etc. the screeds shall be finished with a slight rough finish to

accept the cement paste and tiles. The mortar bed shall be spread

and tamped to an even thickness over an area no greater than

that, which can be tiled before the mortar reaches its initial set.

However, ceramic tiles shall be bedded over a hard set cement

sand floor screed laid earlier and well cured.

7.4 Terrazzo Tiles

7.4.1 Description

a. Terrazzo Tiles shall generally comply with the requirements of BS

4131 and shall be as approved by the Engineer.

b. Terrazzo tiling shall be locally manufactured, from an approved

manufacturer, specialist in terrazzo tile making. Tiles shall be cast

with a cement/sand base, and a pigmented terrazzo topping, cast

integral, all in heavy metal moulds under pressure, all to the

required sizes and thickness shown on Drawings and to

Engineer‟s detailed approval.

c. Tiles shall be selected by the Engineer from colours and patterns

as prepared by the approved manufacturer from samples, the cost

of which shall be deemed to be included in the rates. The

approved samples shall be retained by the Engineer to form

standards against which all deliveries will be judged.

64

7.4.2 Materials

a. Portland Cement conforming to BS 12.

b. White Cement conforming to relevant BS Specification.

c. Sand and aggregates shall comply with requirements of ASTM C-

33.

d. Water shall be clean potable drinking water, free from oils, acids,

alkalis, salts and organic or other injurious matter.

e. Marble chips of approved shade, colour, size and quality and shall

have an abrasive hardness of not less than 16.

f. Marble powder shall be clean and should be of approved quality.

g. Pigments to be used shall comply with BS 1014.

7.4.3 Tile Mixes

a. Tile mixes shall be as under:

i) Backing shall consist of Portland cement and fine sand in

proportions of 1:5; mixed with a minimum of clean potable

water.

ii) Terrazzo topping shall consist of white Portland cement and

granulated marble chips of approved sizes, shade, colour

and quality, mixed in proportions dependent on the exact

terrazzo selected but average 1:2.

b. The backings shall be placed first into the moulds, then the

toppings to a minimum depth of 10 mm; the tiles cast under

pressure and filled,

ground and polished before delivery to Site. Bottom faces of tiles

shall be cast with an approved incised key pattern.

c. All the terrazzo tiles shall be cast to the sizes shown on the

Drawings or as approved by the Engineer, perfectly square, with

sharp square edges, and consistent in colour and texture

throughout the Contract for the colour/pattern selected and

approved.

d. Curing shall be effected by continues wetting for a minimum

period of 3 days.

65

7.4.4 Bedding and Finishing

a. Terrazzo Tiles shall be bedded on the wet screeding described

above at 7.02.2(b) and 7.03 by applying a thin layer of neat

cement paste on to the screed bed and the tiles placed in position

and tamped down gently with a wooden mallet to be level with

other tiles. The tiles shall be laid in the manner so that they align

perfectly to the specified lines and levels and are square. The tiles

joints shall be as thin as possible but not more than 2 mm wide

and shall be regular and perfectly straight, and setting out shall

be carried to ensure a minimum of cut tiles. Any tiles requiring to

be cut shall be saw-cut by approved tools. Tiles pattern shall be

square to the spaces floored, and any patterning by tile jointing,

alternating colours, etc. is to be carried out as indicated on the

Drawings and as approved by the Engineer.

b. The surface during laying shall be frequently checked with a

straight edge atleast 2m long to obtain a true surface with dead

level or slope, as directed.

c. All tile joints shall be grouted up solidly with a grout comprising of

white Portland cement and water; all surplus to be cleaned off

immediately.

d. Once bedded, curing shall be carried out by covering in hessian

and continuous wetting for a minimum period of 3 days and the

floor kept clear of traffic for atleast 48 hours.

e. When cured, the terrazzo tiling shall be machine polished to the

approval of the Engineer. Polishing must be evenly and carefully

carried out and a perfect smooth surface produced.

7.5 Marble Floor Tiles

7.5.1 Description

a. The Work included under this subsection shall comprise of

providing and fixing marble tiles in floors at locations shown on

the Drawings in approved shades and colours. Unless otherwise

specified, all marble work shall be in conformity with the latest

British Code of Practice for this Work.

66

b. The marble tiles shall be from approved local source, uniform in

colour, texture, shade and quality.

c. Generally, marble tiles shall be 12”x12”x 1/2” and 24” x 24” x

3/4" or of size and thickness specified in the Drawings and Bill of

Quantities.

7.5.2 Materials

a. Marble

i. Marble shall be best quality Boticina local marble, compact,

dense, metamorphic rock of lime stone origin from quarries

in Pakistan. It must be evenly grained with sugar like

appearance. The shade and colour shall be to the approval

of the Engineer.

ii. All marble tiles shall be totally free from cracks, defects,

fissures etc. and shall have adequate strength to perform as

required with good resistance against abrasion and shall

have an abrasive strength not less than 20.

b. Portland Cement conforming to BS 12.

c. White Cement conforming to relevant BS Specification.

d. Sand and aggregate shall comply with requirements of ASTM

Specifications C-33.

e. Water shall be clean potable drinking water, free from oils, acids,

alkalis, salts and organic or other injurious matter.

f. Pigments to be used shall comply with BS 1014.

7.5.3 Samples

a. The Contractor shall provide samples of marble tiles to be used for

this item of Work showing the entire range of variation and colour

for the selection and approval of the Engineer. The samples shall

be in finished sizes and shape, the cost of which shall be deemed

to be included in the rates. The approved samples shall be

retained by the Engineer to form standards against which

deliveries will be judged.

b. The samples supplied shall conform to the ASTM standards stated

below for the determination of the following:

67

Weight % Absorption ASTM C-97-47

Modules of Rupture ASTM C-99

Compressive Strength ASTM C-170

Resistance to Abrasion ASTM C-241-51

Flexural Strength ASTM C-8880-78

7.5.4 Bedding & Finishing

a. The Contractor shall employ skilled and trained marble workers

for doing this job. The Contractor may be allowed to employ an

approved specialist subcontractor for this item of Work. All Work

shall be of the highest quality in conformance with the Contract

requirements and to the approval of the Engineer. Any

substandard work shall be rejected and the Contractor shall

remove and replace the same at his own cost.

b. The surface over which the marble tiles are required to be fixed

shall be clean of all dirt and dust and should be properly hacked

so that the mortar sticks well to the surface.

c. The Contractor shall ensure that all the edges of tiles supplied at

Site are at right angles to each other, unless other angles are

required due to design requirements. The Contractor shall also

ensure that all sizes are adequate for the Work as specified.

d. Damaged tiles or tiles with broken edges shall not be acceptable

and in no case shall be used in the Work & shall immediately be

removed from the Site.

e. Marble tiles shall be bedded on the wet screeding described above

at 7.02.2 and 7.03 by applying a thin layer of neat cement paste

on to the screed bed and the tiles placed in position and tamped

down gently with a wooden mallet to be level with other tiles. The

tiles shall be laid in the manner so that they align perfectly to the

specified lines and levels and are square. The tile joints shall be as

thin as possible but not more than 2 mm wide and shall be

regular and perfectly straight, and setting out shall be carried to

ensure a minimum of cut tiles. Any tiles requiring to be cut shall

be saw-cut by approved tools. Tiles pattern shall be square to the

68

spaces floored, and any patterning by tile jointing, alternating

colours, etc. is to be carried out as indicated on the Drawings and

as approved by the Engineer.

f. The surface during laying shall be frequently checked with a

straight edge atleast 2m long to obtain a true surface with dead

level or slope, as directed.

g. All tile joints shall be grouted up solidly with a grout comprising of

white Portland cement and water, all surplus to be cleaned off

immediately.

h. Once bedded, curing shall be carried out by covering in hessian

and continuous wetting for a minimum period of 3 days and the

floor kept clear of traffic for atleast 48 hours.

i. When cured, the marble tiling shall be polished with chemical

polish to the approval of the Engineer. No wax polish shall be

allowed. Polishing must be evenly and carefully carried out and a

perfect smooth surface produced.

j. The marble shall be chemical polish finished to a glossy surface

that will reflect light to emphasize the colour and marking. All

finished surfaces shall be of uniform texture, colour and

appearance.

7.5.5 Dado

a. Dado in all marble tiled areas are to be in marble to match the

floor tiling to the area concerned, unless specified otherwise. The

dado shall be produced in an identical manner as for tiling. The

dado shall normally be fixed to the walls upto heights shown in

the Drawings with top edges arris-rounded or as shown on the

Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

b. The dado tiles shall be fixed to walls on a plastered backing having

a slightly rough surface with neat cement paste. The back of each

tile shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and the

tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall with a wooden

mallet so that the tile faces are set in one plane. The tiles shall

69

then be grouted and polished with chemical polish as for marble

floor tiling.

7.5.6 Marble Tread and Risers

Stair tread and riser slabs shall be provided in “Boticina” marble in

approved colour and shade and to sizes and profiles as indicated on the

Drawings. Treads to be 1” thick in single pieces as shown on Drawings,

length to suit stair widths, one long edge arris-rounded and polished,

risers shall be ½” thick in single pieces of sizes to suit stair widths; ends

polished. Treads and risers shall be bedded in screed as for tiling, of

thickness as indicated, all level and square or to profiles shown on

Drawings, chemical polished and finished .

7.5.7 Marble Counter Tops

Marble slabs to kitchen counters, toilet counters or others shall be

provided to sizes and profiles as indicated on the Drawings. The marble

tops shall be provided in configurations to suit the built-in cabinets as

per approved shop drawings in approved shade and colour, delivered to

Site polished and finished to the approval of the Engineer. Marble tops

for toilets shall be recessed to provide wash hand basins, where required.

7.6 Ceramic Floor Tiles

7.6.1 Description

The Work included in this sub-section shall comprise of providing and

fixing in position locally manufactured ceramic floor tiles in approved

sizes, colour and pattern at locations shown on the Drawings and

mentioned in the Bill of Quantities.

7.6.2 Materials

a. Ceramic floor tiles shall be from Master or equal approved form

local source. Ceramic floor tiles for bathrooms shall be non-skid.

b. The tile shall be bedded with neat cement paste or as

recommended by the manufacturer to the approval of the

Engineer.

c. Joint filler shall be white Portland cement grout which shall be

non shrinking, stain resistant, permanent in colour, and shall not

inhabit fungus and bacterial growth. It shall be odorless and non-

70

toxic, of smooth consistency for easy preparation and neat, rapid

installation, and shall not contain any metallic material or

ingredients. The joint floor grout shall be water resistant and shall

not washout underwater.

d. Portland Cement conforming to BS 12.

e. White Cement conforming to relevant BS standard.

f. Sand & aggregate shall comply with ASTM C33.

g. Water shall be clean potable drinking water, free from oils, acids,

alkalis, salts and organic or other impurities and injurious matter.

h. Pigments to be used shall comply with BS 1014.

7.6.3 Samples

The tile samples for local ceramic floor tiles shall be furnished from

various product ranges of different manufacturers in sizes, patterns and

colours for the selection and approval of the Engineer. The approved

samples shall be retained by the Engineer to form standards against

which deliveries will be judged.

7.6.4 Bedding, Laying & Jointing

a. Ceramic Tiles shall either be bedded on the hard set floor

screeding described above at 7.02.2(b) and 7.03 by applying a thin

layer of neat cement paste on to the screed bed and the tiles

placed in position and tamped down gently with a rubber mallet to

be level with other tiles or directly on top of the M. S. plate with

approved tile adhesive. The tiles shall be laid in the manner so

that they align perfectly to the specified lines and levels and are

square. The tile joints shall be as thin as possible but not more

than 2 mm wide if spacer nibs not provided, and shall be regular

and perfectly straight, and setting out shall be carried to ensure a

minimum of cut tiles. Any tiles requiring to be cut shall be cut by

approved tools. Tiles pattern shall be square to the spaces floored,

and any patterning by tile jointing, alternating colours, etc. is to

be carried out as indicated on the Drawings and as approved by

the Engineer.

71

b. The surface during laying shall be frequently checked with a

straight edge atleast 2m long to obtain a true surface with dead

level or slope as directed. Tiles that are out of true plane or placed

incorrectly shall be removed and reset.

c. All tile joints shall be straight, level and of even width throughout.

The tile joints shall be grouted up solidly in matching colour with

a grout comprising of white Portland cement or approved tile joint

filler, pigment and water; all surplus to be cleaned off

immediately.

d. Once bedded, curing shall be carried out by covering in hessian

and continuous wetting for a minimum period of 3 days and the

floor kept clear of traffic for atleast 48 hours.

e. When cured, the floor shall be washed and cleaned to the approval

of the Engineer.

7.6.5 Skirtings

a. Skirtings in all ceramic floor tiled areas are to be of ceramic tile to

match the floor tiling to the area concerned, as specified or shown

on Drawings. The skirtings shall be provided in an identical

manner as for tiling. The skirtings shall normally be 4” high with

top edges arrisrounded or in the size and shape as shown on the

Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

b. The skirtings shall be fixed to walls on a plastered backing having

a slightly rough surface with neat cement paste. The back of each

skirting tile shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste

and the tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall over

rendered backing with a rubber mallet so that the tile faces are set

in one plane. The skirtings shall be grouted and finished as for

ceramic floor tiles.

7.6.6 Dado

a. Dado in all ceramic floor tiled areas is to be in ceramic tiles to

match the floor tiling to the area concerned, as specified or shown

on Drawings. The dado shall be provided in an identical manner

as for tiling. The dado shall normally be fixed on walls upto the

72

heights shown in the Drawings with top edges arris-rounded or as

shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

b. The dado tiles shall be fixed to walls on a plastered backing having

a slightly rough surface with neat cement paste. The back of each

tile shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and the

tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall over a rendered

backing with a wooden mallet so that the tile faces are set in one

plane. The dado shall be grouted and finished as for ceramic floor

tiles.

7.7 Porcelain Floor Tiles

7.7.1 Description

The Work included in this subsection shall comprise of providing and

fixing in position imported porcelain floor tiles of approved size, colour

and pattern at locations shown on the Drawings and mentioned in the

Bill of Quantities.

7.7.2 Materials

a. Porcelain Floor Tiles

Imported non-skid Porcelain Ceramic Floor Tiles shall be from

RAK Ceramics, UAE, or equal approved to the approval of the

Engineer in the specified size, colour and pattern.

b. The tiles shall be bedded with neat cement paste or as

recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

c. Joint filler grout shall be from the same manufacture. The grout

which shall be non-shrinking, stain resistant, permanent in

colour, and shall not inhabit fungus and bacterial growth. It shall

be odorless and nontoxic, of smooth consistency for easy

preparation and neat, rapid installation, and shall not contain any

metallic material or ingredients. The joint floor grout shall be

water resistant and shall not washout underwater.

d. Portland Cement conforming to BS 12.

e. White Cement conforming to relevant BS standard.

f. Sand & aggregate shall comply with ASTM C33.

73

g. Water shall be clean potable drinking water, free from oils, acids,

alkalis, salts and organic or other impurities and injurious matter.

h. Pigments to be used shall comply with BS 1014.

7.7.3 Samples

The tile samples for the imported porcelain floor tiles shall be furnished

from various product ranges of different manufacturers in sizes, patterns

and colours for the selection and approval of the Engineer. The approved

samples shall be retained by the Engineer to form standards against

which deliveries will be judged.

7.7.4 Bedding, Laying & Jointing

a. Porcelain Tiles shall either be bedded on the hard set floor

screeding described above at 7.02.2(b) and 7.03 by applying a thin

layer of neat cement paste on to the screed bed and the tiles

placed in position and tamped down gently with a rubber mallet to

be level with other tiles. The tiles shall be laid in the manner so

that they align perfectly to the specified lines and levels and are

square. The tile joints shall be as thin as possible but not more

than 2 mm wide, and shall be regular and perfectly straight, and

setting out shall be carried to ensure a minimum of cut tiles. Any

tiles requiring to be cut shall be cut by approved tools. Tiles

pattern shall be square to the spaces floored, and any patterning

by tile jointing, alternating colours, etc. is to be carried out as

indicated on the Drawings and as approved by the Engineer.

b. The surface during laying shall be frequently checked with a

straight edge atleast 2m long to obtain a true surface with dead

level or slope as directed. Tiles that are out of true plane or placed

incorrect shall be removed and reset.

c. All tile joints shall be straight, level and of even width throughout.

The tile joints shall be grouted up solidly in matching colour with

approved tile joint filler and water; all surplus to be cleaned off

immediately.

74

d. Once bedded, curing shall be carried out by covering in hessian

and continuous wetting for a minimum period of 3 days and the

floor kept clear of traffic for atleast 48 hours.

e. When cured, the floor shall be washed and cleaned to the approval

of the Engineer.

7.7.5 Skirtings

a. Skirtings in all porcelain ceramic floor tiled areas are to be of

porcelain tiles to match the floor tiling to the area concerned, as

specified or shown on Drawings. The skirtings shall be provided in

an identical manner as for tiling. The skirtings shall normally be

4” high with top edges arris-rounded or in the size and shape as

shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

b. The skirtings shall be fixed to walls on a plastered backing having

a slightly rough surface with neat cement paste. The back of each

skirting tile shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste

and the tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall over

rendered backing with a rubber mallet so that the tile faces are set

in one plane. The skirtings shall then be grouted and finished as

for porcelain tiling.

7.8 Protection

The completed Works or parts thereof shall be protected by the Contractor

against any damage. The Works shall be handed over in perfect condition. If

any damage is incurred then the Contractor shall remove and/or replace the

same at no additional costs. The Contractor shall exercise all care to protect the

works executed by other trades and not covered by his Contract. Any damage to

these shall be made good and the works restored at no additional cost.

75

SECTION – 8

WALL TILING

8.0 Wall Tiling

8.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,

labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in

connection with fixing of wall tiles complete in strict compliance with this section of

Specifications, the applicable Drawings and in accordance with the terms and

conditions of the Contract.

8.2 General

8.2.1 Samples and Approval

a. All wall tiles materials such as ceramic tiles etc. to be used in the Works

shall receive prior approval of the Engineer.

b. Samples of all the materials to be used shall be submitted to the

Engineer for his selection and approval before their use in the Works.

The Contractor shall strictly follow the instructions of the manufacturers

and the wall finishes shall.' be applied accordingly.

c. Wall tiling to internal and external walls and fascia shall be fixed tale to

the line level and plumb in approved manner satisfactory to the

Engineer. All tiles shall be aligned properly with straight joints in even

widths.

d. Any work covered under this section of the Specifications not conforming

to the requirements of the specified quality and workmanship will not be

acceptable and shall be rejected by the Engineer, and the Contractor

shall be required to remove and replace such work without any claim at

his own cost as per the instructions of the Engineer.

8.2.2 Tile Backing

a. Rendered Backing

The tiles to be fixed to walls shall be fixed on a rendered backing.

Walls to be tiled are to be prepared exactly as for rendering /

plastering. A 19mm thick cement sand render coat shall then be

applied exactly as described for plastering in “Section 6

Specifications for Plastering” in a ratio of 1:4. The surface to be

76

scratch-keyed as approved and particular attention to be given to

curing. The tiles shall be fixed to this rendered backing with a

paste of cement.

8.3 Ceramic Wall Tiles

8.3.1 Description

a. The Work covered under this subsection comprises of providing and

laying best quality local ceramic wall tiles from approved manufacturers

in approved size, colour and pattern at locations shown on the Drawings

and in the Bill of Quantities.

b. The local ceramic wall tiles shall be as manufactured by National Tiles,

Shabbir Tiles, Karam Cera, Master Tiles or equal to the approval of the

Engineer.

8.3.2 Materials

a. All the ceramic glazed tiles shall be perfectly true to shape, flat,

free from crazing, walks and other flaws and shall be consistent in

colour and pattern equal to samples presented to the Engineer for

approval. The bedding faces of all tiles shall be keyed to an

approved pattern. Except as otherwise specified, the following

British Standards and Code of Practice shall be applicable to

materials and fixing methods for ceramic tiles:

i. British Standard 1281: 1966 "Glazed Ceramic Tiles and Tile

Fittings for internal wall".

ii. British Standard CP 212: for fixing methods and

workmanship.

b. Adhesives for ceramic tiling shall be neat cement paste or as

recommended by the tile manufacturer

c. Joint Filler shall be white Portland cement grout which shall be no

shrinking, stain resistant, permanent in colour, and shall not

inhabit fungus and bacterial growth. It shall be odorless and non-

toxic, of smooth consistency for easy preparation and neat, rapid

installation, and shall not contain any metallic material or

ingredients. The joint grout shall be water resistant and shall not

wash out underwater.

77

d. Portland Cement conforming to BS 12.

e. White Cement conforming to relevant BS Specifications.

f. Sand shall comply with ASTM C-33.

g. Water shall be clean potable drinking water, free from oils, acids,

alkalis, salts and organic or other injurious matter.

h. Pigments to be used shall comply with BS 1014.

8.3.3 Samples

The Contractor shall submit adequate number of samples of tiles from

the product ranges of different local manufacturers for the selection and

approval of the Engineer. The approved samples shall be kept by the

Engineer to form standards against which all deliveries will be judged.

8.3.4 Bedding and Jointing

a. The tiles shall be fixed to the walls over a rendered backing as

described in sub-section 8.02.2(a).

b. Surfaces to receive the ceramic tiling shall be clean and free of

dirt, dust, oil, grease or other objectionable material

c. After having been immersed in clean water for a minimum of 7

hours, until saturated the tiles shall then be bedded in a bedding

coat of cement paste; all to the approval and instructions of the

Engineer.

d. Tiles shall be set out carefully and bedded to a true vertical face,

square and plumb, aligned in accurate continuous horizontal and

vertical courses to an unbonded pattern so as to give regular joint

widths of approx. 2 mm if spacer nibs are not provided.

e. Tiled areas shall be cured when set by continuous wetting for a

minimum period of 3 days.

f. When cured, tile joints shall be pointed with a liquid neat white

Portland cement grout so as to fill each joint solidly and

continuously. When set, joints shall be finger-smoothed off to an

even concave profile.

g. Tiles where required to be cut shall be marked off and cut with

approved tools perfectly square and true, with no chipped or

cracked edges. Cut tiles shall generally be positioned on the

78

perimeters, and setting-out should be carefully carried out to

ensure this. Tiles shall similarly be carefully and cleanly cut

around pipes, fixings and other projecting components.

8.4 Protection

The completed works or parts thereof shall be protected by the Contractor

against any damage. The works shall be handed over in perfect condition. If any

damage is incurred then the Contractor shall remove and/or replace the same

at no additional costs. The Contractor shall exercise all care to protect the

works executed by other trades and not covered by his Contract. Any damage to

these shall be made good and the works restored at no additional cost.

79

SECTION – 9

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

9.0 Carpentry and Joinery.

9.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all

plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all

operations in connection with the installation of carpentry, joinery and wood

work complete in strict accordance with this section of the Specifications and

the applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the

Contract.

9.2 General

9.2.1 Workmanship in respect of joinery shall generally comply with BS 1186.

9.2.2 Best quality seasoned teak wood shall be used for door frames and

fully glazed shutters. All veneering shall be done with approved first

quality commercial ply wood except doors which shall be in teak veneer.

For core filling and where else required, well-seasoned selected quality

deodar wood subject to the approval of the Engineer shall be used.

9.2.3 Timber for all carpentry work other than the rough carpentry shall

conform to the details given below and shall be satisfactory to the

Engineer's Representative and shall have a moisture content of not over

twelve percent (12%) by weight. The wood shall be sound and clear and

free from defects affecting its appearance, strength or durability.

9.2.4 Timber shall be stored under cover clear of the ground and protected

from dampness. All joinery shall be protected from the weather during

transit and stored under cover clear of the ground before fixing: Where

liable to damage during the progress of the Works, joinery shall be

covered and protected and any damaged work reinstated and made good

at the Contractor's cost.

9.2.5 Structural Timber

Timber grading for structural use shall comply with BS 4978 and shall

be used in accordance with the recommendations contained in B.S.C.P.

112. Samples of timber shall be approved by the Engineer.

80

9.2.6 Carpentry Timber

a. Non-structural carpentry timber shall be properly seasoned and

shall be sawn square, straight & true and shall be free; from the

following defects:

i. Splits, ring shakes, soft pith

ii. Checks exceeding 300mm long or 1.5mm wide or one half

thickness of timber in depth.

iii. Knots exceeding 38mm diameter or one half the width of

the surface.

iv. Decayed or dead knots unless cut out and plugged.

v. Loose knots or knot holes unless cut out and plugged.

vi. Pitch pockets.

vii. Decay and insect attack.

b. Moisture content shall comply with the requirements of BS 1186.

9.2.7 Joinery Timber

a. Joinery timber shall be sound, well-conditioned, properly

seasoned to suit the particular use and free from the defects listed

under carpentry timber.

b. Softwood and Hardwood joinery timbers shall comply with BS

1186

Part I. Hardwood for general joinery use shall be locally obtained

golden teak wood unless specifically named in the contract

documents or by the Engineer. All samples of joinery timber shall

be approved by the Engineer.

9.2.8 Manufactured Boards

a. Blackboard shall comply with BS 3444 Grade 2.

b. Chipboard shall be resin-bonded wood chipboard complying with

BS 2604.

c. MDF boards shall complying be “Lasani Board” with BS 1142 -89

d. Plywood generally shall comply with BS 1455. Those from sources

not included in BS 1455 shall be subject to the Engineers

approval and shall be of equivalent grades of veneer and types of

bonding. External quality plywood shall have Grade 2 veneer with

81

WBP bonding and internal quality plywood shall have Grade 2

veneer with MR bonding.

9.2.9 Decorative Plastic Laminate

Decorative laminated plastic sheeting shall be 0.6 mm thick locally

available complying to BS 3794 Class 1. Colour and type shall be to the

approval of the Engineer. The manufacturer shall be as the approved list.

9.2.10 Fixing

Nails shall comply with BS 1202, screws with BS 1210, bolts with BS

916 and timber connectors with BS 1579.

9.2.11 Priming Coat

Priming Coat shall comply with BS 2521.

9.2.12 Wood Treatments

Prior to fixing in position, all the timber including ceiling frames, joints,

purlins, planks, all the door frames, furring strips, blocking, grounds,

nailing strips in contact with concrete or masonry or wood or other

materials shall first be treated with the pesticides designated in Section 3

on “Termite Control” of these Specifications in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions and complying with BS 1282.

9.2.13 Ground, Blocking and Nailing Strips

Ground, blocking and nailing strips shall be provided in ceiling and

elsewhere as necessary or as shown on Drawings to receive the Work

included herein ad as required for the Work of other trades.

Except as otherwise-shown or specified and approved by the Engineer,

ground, blocking and nailing strips shall be secured in place as follows:-

To steel – by means of 12mm diameter bolts spaced not over 100mm.

To concrete blocks - by the use of steel cut nails spaced not more than 4"

apart and driven directly into the block.

To poured concrete - by means of galvanized screws as per details shown

on the Drawings.

82

9:2.14 Glues

All glues and adhesives used in carpentry, joinery and in the door

manufacture shall be synthetic resin adhesives to BS 1204, unaffected

by oil, gasoline and solvents, resistant to the growth of fungus and

bacteria, immune from insects and such that the cured glue shall not be

harmed by paint and lacquer solvents. The Contractor shall furnish a

guarantee that the adhesives/glues used in the manufacture -of all

doors, joinery and paneling work conform to the Specifications stated

above All the samples of gluing materials shall be subject to the approval

of the Engineer before use.

9.2.15 Doors

a. Flush Doors

Flush doors shall be solid core flush doors generally in accordance

with BS 459 Part 2 in thickness and sizes as shown on the

Drawings and specified in the Bill of Quantities. The flush doors

shall be factory made from approved manufacturers. Doors shall

have lock blocks and shall be covered with 4mmthick teak veneer

on both sides. Doors shall have hardwood lipping to all edges

rebated on both faces for veneer plywood coverings leaving 6 mm

exposed in faces. The teak veneer shall be approved by the

Engineer and shall not be placed directly on the solid core but

shall properly be glued, pasted and pressed to the inner solid core.

The solid core of the door leaf shall be well seasoned. The veneer

used shall be of the first quality without patches, uniform in

colour, grain and hardness. The door leaves shall have a perfectly

smooth surface free from warping. The glue used for bonding

veneer or ply to the door leaf and blocking shall be first quality

waterproof glue of approved manufacturers and applied according

to manufacturer‟s instructions.

The overall thickness of leaf shall be as shown in the Drawings

and BOQ, but in no case shall be less than 40mm / 50mm thick.

Openings for glass for viewing panels in doors shall have glazing

fillets in accordance with BS 459. Part 2.

83

Doors fixed in pairs shall have rebated meeting stiles worked solid

with hardwood lipping. Separate fillet will not be permitted.

b. Paneled Doors

Paneled doors shall be fabricated from teak wood as per size and

panel detail shown on the Drawings & as per sample approved by

the Engineer.

9.3.16 Door Frames

Door Frames shall be fabricated from deodar wood as per the sizes and

details shown drawings and Bill of Quantities to receive door shutters

and as per the samples approved by the Engineer.

9.3.17 Wooden Louver Doors

It shown on Drawings, wooden louver doors shall be made in first quality

seasoned deodar wood frame with recesses on sides to receive louvers

shall be made per details shown on the Drawings from first quality

seasoned deodar wood planks and shall be securely fixed in the recess.

The frame shall be anchored by means of 6mm x 200mm M.S. hold fasts,

and shall be perfectly in line and plumb.

9.2.18 Miscellaneous

a. Architraves, Mouldings and Trims

Architraves, Mouldings, miscellaneous trim and scribe pieces shall

be provided as shown on Drawings and shall be in deodar wood

shop milled to type, profiles and machine sanded to a smooth and

even finish all to the approval Engineer. On running trim, all

outsides corners to be mitered and shall be leveled. All flat trim is

to be blocked out to prevent warp. Nailing is to be concealed

wherever practicable and all nails are to be driven below surface,

filled in and polished or painted as specified.

b. Kitchen Counters

All kitchen counters shall be constructed in .general accordance

with Drawings. All counter shall be soundly and solidly

constricted of approved hardwood timber and MDF "Lasani"

boards complying with above Specifications, finished on all

internal and external faces with plastic laminates in approved

84

colours and hardwood lipping all around. All worktops shall be 25

mm thick marble of approved quality and colour. Doors to be

faced with plastic laminate on both sides. Hinges and handles to

be best quality as approved by the Engineer. All kitchen counters

shall be trimmed to suit particular layouts and fixed to level and

plumb without distortions Details of proposed counters and

materials shall be submitted to Engineer for approval, and no

work shall be carried out until such approval has been received.

c. Toilet Counters

All toilet counters shall be constructed in general accordance with

Drawings All counters shall be soundly and solidly constructed of

approved hardwood timber and MDF "Lasani" boards complying

with above Specifications finished on all internal and external

faces with plastic laminates in approved colours and hardwood

lipping all around. All worktops shall be 25 mm or 20 mm thick

marble as shown on Drawings and of approved quality and

colour. Where required, cavities shall be cut

in marble tops to configurations and shapes for resting and fitting

of counter top type wash-hand basins of approved sizes in the

toilet counters. Doors to be faced with plastic laminates on both

sides. Hinges and handles to be best quality as approved by the

Engineer, All toilet fittings shall be trimmed to suit particular

layouts and fixed to level and plumb without distortions. Details of

proposed counters and materials shall be submitted to Engineer

for approval, and no work shall be carried out until such approval

has been received.

d. Access Panels

Access panels in toilets and elsewhere shall be fabricated and

installed at locations as shown on the Drawings.

9.2.19 General

a. Items of hardware specified herein shall be carefully fitted and

securely attached upon completion of the Work and in the

presence of the Engineer's Representative. Hardware shall be

85

demonstrated to work freely, keys fitted into their respective locks

and upon acceptance of the Work, keys shall be tagged and

delivered in duplicate to the Engineer's Representative.

b. All hardware shall be fixed with matching screws and shall be

properly fitted & lubricated to ensure proper operation. All

hardware is to be of best quality as specified, local or imported, to

the approval of the Engineer.

c. The Contractor shall submit samples of different hardware items

from various product ranges of manufacturers from the approved

list for the selection and approval of the Engineer. The approved

samples shall be retained by the Engineer to form standards

against which deliveries shall be judged.

d. The lock furniture shall be either stainless steel, brass or

aluminum. The

material and finish shall be all as detailed below and approved by

the Engineer.

9.2.20 Hardware Items

a. Hinges

Hinges shall be best quality stainless steel brass butt hinges,

imported complying with BS 1227 and approved by the Engineer.

b. Mortice Locks

i. Mortice locks shall have three lever locks complying with

BS 445, manufactured by Alpha Yale, Corbin or Mandelli or

equivalent. They shall have silver enamel pressed steel

case, brass striking plate, brass bolts, brass spring, brass

levers and two nickel plated keys.

ii. Locks to pairs of doors with rebated stiles shall have brass

or stainless steel rebated fore-end sets.

c. Door Closer

Overhead or floor mounted door closers shall be manufactured by

Yale, Corbin or Mandelli or equivalent.

86

d. Bolts

Bolts shall be locally available best quality brass or stainless steel

bolts as approved. The bolts shall be of brass or stainless steel

with brass / stainless steel shoots and brass / stainless steel

plates and sockets. Bolts to floors shall have brass / stainless

sockets slotted into the floor.

e. Door Stop

Door Stops shall be approved best quality locally available

magnetic door stops.

f. Handle with Latch

Handle with latch with indicator bolt shall be in brass/ stainless

steel, heavy duty, imported from Japan and approved by the

Engineer.

g. Kick Plate

Kick Plates shall be approved stainless steel or aluminum kick

plates in sizes shown on Drawings and in the Bill of Quantities.

h. Push Plate

Push Plates shall be approved aluminum push plates in sizes

shown on the Drawings and in the Bill of Quantities.

9.3 Workmanship

9.3.1 General

a. Carpentry workmanship generally shall be executed in accordance

with best, practice, members shall be cut, drilled and fixed

generally in accordance with the Drawings positioned and made

and with the Drawings.

b. Joinery workmanship shall generally comply with the standards

set out in BS 1186 Part 2 and as amplified herein. All joinery shall

be executed by craftsmen, and none is to be sublet except with the

approval of the Engineer.

c. Joinery delivered to Site in a properly protected ventilated

condition No joinery shall be fixed in position until all wet trades

have been completed and curing of cement-based elements

substantially completed.

87

d. All joinery is to be wrought, and be to the standards of surface

finish described hereinafter.

e. All joinery timber shall be sawn, placed, drilled and otherwise

machined or worked to the correct sizes and profiles shown on the

Drawings or as specified.

f. Joinery delivered to Site in a properly protected ventilated

condition. No joinery shall be fixed in position until all wet trades

have been completed, and curing of cement-based elements

substantially completed.

9.3.2 Finish

a. General standards of joinery surface finish shall be those suitable

for painting or polishing. A smooth fine surface free from all visible

imperfections is to be achieved. All hardwood for polishing to be

hand finished with scrapers and fine sand papers until every trace

of raised grain, handling, glue marks or other blemishes are

removed.

b. All exposed anises of all joinery items are to be sanded off to a

small radius to be agreed by sample.

9.3.3 Joints and Fixings

a. All necessary morticing, tenoning, grooving, matching; drilling;

dowelling, tonguing, rebating and all other work necessary for

proper and secure jointing shall be carried out in accordance with

best joinery practice. All formed joints to joinery in timber 32 mm

thick or more shall be double mortised and tenoned except where

described otherwise.

b. All joints are to be glued.

c. All joints and fixings shown on the Drawings shall be constructed

accurately where joints are not specifically indicated they shall be

the recognized forms of joints of each position; complying in all

cases with BS 1 186 Part 2.

d. All joint faces shall be accurately formed, wrought and with sharp

smooth anises and surfaces; all to be free of sawdust and other

88

dust, dirt, grease, etc. before gluing. All joints are to be positioned

as inconspicuously as possible.

e. Unless otherwise specified, it shall be assumed that joinery fixings

shall be at a maximum of T50 mm centres in timber-to-timber

joints. At 450 mm centres in timber-to-masonry joints.

f. All screw and bolt fixings shall be countersunk except where

otherwise specified, driven below surface, filled in and surfaces

polished or painted.

g. All joinery work fixed to masonry shall be screwed to Rawlplugs or

equal approved durable fibre or PVC masonry plugs, or where

necessary to metal anchorages. No joinery shall be a nail fixed, or

nails used in any jointing except where rough carcassing or

grounds are to be connected.

h. All joinery is to be made, assembled and fixed perfectly square,

plumb and level.

9.05.4 Miscellaneous

a. All architraves and mouldings shall be worked true to details and

shall be dressed and sand papered properly.

b. The plastic laminates as specified are to be glued to blackboard or

other backing materials with adhesives as specified or as

recommended by laminate manufacturers. All laminates are to be

balanced wherever fixed.

Laminates are to be cut and trimmed cleanly, using tools

recommended by the manufacturers and trimmed flush with bead

edges etc.

c. Doors and window frames shall-be built in with galvanized steel

cramps size 3x25x225 mm girth, one end turned up 50 mm, twice

drilled and screwed to timber frames. Three cramps to each side of

door frames shall be provided and two or more cramps to each

side of window frames, according to the size.

d. Doors shall be fitted, hung and trimmed as specified and as

indicated on Drawings. Doors shall have l/8" clearance at sides

and top unless otherwise directed by the Engineer and shall have

89

¼” clearance at bottom. Doors shall be hung and trimmed with

the ironmongery as specified. Locks shall be installed at the same

height as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.

e. Veneering shall be carried out in an approved manner and to the

satisfaction of the Engineer.

9.05.5 Hardware

a. Hinges shall be housed or let into the door or windows and the

frames.

b. All locks and other items shall be fixed at heights and positions

shown on the Drawings, properly cleaned, tested, oiled and all

keys shall be clearly

labeled.

9.05.6 Protection

a. All joinery to be painted shall be primed on all surfaces off Site in

the joinery shop, all in accordance with the painting

specifications.

b. The backs of all joinery frames and assemblies to be fixed to walls

and other surfaces shall be primed with 2 priming coats in all

cases; hardwood items shall be sealed; all this shall be completed

before fixing.

c. All joinery shall be carefully protected during delivery and Site

storage and after fixing from physical damage and shall be lined,

boxed or otherwise protected with temporary coverings where

directed by the Engineer.

d. All joinery is also to be protected against excessive changes in

temperature or humidity during the Contract.

e. All joinery damage occurring before Contract completion from

whatever cause shall be made good to the approval of the

Engineer.

f. Should any shrinkage or warping occur or any other defects

appear in the joinery work before the end of maintenance period,

all defective work shall be taken down and replaced to the entire

satisfaction of the Engineer at Contractor's own cost.

90

91

SECTION – 10

PAINTING & DECORATING

10.0 Painting & Decorating

10.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered in this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all

plant, labour, equipment. appliances and materials and in performing all

operations in connection with protective and general painting and finishing

complete in strict accordance with this section of the Specifications and the

applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

10.2 General

10.2.1 The term 'Paint" as used herein includes emulsion and enamel paints,

stains, varnishes, seals, primers- colour washes etc. All paint colours

shall

be as specified by the Engineer.

10.2.2 All painting materials are to be obtained only from approved

manufacturers ICI or Berger.

10.2.3 All materials shall be of the best quality in their respective categories,

and shall generally be applied in conformances with the provisions of

British Code of Practice 231.

10.2.4 Primers shall be those appropriate for the various kinds of building

materials to which they are applied and shall be as recommended by the

manufacturer.

10.2.5 All Paints are to be used only from unopened sealed containers exactly as

received from the manufacturer and shall be used in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions. The addition of thinners, dryers, water or

other additives shall only be permitted when specially recommended by

the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The type of additive and

the proportions for use shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

10.2.6 Materials are to be thoroughly stirred in the original containers and must

be used as delivered, not adulterated in any way or mixed with different

types or brands and shall be applied in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions.

92

10.2.7 Undercoatings shall be those recommended by the "paint manufacturer

as appropriate for the finishing coat used.

10.2.8 All paint colours shall be as specified or selected by the Engineer and the

Contractor shall include for all works in obtaining materials in such

colours as are specified in any combination and for all matching as

required.

10.2.9 Knotting

Knotting shall comply with BS 1336.

10.2.10 Stopping

Stopping shall be as follows;.

a. Stopping for plasterwork shall be approved plastic based filler.

b. Stopping for woodwork shall be a composition of chalk, zinc, gum,

colour pigments, mixed in white spirit or turpentine.

c. topping for clear finished woodwork shall be as above but tinted to

match the surrounding timber.

10.2.11 Primers

a. Priming to woodwork shall be Acrylic Primer or Aluminium Sealer,

as appropriate from ICI or Berger.

b. Priming to steelwork shall be Red Oxide Alkyd Primer from ICI or

Berger.

c. On all galvanized surfaces, first apply one coat of Etching primer,

then one coat of Alkyd base primer from ICI or Berger shall be

applied as per recommendations of the manufacturer.

d. For plaster, concrete, blockwork ceiling boards etc. Alkali

Resisting Primer shall be used from ICI or Berger.

10.2.12 Bituminous Paint

Black bituminous paint shall comply with B.S34.16 Type 1 for-general-

use.

10.2.13 Sundry

a. Turpentine shall comply with BS 244 and 270.

b. White spirit shall comply with BS 245.

c. Colours for paint shall comply with BS 4800.

d. Stain for woodwork shall comply with BS 1215.

93

10.2.14 Paint Generally

a. Paint shall show easy brushing, good flowing, spreading and

leveling properties. These properties will be demonstrated on test

specimens at the request of the Engineer. Coats that have any

noticeable pull under a large brush and that show poor or fair

spreading and flowing properties will not be acceptable.

b. Paint shall dry to a uniform, smooth, gloss or matt appearance

under ordinary conditions of illumination and wearing. There shall

be no laps, skips, highlighted spots or brush marks.

c. Recoating of a previously painted surface shall produce no

lighting, softening or other film irregularities.

d. All materials shall be kept in a clean, dry store so as to minimize

exposure to extremes of temperature.

10.3 Workmanship

10.3.1 All painting work shall in general conform with the provisions of British

Standard Code of Practice 231 "Painting of Buildings", with best building

practice, and in strict accordance with the recommendations of the

manufacturers supplying paint materials.

10.3.2 Before proceeding with the application of Painting & Decorating, the

Contractor shall inspect and ensure that all the surfaces are ready to

receive painting and decoration. The importance of correct preparation of

surfaces to be painted is emphasized; all requirements of this

Specification and of paint manufacturers in this regard shall be complied

with exactly and meticulously.

10.3.3 The conditions in which all painting work is carried out must be

controlled, and no work is to be undertaken in conditions where painted

surfaces are damp or dusty. The elimination of dust during painting

work is of particular importance, and every precaution must be taken to

keep dust down at all times.

10.3.4 All surfaces to be painted must be free from damp, condensation,

efflorescence, rust, chemical deposits, spillage of other materials etc.

10.3.5 All surfaces shall be swept clean and all surfaces dried out before

painting is started. All dust, dirt cement splashes, cement mortar,

94

grease, oil and other extraneous matter affecting the finishes shall be

removed. Foreign matter on surfaces shall also be removed.

10.3.6 All tools and equipment used for painting including spraying equipment,

brushes, rollers, cans, pails, trays and other containers, are to be kept

thoroughly clean throughout the' Work, and no dilution or contamination

of materials must be allowed to occur. Metal, electrical and other fittings

not required to be painted shall first be fitted, then removed before paint

reparation commences, only being replaced on completion.

10.3.7 All completed painted surfaces must be fully and completely covered and

obliterated by the paint application, full bodied, and even in texture and

colour. The edges are to be cut in neatly, straight, level and plumb, clean

against adjoining. surfaces. Undercoats shall be of different shades of

colours, to enable supervising distinctions to be made.

10.3.8 All completed and partly completed work shall be properly protected

against damage, spillage, etc. and all plant and materials including dust

sheets, protective grounds and sheeting, etc. necessary to achieve this

shall be included. Such protection shall also be provided to other fixed

surfaces not required to be painted particularly wall finishes, floor

finishes, metalwork, varnished work, etc. Any paint splashes, over-

painting, etc. of such surface shall be removed immediately and not left

to dry; removal of dried paint if occurring shall only be as recommended

by manufacturers; scratching, scraping and other mechanical means

leading to damage will not be permitted.

10.3.9 Finishing coats of paint shall not be applied to interior surfaces until all

other adjacent trades have completed work in this vicinity.

10.3.10 No spray painting will be allowed unless specifically approved by the

Engineer; this will only be given subject to stringent conditions on

masking, protecting and operatives health and safety.

10.3.11 On completion, all work shall be thoroughly cleaned, and left fit for

immediate use. .

10.4 Quality of Work

10.4.1 All painting and finishings shall be carefully done and left perfect. No

paint spots shall be left on glass hardware or other finished work. All

95

materials shall be applied by skilled tradesmen and all paint shall be

evenly spread and thoroughly brushed out. Finished surfaces shall be

uniform in gloss, finish and colour and shall be free from brush marks.

The applicator shall properly prepare all surfaces before painting by

cutting, stopping filling, etc., to ensure smooth and uniform surfaces.

10.4.2 All cutting to line and all lines of demarcation between paints of different

colours or shades shall be carefully drawn so as to be true and free from

binned edges.

10.4.3 Before application, materials in containers shall be thoroughly stirred,

unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer of the paint used, to

ensure uniformity of colour and mass, and all paint skins or other

materials which would cause lumps or roughness shall be strained out.

Materials shall be applied without the addition of any ingredients and

without reducing or thinning except as recommended by the

manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Engineer.

10.4.4 The finishing coat of paint to walls and ceilings shall be applied after the

completion and testing of the electrical installation. Any paint splashed

on electrical fittings, switches, sockets, outlets etc: shall be carefully

cleaned off.

10.4.5 Every possible precaution shall be taken to keep damp down just before

and during painting processes. No paint shall be applied to surfaces

damp structurally or superficially and all surfaces must be ascertained

to be free from condensation, efflorescence etc., before the application of

each cost. 10.4.6 Primed or undercoated woodwork and metalwork

should not be left in an exposed or unsuitable situation for any undue

period. No external painting shall be carried out under adverse weather

conditions, such as rain; extreme humidity, dust storms etc.

10.4.7 Metal fittings such as ironmongery etc., not required to be painted shall

first be fitted and then removed before the preparatory processes are

commenced. When all painting is completed the fittings shall be cleaned

and refixed in position.

10.4.8 The Contractor will be required to repaint at his own expense any work

on which from damage the paint work and all other work during and

96

after painting operation including the provision of all necessary dust

sheets; cover etc.

10.4.9 Each succeeding coat of priming and undercoating paint shall be

sufficiently different in colour to be readily distinguishable.

10.4.10 Brushes, pails, paint-pots, etc., used in carrying out the work shall be

clean and free from foreign matter. They shall be thoroughly cleaned

before being used for different types or classes of materials.

10.4.11 The use of kerosene in painting work is forbidden and its use by

workmen as thinners or for cleaning brushes etc. must be prevented by

the Contractor. All paintwork that is contaminated by kerosene will be

rejected and must be removed and repainted according to the

Specifications.

10.4.12 Primers shall be applied by brush. Each coat of paint shall be allowed

to harden before the next is applied. The work shall be well rubbed down

between each coat and cleaned off. No priming coats shall be applied

until the surfaces have been inspected and the preparatory work

approved by the Engineer. No undercoats or finishing coats shall be

applied until the previous coat has similarly been inspected and

approved.

10.4.13 Blisters or other imperfections in previous coats shall be removed

caused by foreign substances or paint skins from all painted surfaces

before the subsequent coat is applied. All wood and metal surfaces shall

be rubbed down before finishing and between coats with fine sandpaper

leaving a perfectly clean surface. Smooth finished surfaces shall be

sanded before finishing and between coats as required to smooth out

rough areas and to ensure smooth, even finish. All surfaces to receive

paint shall be smooth and free of all sandpaper scratches, mill marks,

and other imperfections, and except for coats applied in shop, shall be

inspected and approved by the Engineer before application of prime and

finish coats.

10.4.14 All hidden stained and natural finished woodwork shall be back sealed

with one coat of approved clear sealer. All hidden painted woodwork shall

be back-painted with one coat of approved synthetic wood primer. Paint

97

or seal edges of fixtures, equipment, and other materials where they

present an unfinished appearance.

10.5 Preparation

10.5.1 Rendered Surfaces

Surfaces shall be allowed to be completely dry for a period of atleast 5

weeks upon completion of curing time, then rubbed down, brushed

thoroughly to remove all loose particles, dirt, dust, etc. to produce a flat

surface free of projections and irregularities. All loose or defective areas

are to be cut out and made good with material to match render mix. All

efflorescence is to be removed by rubbing down, wiping off with damp

cloth; then allowing to dry-thoroughly the process to be repeated as

many times as necessary. All oil or grease is to be removed by the use of

approved solvents. All metal and other components capable of removal or

separation from the rendered surface shall be so removed or separated.

10.5.2 Fairfaced Concrete Surfaces

Preparation generally as for rendered surfaces. Lumps, projections and

other conspicuous shuttering marks, concrete spillage from shuttering

and other irregularities are to be removed by rubbing with carborundum,

grinding or other approved methods air holes and other cavities filled

with cement slurry grout, and the surfaces as a whole brought to a

uniform dense flat finish. Any large areas of making good are to receive

remedial work as provided for in the concreting Specifications. All oil and

grease, particularly surplus mould oil, is to be removed by approved

solvents.

10.5.3 Fairfaced Blockwork Surfaces

Preparation generally as for rendered surfaces. All irregularities in block

faces and mortar joints are to be filled, and all rubbed down to give a flat,

dense, fairfaced surface, dry but dust-free.

10.5.4 Plastered Surfaces

Preparation generally as for rendered surfaces. All irregularities of

surfaces to be sanded and glass papered off completely smooth, all holes

and low areas filled with Polyfilla or equal approved fillers, and all

brought to a uniform smooth glassy flat surface, dry but dust-free.

98

10.5.5 Timber Surfaces

a. Surfaces generally shall firstly be checked to ensure the moisture

content complies with that specified, then cleaned down to remove

all oil, grease, resins and other impurities, rubbed with

glasspaper, and all irregularities, lifting grains, etc. removed. They

are then to be knotted and stopped; loose large knots to be

removed and plugged with sound wood; small knots treated with

two coats of thinned shellac knotting to British Standard 1336.

Stopping to be approved filler, priming, paintmixed, all worked

well into holes. cracks, joints, etc., and then rubbed off perfectly

smooth and flush. Timber surfaces shall be presented for

inspection by the Engineer after preparation but before priming, to

ensure that the quality of all timber surfaces complies with the

Specifications before covering up.

b. Timber for polishing/varnishing is to be cleaned down and rubbed

smooth with several applications of glass paper to remove all

roughness, grease; stains and imperfections; it is assumed that

timber in this category has no imperfections requiring cutting out

or filling. Any fillers used in joints are to be stained to match the

colour of the timber.

10.5.6 Metal Surfaces

a. Galvanized Steel

Surfaces are to be cleaned and brushed to remove all oil, grease,

dirt and all other impurities; approved solvents to be used as

necessary. All rough edges are to be ground off, and the surfaces

then inspected minutely for any trace of rusting, due to damage to

the galvanizing from transport and handling or any other reason;

any such rust is then to be removed by wire brushing back to

clean metal and the galvanizing made good with a rust inhibiting

agent. Then, without delay made good by treatment with one full

coat of etching primer and then immediately primed with one coat

of alkyd base primer:

99

b. Steelwork

Unprimed surfaces shall be cleaned to remove grease and dirt,

and wire-brushed, sand blasted and scraped to remove all rust

and scale before applying a red oxide alkyd priming paint. Priming

paint shall be brushed well into the surface and shall be allowed

to dry and harden thoroughly before the application of subsequent

coats.

c. Miscellaneous

i. Items of steelwork such as frames which are to be built into

walls shall first be primed.

ii. Steel pipes will be treated as for steelwork with the

exception that galvanized pipes are to be treated with

etching primer and alkyd base primer.

iii. Coated soil pipes shall be wiped clean and treated with two

coats of knotting followed by priming paint.

iv. All scratches, cuts, cracks and abrasions in cement plaster

surfaces shall be cut out as required, then tilled with

approved patching cement or plastic based filler flush with

adjoining surfaces and when dry shall be sanded and

sealed before application of priming coat.

v. The Contractor shall touch-up finished coats of factory

finished items that become damaged before completion of

the building. Sand damaged areas smooth and apply primer

as recommended by the manufacturer before applying

finishing coat. Where spot touch up cannot be done neatly

and blended smooth with other finish material, repaint the

entire surface or panel as approved by the Engineer.

10.6 Paint Materials and Application

10.6.1 Emulsion Painting

a. The Specifications comprise a 3 coat application of Plastic Emulsion,

Vinyl Emulsion or Distemper paint, from Imperial Chemical Industries

Limited (ICI), Paints Division, or Berger Paints, high quality paints,

complying with the relevant British Standards.

100

b. The previously prepared surfaces shall be given one sealer coat of Alkali

Resistant Primer applied by brush or roller. After drying, surface shall be

prepared by stopping, rubbing and sanding.

c. The previously primed and prepared surface shall be given the first coat

of thinned emulsion paint.

d. After drying, but in no case until a period of 4 hours has elapsed, a

second coat of unthinned emulsion paint shall be applied by brush or

roller, followed by a third coat under the same conditions, until

frillbodied coverage and. obliteration is obtained.

10.6.2 Enamel Painting

a. The Specifications comprise a 3-coat matt or gloss enamel paint

application over a priming coat selected according to the nature of

the surface to be painted as per recommendations of the

manufacturer.

Priming paints are to be as follows:

i. Concrete; rendered or plastered surfaces: Alkali Resisting

Primer by ICI or Berger.

ii. Timber surfaces to be painted: Acrylic Primer by ICI or

Berger

iii. Steelwork: Red Oxide Primer by ICI or Berger

iv. Galvanized steel surfaces: Etch Primer and Alkyd Base

Primer by ICI or Berger

b. Application to concrete rendered or plastered surfaces:

The previously prepared surfaces shall be primed with a brush

application of priming paint as specified above; then given 2 coats

undercoat, brush or roller applied; then given l coat matt or gloss

finish, brush applied. All paints from LC.I. Limited, Paints Division

or Berger Paints, complying with the relevant British Standards.

c. Application to timber surfaces:

The previously prepared surfaces shall be primed with a brush

application of priming paint specified as above; then given 2 coats

of undercoat; brush applied; then given I coat of gloss or matt

finish, brush applied. All paints from I.C.I. Limited; Paints

101

Division or Berger Paints, complying with the relevant British

Standards.

d. Application to galvanized steel surfaces:

The previously prepared surfaces shall be primed with a brush

application of the priming paint specified above then given 2 coats

of undercoat, brush applied, then 1 coat of gloss or matt finish,

brush applied to the approval of the Engineer. All paints from

I.C.I. Limited, Paints Division or Berger Paints, complying with the

relevant British Standards.

e. Application to steelwork:

The previously prepared surfaces shall be primed with a brush

application of the priming paint specified above then given 2 coats

of undercoat, brush applied, then 1 coat of gloss or matt finish,

brush applied to the approval of the Engineer. All paints from

I.C.I. Limited, Paints Division or Berger Paints, complying with the

relevant British Standards.

10.6.3 Polishing/Lacquer

a. Material

All polishing/laquer materials like shellac, varnish, gum,

pigments, thinners, spirit etc. shall be of the best quality duly

approved by the Engineer. The constituents for polishing /

varnishing shall be prepared by experienced, skilled professional

painter / polishers.

b. Application of Polish / Varnish

It is a multi-coat system. The previously prepared surfaces shall

be given 1 coat of thinned polish/varnish as specified above,

thinned with approved thinner, brush applied. When dry, the

surface is to be rubbed down with fine glass paper, then given a

second coat of unthinned polish/varnish, followed after similar

rubbing down by a third coat until the desired finish is obtained to

the approval of the Engineer.

102

10.7 Protection

10.7.1 Furnish and lay suitable drop cloths in all areas where painting is

being

done to protect floors and all other surfaces from damage during

the work.

10.7.2 In no case attempt be made to paint around finish hardware or

other items that are already fitted in place without removing or

proper protection and masking, as may be applicable.

10.7.3 At completion of work in each area, remove all paint spots, oil, and

stain

from all surfaces, including hardware.

10.7.4 Adequate care shall be taken to protect surfaces while still wet by

the use of screens and 'wet paint' signs in both English and Urdu

where necessary.

103

SECTION – 11

ALUMINIUM DOORS AND WINDOWS

11.0 Aluminum Doors and Windows

11.1 Scope of Work

The Work to be done under this section of Specifications consists of fabrication,

supply and installation of aluminum doors and windows including glazing, fly

screen and hardware as shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with

this section of Specifications and subject to the terms and conditions of the

Contract.

11.2 General

11.2.1 All the aluminum doors and windows shall be fabricated and supplied by

approved local manufacturers as per approved details and shop

drawings.

11.2.2 Aluminum doors, windows ventilators, screens and walls of the

following types shall be supplied unless stated otherwise or shown on the

Drawings.

a. Single glazed fixed windows

b. Double glazed fixed windows

c. Single glazed ventilators

d. Glazed Screens/ Walls

e. Glazed screens and floor-hinged doors

11.2.3 Aluminum doors, windows ventilators and screens/walls shall comply

with the requirements of BS 4873.

11.2.4 All aluminum doors, windows, ventilators and screens/walls shall have a

minimum anodic film thickness of 25 microns.

11.2.5 All units shall be complete with all necessary glazing inserts, sealing

strips, gaskets, skids, weather strips, glazing beads and all necessary

hardware.

11.2.6 Doors shall be fitted with suitable heavy duty hinges, locks, latches, pull

handles. push plates and floor springs, as specified.

11.2.7 Aluminum units shall be deigned to resist penetration of external

moisture to the inside of the building. Fixing of frames for all units to the

building shall be such as to ensure solid, void free, waterproof joints. The

104

joints shall be caulked with a building mastic which does not sag or run,

non-hardening, non-staining and can be painted.

11.2.8 The aluminum frame shall be secured with stainless steel or aluminum

screws and shall be bedded in mastic all round.

11.2.9 Shop Drawings

a. The Contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings and

obtain Engineer's approval before proceeding with the fabrication

and installation. The Contractor shall check site dimensions and

make fabricated work correspond to the approved shop drawings.

b. Drawings shall show in detail the various portions of the work,

kind of materials, size of members, and methods of securing same

together and to the work of other trades.

11.2.10 Coordination

a. The Contractor shall coordinate with other trades in obtaining the

exact site dimensions and shall be responsible for the accurate

execution of all parts of the work specified. All fastening shall be

concealed where possible. The approved shop drawings shall be

followed exactly.

b. All metal shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines

or angle. Shearing and punching shall be left clean to true lines

and surfaces.

11.2.11 Supply

All aluminium doors, windows, .ventilators and screens/walls shall be

designed fabricated and supplied by approved manufacturers/suppliers.

Doors, windows, ventilators and screens/walls are to be supplied

complete, designed, fabricated and delivered by a single company

responsible for all aspects of the performance of the items. Fixing and

glazing may be by others but only by approved companies and methods,

and in full accordance with the recommendations and requirements of

the window suppliers.

105

11.03 Materials

11.3.1 Aluminum

a. All aluminium extruded sections shall comply with BS 1470 to BS 1474

and shall be manufactured by Pakistan Cables, Japan Metal or ALCOP.

Certificates of origin shall be supplied in all cases.

b. All aluminum shall be anodized to comply with BS 3987 and 1615 with

an anodic film thickness of not less than 25 microns. All exposed

surfaces are to be anodized.

c. Aluminium shall be supplied in natural matt anodized finish to the

approval of the Engineer.

11.3.2 Other Components

a. All glazing gaskets are to be extruded Neoprene or Hypalon.

b. All draught seals are to be either in Neoprene as above, or in approved

nylon pile, of density and configuration suitable for the designed

condition.

c. All fly screens are to be approved pattern aluminum screens.

11.3.3 Fixings

All fixings shall be in aluminium, non-ferrous metal or stainless steel. In no

circumstances shall untreated or painted steel fixings be employed on any part

of any door or window component.

11.3.4 Glass and Glazing

Glazing shall be provided as shown in Drawings and Bill of Quantities and shall

meet the Specification requirements as described in "Section 12 - Glass &

Glazing".

11.4 Design and Fabrication

11.4.1 General

a. All aluminium doors, \windows, ventilators. screens/walls shall

be designed in detail by the Contractor, on the basis of the general

configuration shown in the Drawings, and the performance

specifications shown herein. Full size and other detail Drawings

indicate typical sections indicating generally acceptable

configurations and essential overall dimensions; they are not to be

106

read as detailed requirements, particularly soar as extruded

sections are concerned.

11.4.2 Standards

a. All doors, windows, ventilators, screens/walls shall be designed to

conform with all the provisions of BS 4873, 1972, BS 4315 Part I,

and BS DD4 1971.

b. Whether specified or implied in the above standards or not, all

doors. windows, ventilators, screens/walls shall be designed and

fabricated so

as to be perfectly stable, sound, square, undistorted, level plumb

and capable of withstanding the wind pressures, weathering by

water and sand, and mechanical damage in usage. All opening

and moving or sliding sections shall operate quietly, smoothly and

perfectly without distortion and without undue effort from the

user. Due provision shall be made for the containing and safe

channeling and disposal of condensation, and for the exclusion

and/or containing channeling and clearance of wind-borne sand

and fine dust.

11.4.3 Joints

All joints shall be formed and executed perfectly square and sound, in

accordance with the specified standards; either welded, riveted, bolted,

screwed, or otherwise secured in accordance with the design

requirements. Due provision shall be made for thermal movement

without affecting the weather or air-tightness of the windows.

11.4.4 Opening Sections and Hardware

a. All opening sections, 'of whatever type, shall be such as to open

fully, and quietly and smoothly as defined above, and to close fully

and effectively so as to exclude water, wind, sand and dust;

closing devices, draught stripping and other gear and components

shall be incorporated

accordingly. All hardware shall be of design and appearance

subject to the detailed approval of the Engineer, and be positioned

in accessible positions, easily maintained. All sliding tracks,

107

wheels, bearings, hinges, pivots and other moving or bearing parts

shall be designed for permanence and frequent use, ease of

lubrication, maintainable, and where appropriate be removable for

periodic replacement. Special provision shall be made in the

design of moving parts for the effects of sand and dust on bearing

surfaces.

b. All floor hinged doors shall be provided with C-type stainless steel

pull handles.

11.4.5 Glazed Screens and Doors

Where ranges of glazed doors and fixed glass walls, screens or

panels are require coupled together horizontally, these shall be

provided in aluminum frame as shown on the Drawings. The

doors shall be installed with floor mounted hinges and C-type

stainless steel pull handles.

11.4.6 Sealants

All sealants used in aluminum window construction shall be

mastics to the approval of the Engineer.

11.4.7 Cleaning

All aluminum windows and doors shall be arranged, in particular

in the fashion opening lights are slid, hinged, set, offset or

otherwise arranged, to facilitate cleaning and maintenance.

11.5 Approvals

Detailed shop drawings, arrangement drawings, full sized details, specifications'

and all shop drawings, other fabrication and fixing details shall be provided by

the Contractor for approval by the Engineer before fabrication commences. All

the work shall be carried out in conformance with the Specifications and

approved shop drawings.

11.6 Samples

11.6.1 Samples of all extruded sections, fixings, sealants and other components

shall be provided for the approval of the Engineer. Approved samples

shall be kept by the Engineer to judge the deliveries. Cost of all samples

shall be deemed to be included in the rates.

108

11.6.2 Sample windows, one of each type, including all hardware and other

components, shall be supplied to Site for the approval of the Engineer.

11.7 Fixing

All aluminum windows, ventilators, screens and doors shall be fixed in strict

accordance with the manufacturers detailed requirements and

recommendations, using only fixing components specified by them, by operative

experience in this work. All windows, ventilators, screens and doors shall be

solidly and rigidly fixed, square, level, plumb and without distortion; all opening

lights and hardware are to be eased, oiled and otherwise left operating

smoothly.

All aluminium protection is to be left in place until all surrounding wet trades

have been completed and cured; then removed by approved means.

11.8 Protection.

11.8.1 All the aluminium doors, windows, ventilators, screens/walls and other

items shall be protected throughout the Contract period.

11.8.2 Any damage occurring to any of the member of the doors, windows or

screens before the Contract completion from whatever cause shall be

rectified or replaced at Contractor's cost, all to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.

109

SECTION – 12

GLASS AND GLAZING

12.0 Glass and Glazing

12.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered in this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all

plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all

operations in connection with the supply and installation of glass and glazings,

complete in strict accordance with this section of the Specifications and the

applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

12.2 General

All glass shall be of best quality imported from Belgium or USA from the

approved manufacturers as per the approved list and shall be free from specks,

bubbles and other defects and shall give undistorted vision. It shall be of the

type, quality, colour, thickness and size as shown on Drawings or approved by

the Engineer. All glass shall comply with BS 952 or other relevant applicable

British Standard.

12.3 Materials

12.3.1 Clear Plate Glass

Clear plate glass shall comply with BS 952 Part I M Table 2, Ordinary

Glazing Quality.

i) The single glazing shall comprise of 5mm thick clear plate glass in

aluminum frame.

ii) The double glazing shall comprise of an assembly of two glass

panels of clear plate glass each 6 mm thick, with a 12 mm

separator between them.

12.3.2 Clear Laminated Glass

Clear Laminated glass shall comply with BS 952, ASTM C1036 or C1048.

The thickness shall be 6 mm.

12.3.3 Glass Bricks

Glass bricks/ blocks shall be best quality imported glass bricks/ blocks,

to the approval of the Engineer and shall comply with BS 1207.

12.3.4 Sealants /Gaskets

110

All sealants, neoprene gaskets, tapes, cords, bedding materials, etc. shall

be those recommended by the manufacturer for application to

aluminium or other window frame materials to suit the environmental

conditions.

12.4 Workmanship

12.4.1 All rebates, grooves, etc. for glazing shall be prepared by thoroughly

cleaning of all dirt, dust, oil, grease and other foreign matter. All glass

shall be cut to suit each opening, perfectly square, and with due

allowance for glazing tolerances, thermal expansion as recommended by

the manufacturer.

12.4.2 Glass is to be handled with care, and placed into openings without

distortion, set on such spacers, sprigs or other components

recommended

12 4.3 All glazing secured by neoprene gaskets is to be held in place by full

enclosure of askets, applied with approved tools, corners continuously

gasketted not mitred.

12.4.4 All glazing, by whatever method employed, shall be completely watertight

and sound, and generally be in accordance with B.S.C.P: 152 Section

4/404.

12.4.5 All glass shall thoroughly be cleaned on completion.

12.5 Glazed Walls and Screens

12.5.1 All glazed walling and screens shall be in the form of an aluminium

framed system recommended by the manufacturer and shall also

incorporate weathering capping. The system shall be fabricated and

installed by approved specialist subcontractors.

12.5.2 Glazing bars, cappings and gaskets shall be designed as an integrated

system. In conjunction with the glazing, all in accordance with the

provisions of B.S. Code or Practice 145 Part 1:1, so as to be perfectly

weatherproof in the conditions specified in the B.S.C.P., be structurally

stable in the conditions imposed by span superimposed loads and wind

loads, provide means for the escape of condensation, and be non

combustible. All components shall be in aluminium alloy, gasketing in

neoprene, and all fixings in stainless steel or non-ferrous metals.

111

12.5.3 Glazed doors incorporated in the glazed screens/walls shall be floor

mounted hinged doors in top and bottom aluminium frame. Glazed

screens/ walls shall also be installed in top and bottom aluminium

frame. The doors shall be provided with C-type stainless steel pull

handles.

12.5.4 All aluminum shall be finished as natural matt anodized or as specified

in the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

12.5.5 All areas shall be single or double glazed as shown on Drawings,

incorporating glass as separately specified on Drawings.

12.5.6 Fabrication and layout drawings, structural calculations, aluminium

sections and full specification details shall be produced for Engineer's

approval before manufacture commences.

12.5.7 All glazing shall be as specified to the approval of Engineer.

12.6 Acceptance and Cleaning

12.6.1 Labels showing glass manufacturer's identity, type of glass, thickness

and quality will be required on each piece of glass. Labels must remain

on glass until it has been set and inspected.

12.6.2 Any labels, smears, stains; marks, spots and dirt etc. shall be removed

from the glass and the glass shall be washed clean on both sides taking

care not to scratch or damage the glass.

12.6.3 Plaster, mortar, .paint, excess sealant, putty etc. or any other material

shall be removed immediately after contact with the glass and shall not

be permitted to remain on the glass surface.

12.7 Guarantee

Contractor shall provide a guarantee that all glazing joints in exterior openings

shall remain water tight for a period of at least ten years after the acceptance of

the building. The Contractor shall also guarantee that during the above period;

glazing gaskets & sealants shall not crack, do out, crumble or fall away from

smash on glass.

12.8 Samples

Samples of all kinds of materials to be used on the job shall be submitted to the

Engineer for approval. Approved samples shall be retained by the Engineer to

form standards against which all deliveries will be judged.

112

12.9 Testing

All materials shall be subject to standard testing and specifications such as

ASTM, British Standard or equivalent. If any item found below the specified

standard, shall be rejected and removed from the Site immediately and replaced

by the Contractor at his own cost.

12.10 Protection

Glass shall be protected against damage. Any damaged or broken glass shall be

removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost to the approval of the

Engineer.

113

SECTION – 13

MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK

13.0 Miscellaneous Metal Work

13.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered in this section of the Specifications 1all consists of furnishing

all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all

operations in connection with the fabrication and installation of miscellaneous

metal works, complete in strict accordance with this section of the

Specifications and the applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and

conditions of the Contract.

13.2 General

13.2.1 All metal shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines

or angles. Shearing and punching shall be left clean to true lines and

surfaces. Shop connection shall be welded or riveted and site

connections bolted unless otherwise noted. Use flat headed countersunk

rivets where riveted connections are exposed to view in finished work.

Bolts shall be turned up tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening.

All bolts shall be provided with washers.

13.2.2 Fox exposed connections with hair line joints which are flush and

smooth concealed fasteners shall be used wherever possible. If exposed

fasteners are unavoidable, use countersunk flathead screws or bolts.

13.2.3 All metals shall be free from corrosion, scale, distortion and other

damage, and only new material shall be used for fabrication purposes.

13.2.4 Coordination with other Trades

a. All work under this section shall be coordinated with the work to

be done as specified under other sections of the Specifications and

as well as with other trades.

b. The Contractor shall furnish all information and instructions

required for work by other trades.

c. The Contractor shall drill, tap, cut and fit the work included

herein as required to accommodate work of other trades in

conjunction with it.

114

d. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining exact site

dimensions and accurate execution of all parts of the work

specified.

e. All the works shall be carried out exactly in accordance with the

approved shop drawings.

13.2.5 Samples

Samples or materials specified shall be submitted for approval when

required by the Engineer.

13.3 Materials

13.3.1 Steel

a. All steel sections shall comply with BS 4, parts 1 and 2, and BS

4848 Steel shall be mildsteel complying with BS 4360, Grades

43A, 43B and 43C as appropriate.

b. Steel M.S. Angle for structural and general engineering purposes

shall comply with BS 1775.

c. M.S. Angle and ladder / balustrades shall comply with, BS 1387

designation of either light, medium or heavy and the steel pipe

fittings

shall comply with BS 1740.

d. Stainless steel sections shall be to BS 970, quality En. 58A.

stainless steel pipes shall be to BS 3605.

e. All steel shall be supplied from a specifically approved source,

from approved manufacturers, and certificates of origin and mill

test certificates shall be supplied in all cases, proof of compliance

with the relevant standards shall be a condition of approval.

13.3.2 Nuts, Bolts and Screws

a. Nuts and bolts etc. shall comply with BS 4190 and BS 1494 and

shall have SI metric threads complying with BS 3643.

b. Stainless steel bolts are to be set bolts and shall comply with BS

4190. The stainless steel for bolts nuts and washers shall comply

with BS 970, quality En 58 A.M.

c. Self-tapping screws shall comply with BS 4194.

115

13.4 Fabrication

13.4.1 General Fabrication

a. All steel and other metals are to be cut, drilled, formed, bent,

worked and otherwise fabricated to the details, forms and

dimensions indicated on the approved shop drawings setting out

joints and fixings are to be such as to produce finished

components that are perfectly square, sound and rigid. All

members are to be of the sizes specified, and no alterations,

additions or omissions in the size or arrangements of members

may be made without Engineer's approval. The inclusion of

gussets, bracing plates, fixing lugs, spacers, packing, etc. in the

interests of rigidity or ease of fixing may be considered, but on a

specific approval from the Engineer.

b. All open-ended members, including hollow sections, shall be

capped off with welded plates or caps: no hollow surfaces which

cannot be galvanized or maintained are to be left exposed to

atm6sphere, whether shown so on Drawings or not.

c. The provision of BS 449 shall apply generally to fabrication

workmanship.

13.4.2 Joints

a. All steel joints specified as welded shall be cleanly and solidly

welded, in general accordance with the provisions of BS 5135,

using electrodes as specified in BS 639. All welds shall be

continuous, solid, with no spot welding, and shall be ground off

smooth flush and perfect on completion.

b. All joints specified as bolted, screwed or otherwise mechanically

connected shall be properly set out to provide sufficient but not

excessive tolerance. holes drilled accurately, and then soundly and

solidly connected. All bolts, screws and connectors shall be either

hotdipped galvanized steel, stainless steel or non-ferrous metal. no

untreated steel fixing device is to be used in any circumstances.

Fixings shall be selected suitable for the particular purposes and

Engineer's approval obtained.

116

13.4.3 Tolerances

a. All metalwork shall be fabricated to overall dimensions so as to

provide sufficient but not excessive tolerances between the

components and adjoining work, and between adjoining metal

components, bearing in mind building materials tolerances,

thermal expansion, erection distortions and all other factors.

13.4.4 Drawings and Calculations

Detailed fabrication and shop drawings and, where appropriate,

structural calculations shall be prepared by the Contractor for the

approval of the Engineer for all the fabricated components. These shall

be approved before commencement of work and should indicate all

connections, fixing, methods of fabrication. and all other relevant details.

13.4.5 Finishes and Protection

a. All galvanized steel and other metal components specified for

painting shall be finished in a smooth workmanlike fashion, free of

irregularities of surface burrs, galvanizing excess mill marks, oil,

grease, dirt, etc. ready for painting.

b. Anodized aluminium and other self-finished metalwork shall in

addition be perfectly clean, and free from manufacturing marks or

numbers, etc.

c. All metalwork shall be protected during transportation delivery,

storage on Site, and after erection, by such measures as shall be

agreed with the Engineer, to prevent damage of any type, in

particular scratching, denting, distortion, and other mistreatment.

Materials so damaged will not be acceptable, and shall have to be

replaced.

13.4.6 Riveting

Riveting where exposed shall be flush unless otherwise indicated on

Drawings or directed by the Engineer.

13.4.7 Bolting

Bolting, where permitted, shall be done with proper size bolts. Nuts shall

be drawn tight and thread nicked.

117

13.4.8 Steel

The use of Structural Steel in Buildings shall comply with BS 449 Part 2.

13.4.9 Welding

a. Welding of all steel shall comply with BS 5 L35. All welded joints

which will be exposed shall be ground to a smooth finish. All

welding shall be executed by experienced certified welders.

b. Welding shall be continuous except where tack-welding is

specifically permitted. Tack welding will not be permitted on

exposed surfaces.

13.4.10 Shop Finishing

a. Provide a zinc coating for the items shown or specified to be

galvanized using the hot dip process after fabrication.

b. Shop paint all ferrous metalwork except galvanized work and

those portions of items which are to be embedded in concrete or

masonry' and surfaces and edges which are to be site welded.

c. Remove scale, nest and other deleterious materials before the

shop coat of paint is applied.

d. Immediately after surface preparation, metal primer paint be

applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Use

painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints,

comers, edges and all exposed surfaces.

13.4.11Installation

a. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where- necessary for

securing to finished work including threaded fasteners for

concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, rag-

bolts, wood screws and other connectors as necessary.

b. Cut, drill and fit as necessary for installation. Set the work

accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level and

true. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items

which are to be cast or built into concrete, masonry or similar

construction. Form right joints with exposed connections

accurately fitted together. Do not cut or abrade members with

finishes which cannot be completely restored on Site. Where

118

cutting, welding and grinding are required for fitting and jointing

of the work, restore finishes to eliminate any evidence of such

corrective work.

c. Cam out all welds and carefully make good on completion.

d. Immediately after erection, clean all site welds, bolted connections

and rough areas of the shop paint and coat all exposed areas with

the same material as used for shop painting.

e. Paint areas around welds of galvanized metals with galvanizing

repair

paint and coat rough areas with the same paint.

13.4.12 Storage and Handling

a. All items described under this Section shall be handled, delivered

andstored in a manner that will avoid damage, rust or

deformation. Items shall be stored off-ground and shall be entirely

covered with weatherproof coverings in storage area.

b. Items which become rusted or damaged because of non-

compliance with these conditions will be subject to rejection, and

such items shall

be replaced without additional cost to the Employer.

13.4.13 Protection

a. Before arriving on Site, all surfaces of hot-dip galvanized method

which are damaged, have rough spots or joints (which must be

welded after hot-dip galvanizing), shall be touched up, using an

approved zinc primer coat. Primer shall be compatible for finish

paint. Hot dip galvanized items shall not receive a shop coat of

primer so that there may be a visual inspection on Site of such

items by the Engineer.

b. Thoroughly insulate all non-ferrous items in contact with

dissimilar metals, concrete, masonry and mortar with approved

zinc-chromate coating or plastic membrane on contact surfaces

before installation.

119

13.5 Miscellaneous Items

13.5.1 Hollow Metal Frames and Doors

Metal doors shall comprises of M.S. frames and shutters. All shape and

sizes of complete unit as well as components shall be strictly in

accordance with details shown on the Drawings, fabricated, painted and

fixed to hollow metal frame as per details shown on the Drawings.

a. Frames

i. All hollow metal frames shall be fabricated using 16 gauge

M.S. sheets of best quality, free from all defects, and in

accordance with the details indicated on the Drawings and

Bill of Quantities.

ii. Frames shall be constructed as full welded units from

approved manufacturers as per approved shop drawings.

iii. All corners mitred and back-welded and any exposed welds

at all joints ground and dressed smooth.

iv. Anchors shall be provided as per approved details, 225 mm

long, three to jambs and welded to frame at shop for

embedding in blockwork.

v. All frames shall have channel spreaders. Frames cut,

reinforced, mortised, drilled and tapped as required for

application of all hardware. All frames shall be fabricated as

per final approved hardware schedule.

vi. Rubber/Neoprene bumper or sound absorbers shall be

installed 3 per strike jamb.

vii. All contact edges shall be closed tight.

viii. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance

and free from defects, warps, bulges or buckles. Moulded

members shall be clean-cut straight with true edges.

ix. All cut-outs shall be protected against mortar or plaster

with mortar guards of approved gauge.

x. After the frame is fabricated, all tool marks shall be ground

smooth, all exposed surfaces degreased and thoroughly

cleaned of rust, oil and other impurities and coated with

120

approved primer to enable the surface of the metal to resist

corrosion and promote paint adhesion. The remaining

irregularities specially welding shall be dressed smooth.

b. Doors

Single or double leaf doors shall be fabricated from 20 gauge M.S. sheets

of best quality and free from all defects and in accordance with the

details indicated on the Drawings and Bill of Quantities. The doors shall

be manufactured from approved manufacturer as per the approved shop

drawings. The door shall be provided with hinges and ready to receive

locks etc.

c. Installation

i. Doors and frames that are fabricated and brought on the Site

shall be approved by the Engineer before installation. Any

defective or substandard work shall not be acceptable.

ii. Doors and frames shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's drawings and recommendations, all to the

satisfaction of the Engineer.

d. Painting

i. One coat of anti-corrosion primer paint shall be applied to all

exposed surfaces before the door and frame is installed. After this

another base coat of enamel paint should be given.

ii. After the door and frame has been installed properly, three coats

of enamel paint of an approved quality and shade shall be finally

applied to all exposed surfaces,

e. Storage and Handling

The Contractor shall be responsible for storage, handling and protection

of the material on the job. Scratches, holes, dents and nicks and other

marring of the paint film will have to be made good and touched up

without any extra cost.

13.5.2 Sliding Shutters

Sliding Shutters single/double with rollers and roller tracks shall be fabricated,

painted and installed as per details shown on the Drawings and to the approval

of the Engineer.

121

11.5.3 Pipe Handrail

Stainless Steeel pipe hand rail shall be fabricated and installed, as per details

indicated on Drawings & Bill of Quantities, by approved manufacturers in

accordance with approved shop drawings. The pipe handrail shall be of 50mm

dia S.S. fixing brackets/plates and screws etc., painted and installed.

122

123

SECTION 14

SUSPENDED CEILINGS

14.0 Suspended Ceilings

14.01 Scope of Work

The Work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,

labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in

connection with the installation of suspended ceilings at locations shown on the

Drawings, complete in strict accordance with this section of the Specifications and

applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

14.02 General

14.02.1 Suspended ceilings to be provided at the project shall be as

following:

DAMPA Mineral Fibre Ceiling (Imported)

14.02.2 All the suspended ceilings shall be installed in conformance with

British Code of Practice: CP 290.

14.02.3 In most cases, ceilings are intended to conceal or contain services.

The Contractor shall liaise directly with the mechanical and

electrical services specialists and following this shall prepare

detailed reflected ceiling plans and shop drawings of each area of

ceiling indicating the intended method of framing, tile layout,

position of electrical light fittings, smoke detectors, HVAC diffusers

and grilles etc. for the approval of Engineer. Requirements for

removable access panels shall be determined by the services

specialists and indicated on the drawings accordingly. Suspended

ceilings shall then be installed as per the approved shop drawings.

14.02.4 Suspended ceilings shall be installed by specialist subcontractors

as per the recommendations 'of the manufacturers in conformity

with the approved shop drawings and to the approval of the

Engineer.

14.03 Samples

14.03.1 The Contractor shall provide samples of the mineral fibre ceiling

tiles and proposed suspension and framing systems for the

selection and approval of the Engineer. The samples shall be in

124

finished sizes and shape, the cost of which shall be deemed to be

included in the rates. The approved samples shall be retained by

the Engineer to form standards against which deliveries will be

judged.

14.03.2 All the materials shall be supplied from the approved

manufacturers as per the samples approved by the Engineer.

14.04 Materials and Installation

14.04.1 Mineral Fibre Ceiling

Mineral fibre ceiling shall comprise of imported mineral fibre

ceiling panels (non-directional fissured) with exposed grid

suspension system from DAMPA or approved equivalent made of

high strength extruded aluminium sections, stove enamel painted

comprising of main tee runners spaced at 4 ft. centres, cross tee

runners and angle edge trim. Suspension shall be made by means

of adjustable suspenders of 8 SWG galvanized steel wire cadmium

plated spring clips, fixed at 4 ft. centre to centre. The suspenders

shall be fixed to the slab/beam soffit with approved anchors. All

the items shall be imported from the approved manufacturers and

installed by approved specialists as per manufacturers

recommendations.

14.05 Workmanship

14.05.1 The installation of suspended ceiling shall be carried out by

approved specialist subcontractors with adequate experience in

this field.

14.05.2 The Work shall generally by executed in accordance with best

practice: members shall be cut, drilled and framed, joints made;

fixings positioned and made, and work assembled and fixed

generally in accordance with approved shop drawings and

manufacturers recommendations.

14.05.3 The workmanship shall generally comply with the standards set

out in BS CP 290.

14.05.4 All suspended ceilings shall be set out and installed in

accordance with the details shown on the approved reflected

125

ceiling plans and shop drawings and no modification in form or

detail may be made except with the specific approval of the

Engineer.

All light fixtures, grilles and diffusers etc. shall be fixed as per

approved plans.

14.05.5 No suspended ceilings shall be fixed until all wet trades and

services above have been completed.

14.06 Protection

14.06.1 All the suspended ceilings shall be protected throughout the

Contract period.

14.06.2 Any damage occurring to the, suspended ceiling before the

Contract completion from whatever cause shall be made good or

replaced at Contractor's cost, all to the approval of the Engineer.

14.07 Measurement and Payment

Suspended ceilings shall be measured per square meter and paid at the unit

rates entered in the Bill of Quantities inclusive of all framing, suspension

system, accessories, painting, access panels, recesses for lights, grilles,

diffusers etc., complete in all respect.

126

127

SECTION 15

WATER SUPPLY & SEWERAGE

15.1 Water Supply And Sanitary Fittings. The Contractor shall construct

plumbing and drainage as shown on the Drawings and specified herein in

accordance with the ASTM, British Standards Specifications or an approved

equivalent. All pipes/fittings shall be accompanied by copies of manufacturer‟s

test certificates. The Contractor shall execute plumbing work completely, even

though some requirements may not be contained in the specifications or

indicated in the Drawings. All water supply /sanitary fixtures shall be

connected with water and shall terminate into the soil /water/sewerage and

waste system..

Roof leaders are also to be connected to a separate installation of drainage

indicated on the Drawings and terminated at the storm water drainage system.

The Contractor shall furnish all skilled and unskilled labour, as well as all

materials, piping, fittings, valves, fixtures and appliances necessary and

required in doing and completing the entire plumbing installation. All excess

materials, refuses etc. shall be removed from the premises by him upon

completion of his contract.

All materials, piping, fittings, valves, fixtures and appliances herein after

specified and shown on the Drawings and those which are essential and have

not been specified shall be new and of the highest grade and quality, free from

defects, such as breaks, flaws, or other imperfections and shall all be subject to

the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Only fittings classified as “heavy” by

the manufacturers shall be used.

All materials installed shall be concealed in the building walls, floors and

partitions wherever possible. The joists, beams, walls, partitions and studs or

wooden frame work through which the pipe must pass shall be drilled in such a

way that the building will not be structurally weakened.

128

The contractor shall submit shop drawings for all relevant items for the

approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

15.2 Water distribution system shall be constructed of galvanized wrought iron pipes

and screw threaded malleable galvanized fittings of accepted quality. All

distribution lines to toilets shall be minimum of 20 mm. thickness or as

specified on drawings. Only runs of pipe to single fixtures shall be constructed

of 15 mm thickness dia pipe.

All piping shall be substantially supported to overcome sagging and shall be so

arranged that it can be easily drained.

15.3 The pipe shall be the best GI pipes and shall be provided with sockets for

jointing screwed to fit the screw thread on the pipes. Fittings shall normally be

of GI manufactured to the same specifications as the pipes but where these are

not available locally manufactured, gunmetals specials shall be used.

All screwed pipes and sockets shall have pipe threads in accordance with BS

21. In order to prevent damage to the loading thread, the ends of sockets shall

be chamfered internally. Every horizontal pipe line attached to walls, floors,

roofs or ceilings shall be supported by galvanized holder bats placed securely

into the walls, floors, roofs and ceilings at intervals not exceeding 1.5 m

throughout its length and at all changes in direction to ensure a maximum

deflection of 3 mm. Vertical pipes shall be provided with heavy iron clamps, one

at every floor level.

Hangers and supports shall be secured to the structure by providing inserts in

the concrete, or by means of fish plates in cases of heavy loads. Every pipe line

laid through any walls, floors, ceiling, roofs, partitions or similar shall be

arranged to pass through sleeve pipes of ample diameter embedded therein to

enable the pipeline, to pass easily and freely. The length of every such sleeve

pipe shall be of the full width as of wall thickness and in the case of roof, ceiling

129

or floor, shall be at least 36 mm longer than the thickness thereof and shall

project to that extent above the upper surface thereof. The space between the

sleeve and the pipe passing through it will be filled with plastic air blown

bitumen or similar bituminous compound for a minimum distance of 15 cms on

either side. The bituminous material shall not melt at temperature upto 80

degree centigrade.

15.4 All screwed joints, both internal and external shall be examined before jointing

to ensure that the threads are perfect for the full depths of the joints. The

jointing work shall be so arranged in the case of every joint that the two ends of

pipes are specials jointed thereby shall be equidistant from the middle of the

socket and shall have a space of not more than about 6 mm between them in

the center of the socket.

A few very thin strands of best quality country made cotton yarn smeared over

carefully with genuine red lead shall be wound in the grooves of the threads

from end to end of the joint, if the screwed joint is a little slack, in order to

ensure tightness. For this purpose, hemp or jute or any material other than the

described above shall on no account be allowed. A paste of genuine red and

white lead mixed shall be lightly smeared over the threads to act as a lubricant

and to make up for imperfections in the threads when the pipes are screwed up.

Red and white paste is made by mixing together genuine dry red lead with

genuine moist white lead in equal ratios and then thinning out into a paste with

genuine boiled linseed oil.

The pipes shall be screwed up tightly with pipe fitter‟s tongs or pipe wrenches to

ensure that each and every joint is perfectly water tight against the test head of

water. No red and white lead paste or cotton yarn shall project outside the ends

of the joints.

Pipe fittings for galvanized steel pipes shall be malleable cast iron fittings in

accordance with BS-163 or an approved equivalent. In addition to

130

manufacturer‟s routine testing, samples of fittings shall be mechanically tested

in accordance with clause II of BS-163. The contractor shall forward to the

Engineer-in-Charge with each consignment of manufacturer‟s certificate stating

that the fittings have been tested and that the fittings are made in accordance

with BS 163 or and approved equivalent.

The threads of all pipes shall be effectively covered with a good quality grease or

other suitable compound and each tube above 50 mm nominal bore shall have

a protecting ring affixed to the unsocketed screwed end.

Expansion joints in the form of Giblet joints shall be provided in the vertical

pipes (rising main and fire stand pipe).

15.5 Testing of Water Supply Pipes : All pipes shall be tested at the manufacturer‟s

works to a hydraulic test pressure of 50 Kg/sq cm for dia < and equal to 65

mm and 65 Kg/sq cm for dia > and equal to 65 mm and shall be maintained at

the test pressure sufficiently long for proof and inspection. The results of the

factory test pressure shall be produced to the Engineer-in-Charge.

Test of the water supply pipes shall also be also made after roughing-in and

before walls, ceilings, and floors are completed. The test is made by closing all

openings and developing the desired pressure within the piping system. The

pressures maintained during the test should be 100 percent higher than the

maximum pressure to which the system will be subjected under normal

operation, and it should not be less than 100 psi of water pressure. The

increased pressure can be obtained by attaching a hand forced pump to the

plumbing system. After the required pressure has been reached and the pump

has stopped, a drop in the pressure will indicate a leak in the system. The

pressure shall be maintained for 15 minutes. The pipes are then inspected for

the leak. All pipes, specials and fittings with their joints shall remain perfectly

water tight under the full test head for a period of not less than one hour after

the whole length of the pipe line has been examined and demonstrated to be

watertight.

131

15.6. All bibs, pillar and stop cocks shall be of high quality screw down, made of

brass or chromium plated as specified and shall comply with BS 1010 or any

other requirements of the Engineer-in-Charge. Spindles, glands, crutches,

washer plates and nuts shall be of brass or manganese. Taps shall have

crutches or capstab leads as required by the Engineer-in-Charge. Stop cocks

are intended for the isolation of pipelines. All taps and stop cocks shall be eased

and greased before fixing. The washers and gland packing in taps shall be

equally suitable for hot and cold water.

15.7. Water Closet: The work shall consist of providing and fixing in position

squatting type water closet or European type water closet of an approved

manufacturer or as specified in the BOQ.

The squatting type pan shall be of white virtreous China, glazed fire clay,

stoneware, earthenware, or any other approved non absorbent material with

100 mm diameter trap of the same material and foot rest. The surface shall

have a glazed finish with minimum of fouling area and a seal depth greater than

50 mm. The outlet shall be placed well back and the pan shall be sufficiently

long to prevent urine from splashing out. The flushing water connection shall

be from the rear end.

The European type water closet shall also be of vitreous China made of an

approved manufacturer with low level flushing cistern and with double ebonite

seat cover. The W.C. shall be of syphonic type with large water area and deep

seal, the cleaning being effected by syphonic action. It shall have a low trap at

the floor line so that the closet can not be untapped by the emptying water. The

European type water closet shall be provided with a bacolite or equivalent cover

as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

The low level flushing cistern for squatting pan shall be of 13.6 litres capacity

approved material fitted with syphonic action and installed at a height not

greater than 1.5 meters. The cistern shall be provided with an overflow pipe at

132

least one size larger than the supply pipe, with a minimum internal diameter of

18 mm and it shall be fixed on mild steel or cast iron cantilever brackets or

bolted on walls.

The flush pipe shall be 38 mm diameter plastic, PVC, or enamelled mild steel

pipe. The holes for inlet, outlet and overflow in the cistern shall be made water

tight by inserting rubber washers or other mean of providing a water tight joint.

The position of water closet shall be so arranged that it shall not face Qibla.

Every water closet shall be provided with a water supply bibtap for filling the

small water cans in the sit down position. A chromium plated or equivalent

toilet paper holder close to each water closet shall also be installed as specified

on drawings.a soil pipe.

The urinals shall be set in such a manner that wastes intended for the urinal

shall drain into soil pipe and its interior surfaces shall be completely washed

with each discharge of the flushing device.

15.8. Sink laboratory type shall be of white ceramic where as kitchen or other sink

shall be of enamelled iron or stainless steel with self contained drainboards of

an approved manufacturer. The sink shall be fitted with bibcock or chromium

plated mixer where facility for hot water exists chromium plated chain, rubber

plug and washers 38 mm dia chromium plated bottle or 3 trap with waste pipe

with all necessary accessories for making the sink a complete unit. The internal

angles shall be of a design to facilitate cleaning with a fall towards outlet to

drain the contents completely.

15.9. Wash Hand Basin: Wash hand basin shall be pedestal type of 600 x 450 mm

size or as specified on drgs, made of first class vitreous China and shall be in

accordance with the requirements of BSS 1188 or an approved equivalent. The

bowl shall be oval in shape with a steep slope to the bottom and with the waste

in the center or toward the rear. Waste opening shall have as large a capacity as

the waste pipe and shall be protected by a strainer.

133

Pillar cocks, or mixer valves, waste couplings, brackets, strainer and other

accessories for making the wash basin a complete unit shall be “Heavy” type of

best quality and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

Where a number of lavatories are to be set up in battery, they shall discharge

into a common waste pipe.

15.10 Wall Mirror. Each mirror shall be silvered back plate glass mirror at least 6mm

thick Belgium make or any other approved make having 600 x 450 mm

dimensions or as shown in the drawings. If required glass/plastic shelf will be

provided under the mirror. Brass/stainless screws shall be provided for fixing

the shelf on top of each basin.

15.11 Shower. A shower head shall consist of chromium plated corrosion resisting

or fabricated sheet metal rose having perforations or as specified in the BOQ

and shall be adjustable to give varying degrees of spray. It shall be installed

over or at shoulder height.

If only cold water supply is available, each shower head shall be controlled with

a screw down stop valve and if both cold and hot water supplies are available

then the shower shall be arranged for hot and cold water supplies blended

manually by means of a mixing valve, a thermostatic mixing valve or a

thermostatic blender. Valves for the control of the water supply shall be within

the reach of the bather when under the shower.

Provide and install in position concealed two valve shower, with removable

units, integral stops, cross handles and 12 mm female union inlet 50 mm rigid

spray head with removable face and 6 mm inlet.

15.12 Traps. Traps shall be of self-cleaning design, provided with 38 mm water seal.

Traps used for underground installation shall be of CI. generally in accordance

with BS 1291 or an approved equivalent. The average thickness of wall shall be

5 mm and at no point shall thickness be less than 4 mm. All waste traps shall

134

have grating or cross bars formed integrally. The grating shall be of suitable

design so as not to unduly restrict the flow of waste water. Floor traps shall be

set in floors in cement motor 1:1 and bounded in concrete 1:2:4.

15.13 Clean Out. Clean out with brass screw cover shall be provided at such

intervals that the entire soil or waste pipes are easily accessible. All soil and

waste stacks shall be provided with clean outs at their base. All clean outs in

the sewerage system shall be closed with brass screw caps. All brass screw caps

shall be extra heavy and not less than 3 mm thick. Each screw cap shall have a

solid square or hexagonal nut not less than 25 mm high, with a min diameter of

38 mm. The body of the cleanout ferrule shall be at least equal in weight and

thickness the caulking ferrule for the same size of pipe as shown below. The

engaging parts of the screw cap shall not have less than six threads and shall

be of cast iron pipe size and tapered.

Nominal Actual

Pipe Size Pipe Size Length Weight

mm mm mm Kg

50 56 113 0.45

65 81 113 0.69

100 106 113 1.16

15.14 Gully Trap. Each gully trap shall have one CI. cover and from 300 mm x 300

mm. Gullies shall be fixed on concrete foundation 300 mm square and not less

than 150 mm thick. A brick curb in cement mortar about 65 mm high from the

ground level shall be built round top edge of gully in such a manner that

surface water shall not be allowed to enter the gully. It shall be used for

wastewater only before entering into the manhole.

15.15 Soil, Waste and Ventilating pipes: All cast iron soil, waste and ventilating

pipes and fittings shall be spun type of approved make truly cylindrical, of the

clear internal diameter as specified, of a uniform thickness smooth and with

135

strong and deep sockets, free from flaws, air bubbles, cracks, and holes and

other defects. They shall not be brittle but shall allow ready cutting, chipping or

drilling. These shall conform with BSS 416 or an approved equivalent. The soil

waste and vent pipes shall be provided with the clean outs to make them

accessible as shown in the Drawings. The thickness and weight of cast iron

pipes shall not be less than those given below: -

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Internal Diameter Thickness of Metal not less than Weight per 2m, length

including socket and beaded

spigot or flanges not less than

mm mm Kg

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

50 6.0 34

65 8.0 50

100 9.5 63

150 9.5 105

All Soil, Water and Vent stacks shall be constructed in cast iron spun extra

heavy pipe and fittings. The pipes shall be well supported to prevent deflection.

Bases of cast iron soil and waste stacks shall preferably be duck footed bends

supported on concrete blocks so as to take load of the stack at the base. Soil

and waste pipes shall be extended to the full size upto the roof and shall

terminate at least 1.0 metre above the surrounding structure so as to serve as

vent pipes.

All soil and waste pipes shall be carried vertically upward as straight as

possible. Off sets on the vent extensions shall be made at an angle of at least 45

degrees to the vertical required. Pipe extensions above the roof should be left

fully open and protected with a copper wire dome or ventilating caps.

Waste pipes shall be taken directly through an external wall of the building and

shall discharge into a trapped gully grating at least 450 mm away from the

building.

136

15.16 CI. Pipe Joints: Joints in cast iron pipes and fittings shall be caulked joints

made with a gasket of hemp and molten lead. The amount of lead in each joint

shall be not less than the following: -

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Diameter of Pipe Lead Gasket

mm (Kg) (Kg)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

50 1.16 0.06

65 1.6 0.06

100 2.05 0.08

150 2.95 0.09

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

15.17 Pipe Fixing & Supports. Supports for cast iron soil, waste and vent pipes shall

be heavy galvanized or mild steel pipe hangers fastened to the walls with

expansion bolts. A bracket made in halves, with bolts and nuts for joining the

halves and with provision for building in or screwing to the structure shall be

used for supporting the drainage pipe.

All pipes shall be so supported that they are 50 mm away from the wall to

permit of painting, inspection of joints and cleaning. Where pipes shall pass

through walls or floors, a layer of heavy hair felt, or pipe sleeves of card board,

asbestos cement or other suitable material shall be provided and shall extend

through the full thickness of the wall or floor and be secured against movement.

Sleeves shall be fixed during the construction of the building in order to avoid

unnecessary work and to ensure a sound job.

The spacing and fixings shall not exceed those shown below: -

MAXIMUM SPACING OF PIPE FIXINGS

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Material of Pipe Dia of Pipe Maximum spacing of pipe fixings

In Vertical runs | In Horizontal runs

137

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

*Cast Iron All sizes 3.0m 1.5m

*GI. 25m 3.0m 2.4m

31mm 3.0m 2.6m

36-50mm 3.6m 3.0m

62-65mm 4.5m 3.6m

100-150mm 4.5m 4.0m

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

*One fixing clamp shall be provided for each fitting.

15.18 Laying of Pipes. All pipe runs shall commence at the lower end and shall be

laid uphill. Lengths shall be laid in perfectly straight lines and each pipe shall

be properly set to its correct level on the prepared bottom of the trench and the

barrels shall be supported evenly along their full lengths.

15.19 Inspection and Testing of Soil and Waste Pipes

(a). When a length of pipe has been laid and jointed the Engineer-in-Charge

shall be informed so as to enable him to make inspection of the length,

and no such length shall be covered up until the representative of

Engineer-in-Charge or he himself has given his approval in writing.

(b) Soil and waste pipes shall be tested in the presence of the representative

of the Engineer-in-Charge after the pipes have been laid and jointed and

before any filling or concrete protection is placed. All openings shall be

plugged and water poured from venting top of pipes and leaks observed.

Pipes in tall building shall be tested in sections. Test shall begin from top

and 10.0m portions shall be tested at a time. The head for testing

purposes shall be thereby limited to 10.0m of water column. The test

pressure shall be maintained for 15 minutes and not more than 13 mm

of drop in water surface shall be allowed.

138

Any defective work revealed by the tests shall be made good to the

satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative and at the

Contractor‟s expense.

15.20 RCC Pipes and Joints. All RCC pipes shall be of first class quality truly

circular and of uniform thickness free from irregularities, honey combing and

other defects. The pipe shall be suitable for sewerage and drainage purposes.

The ends of all pipes shall be protected and contractor shall be responsible at

his own cost for replacing all materials damaged in transit or during off-loading.

Sewer pipes shall be reinforced cement concrete (RCC) Class B pipes 31.03

N/sq mm (4500 psi) with bell and spigot ends and shall comply with BS 556:

part 2:1262 or an approved equivalent or as specified on drawings.

Joints for bell & spigot sewer pipes shall be of flexible type. The ends of

reinforced concrete pipe sections shall be so formed that when the pipes are

laid they will make a continuous and uniform line of pipe. Joints shall be made

with rubber gasket of an approved manufacturer, which would permit effective

jointing to reduce leakages and infiltration to a satisfactory minimum.

15.21 Cutting & Laying of Pipes. Pipes shall be cut only where directed by the

representative of the Engineer-in-charge in order to complete a length between

manholes. All pipes shall be cut neatly and at right angles to the axis of the

pipe and the cut end of the pipe shall be smooth and truly circular.

Each length of pipe between manholes shall be in straight line and to the true

alignment, position, gradients and levels.

Sewer laying shall proceed in an uphill direction,

laying spigot end into already laid bell end.

Reverse laying shall not be allowed and any such work shall be rejected.

139

Each length of RCC pipe shall be checked for cracks and defects before placing

in the line. Each pipe shall be placed carefully to line and grade and in close

contact with adjoining pipes.

The top of the bedding material shall be shaped to fit the pipe barrel, with holes

left for the bells. When laying is not in progress, the open pipe shall be closed

with a tapered wooden plug to keep out foreign matter.

15.22 Testing of RCC Pipes. Test shall be made by isolating a section of sewers

between manholes. The isolated sewer shall be filled with water to a level 900

mm above the crown of sewer pipe at the higher end. The length of the pipe

shall be such that the water level shall not be more than 180 mm above the

crown of sewer pipe at its lower end. Exfiltration shall be computed by

measuring the loss of water from manholes. The amount of infiltration or

exfiltration over 24 hours duration shall not exceed 46 litres per millimetre of

pipe diameter per killometer length of sewer.

15.23 Gate Valves. All flanged cast iron gate valves of 50 mm and above shall comply

with BS 5163 or an approved equivalent. Each valve shall have cast or stamped

on the outside of its body the manufacturer‟s name, its size and its pressure

rating. All gate valves shall be of the non-rising spindle type.

The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer-in-Charge copy of the test

certificate stating that each valve has been subjected to and satisfactorily

withstood the „Closed End‟ test as specified in relevant BS Code.

15.24 Check Valve. All swing check valves shall comply with BS 5153 or an

approved equivalent and shall be of slow closing type. The equivalent valve

manufactured by a well known manufacturer shall be acceptable subject to

approval by the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall forward to the

Engineer-in-Charge a test certificate stating that each valve has been subjected

to hydraulic test of twice the maximum working pressure.

140

15.25 Pumps. Pumps shall correspond to the requirement of discharge, total effective

head indicated in the BOQs and shown on the Drawings. Each pump shall be

complete with couplings, bedplates, electric motor, starter etc. The pump and

electric motor shall be of KSB, Siemen‟s respectively or as approved by the

Engineer-in-Charge.

15.26 Each pump shall have isolating and non-return valves as indicated on the

Drawings. The automatic electronic control device shall be installed unless

otherwise specified on the Drawings or BOQs. Submersible pumps shall be

electrically driven, self priming automatically controlled by means of an

electronic device. The pump and motor shall form a single integral unit.

15.27 Manhole. The manhole chamber shall be built of brick work of not less than

225 mm thick in 1:4 cement sand mortar. The interior of manhole chamber if

required shall be plastered with sulphate resisting cement sand mortar in

proportions of one part of SR. cement to two parts of sand. The thickness of

cement plaster shall be 13 mm. The benching of manhole shall be formed in

plain cement concrete 1:2:4 with SR cement and shall be rendered to a

thickness of 25 mm with SR cement-sand mortar. The channels so formed shall

have the inverts semicircular in section and shall be uniformly curved and

graded so as to afford a smooth flow. All iron steps of manhole shall be of

galvanized malleable cast iron conforming to BS 1246 or approved equivalent.

The top iron step shall be 300 mm below the manhole cover and rest of steps at

225 mm intervals. The lowest step shall not be more than 300 mm above the

benching. The dimensions and depth of manhole shall be as shown on the

Drawings. Manhole cover and frame shall be made of cast iron or reinforced

type as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

141

STECTION - 0

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

1.0 GENERAL

This Particular Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Technical

Specifications, other sections and relevant drawings accompanying this

document. The Contractor shall not be absolved from his responsibility for not

carrying out the Contract works in accordance with the requirements of the

foregoing sections of this document and the detailed Specification of Work as

outlined hereunder. In cases where any discrepancies arise between the

Particular Specification and Technical Specification, the former shall prevail.

The word "Engineer" where used throughout the Specification, shall be

interpreted to mean the Project Manager, Consulting Electric Engineer or other

suitable person as authorized by the Employer.

2.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

The Contractor is deemed to be familiar with climatic conditions prevailing in

Lahore and to be aware of the high temperature (up to 45 OC).

The Contractor in submitting a tender will be assumed to warrant that all

materials and items of equipment are suitable for continued use and/or

operation in the various climatic conditions encountered.

3.0 STANDARD AND STATUTORY REGULATIONS

The works shall be carried by a Registered Electrical Contractor approved by

the Electric Inspector Office, Sind and relevant authority for each particular

classification of work. All material and workmanship shall conform to the

specifications and to the following:

Regulations

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein pertaining to this

installation, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all the

works are in strict accordance with the following statutory obligations,

regulations and specifications together with any amendments made thereto:

a. British Standards Institution or other approved international standards.

b. I.E.E. Wiring Regulation.

c. Building Control Act and Regulations

d. Building Energy Code of Pakistan

142

e. Electricity Act 1910

f. Electricity Rules 1937

g. In accordance with the requirements of the local Electric Inspector, the

LESCO, MES the PTCL and to the satisfaction of the

Employer/Consultant

h. Any other local authority having jurisdiction.

4.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The work under these specifications includes providing of materials and

equipment and performing of all the works necessary for the complete execution

of all the electrical works as shown on the electrical drawings, on the general

construction drawings and Bill of Quantities and without abrogating the more

extensive details described elsewhere in the Specifications and Drawings,

includes the following.

a) Primary underground service line as required for the project.

b) HT Switchgear, Power Transformer and HT Cabling.

c) Distribution equipment including Main LT Panel, LT Cabling and

Distribution Boards (excluding office and shop areas).

d) A system of interior lighting and power wiring including feeders, circuits,

sub-circuits and point wiring (excluding office and shop areas).

e) A system of interior and exterior Luminaries for the project (excluding

office and shop areas).

f) Telephone & PABX System (excluding office and shop areas).

g) Cable TV System.

h) Automatic Intelligent Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm System.

i) CCTV Surveillance System (excluding office and shop areas).

j) Public Address/Background Music System (excluding office and shop

areas).

k) Access Control System (excluding office and shop areas).

l) Earthing & Lightning Protection System.

m) Complete testing and commissioning of the installation.

Note: For Office/ Shops spaces, Electrical Work related to interior design works,

such as switches, socket, interior light fixtures, conditioned power supply system

143

(including MCDB, CDBs and UPS) voice/ Data communication system, wiring

hardware and raceways are not including in this contract.

Following shall also be provided by the Electrical trade:

_ Provision of electrical power supply including Motor Control Centre

(MCC) housing appropriate size breaker and starter adjacent to the

plumbing equipment.

_ Provision of general lighting and 15A general power sockets for each

pump room.

_ Provision of an earthing terminal in each pump room for supplementary/

equi potential bonding of plumbing and drainage equipment.

_ The Mechanical trade shall specify the power requirements of each item

of the proposed equipment. All motor control starters shall be supplied

and installed by the electrical trade in the electrical power panel.

_ The Mechanical trade shall coordinate with the Electrical trade regarding

equi potential bonding in each toilet. Mechanical trade shall provide 4

mm tapped holes on sanitary fitting and plumbing and drainage pipes for

equi potential bonding by the Electrical trade.

_ The gas supply system main shut off valve shall be interfaced with the

fire alarm system to shut down gas supply to all the premises under fire

alarm conditions.

All necessary interfacing works shall be provided by the Electrical Trade.

All allied and small works and materials, even if not specifically

mentioned in the specification and BOQ but required for completeness of

the job, shall be deemed to have been included in the contract/BOQ

5.0 EQUIPMENT SELECTION

All equipment supplied shall be in accordance with this Specification and the

relevant drawings and to the approval of the Engineer.

The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the Contract are

minimum capacities and the Contractor shall check them with the Engineer,

taking into account any variations which may be made to the systems during

the progress of the Contract Works.

144

The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate at site that the duties required

of the equipment are obtainable.

Physical sizes of all plant and equipment are to be suitable for the space

allocated for the accommodation of such plant and equipment, taking into

account the requirement of access for maintenance purposes.

Equipment catalogue and manufacturer's specifications must be submitted for

the endorsement of the Engineer before any equipment is to be ordered.

This shall include all information necessary for the Engineer to ascertain the

equipment comply with this Specification and drawings. Data and sales

catalogue of a general nature will not be accepted.

Before ordering equipment, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with full

details of the weights and characteristics of the equipment for purposes of

determining floor loadings, power consumption full-load running ampere, heat

dissipation and like.

6.0 ENGINEER'S ENDORSEMENT

The word "Engineer" where used throughout the Specification, shall be

interpreted to mean the Engineer, Project Manager, Consulting Engineer or

other suitable qualified person as authorized by the Employer.

No comment or failure to comment on or any other act or omission by the

Engineer relating to the Specification and nothing contained in the Specification

shall constitute an instruction or otherwise impose upon the Employer or

relieve the Contractor wholly or partially of any duty, liability or obligation

whatsoever provided that the Contractor shall comply with instructions issued

by the Engineer which relate to the production of information as applicable to

the contents thereof.

7.0 SAMPLES

The Contractor shall submit for approval one set of labeled samples as follows:-

Conduits/Pipes, fittings and supports

Wires and cables

Switches and sockets

Light fixtures

CCTV cables

MATV Cables, Splitters, Tap-off unit and Sockets

145

Fire Alarm cables.

Public Address/ BGM Speakers, volume controller and cables.

Earthing system including earth rod / earth plate, saddles & earth point

etc.

The Engineer reserved the right to require samples which show the fabrication

techniques and workmanship of component parts, and the design of accessories

and other auxiliary items, before any installation work proceeds.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for endorsement manufacturer's

specification and installation instruction for trade products.

8.0 SHOP & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval shop drawings in a

timely manner according to the construction Program. Within 14 days of being notified

of the intent to award the contract, the contractor shall submit the submission

program for approval. The submission program shall include the following details:

Proposed submission dates

Proposed approved date to meet the installation and Authorities

submissions‟ program.

The shop drawings must be of sufficient detail to satisfy the installation

requirements to the approval of the Engineer.

The shop drawings shall show all location of equipment, cable trunking/tray

routing, conduits, joints for wiring, anchors, supports, hangers, test points,

measurement instruments, and the like.

As built drawings shall be similarly submitted at Completion.

During the preparation of working drawings, the Contractor shall ensure

complete coordination of services installed by all parties. Maximum headroom

and minimum installation space shall be maintained at all points. Where

headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, the Engineer shall be notified

before proceeding with installation.

Where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall without extra charge,

make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with

work of other trades for the proper execution of work.

Approval of the Contractor's submission does not constitute a complete check

but indicate only that the design, general methods of construction and detailing

146

is satisfactory. Approval does not relieve the Contractor of his contractual

obligations and responsibilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for

discrepancies, errors or omissions, details on drawings and other

documentation supplied by him.

9.0 COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES

The Contractor shall liaise with all the tradesmen who will be carrying out other

services work on the site, prior to the commencement of actual installations, so

as to ensure that the work of all trades will be coordinated. This shall include

the coordination of access and further provisions required by all other

tradesmen.

10.0 SITE SUPERVISION

The Contractor shall engage sufficient qualified and experience site staff to

execute the Contractor works. Registered and licensed trades person shall be

employed and under the direct employment of the Contractor and they shall be

full time on site to supervise the works. When requested by the Architect,

sufficient draughtsman shall be kept on site to facilitate prompt preparation

and issuance of shop drawings.

The services of Licensed Electrical Engineer and Professional Engineers shall be

engaged to assume full responsibilities for all engineering matters including

engineering design, submission to Authorities, supervision, installation and

switching. These personnel shall be available to attend meetings, discussions,

inspections, and the like as requested by the Architect and for any activation of

electrical equipment and switchboards. Upon completion of the Contract Works,

the Licensed Electrical Engineer and Professional Engineers shall furnish

Completion and Inspection Certificates for the respective parts of the Contract

Works to the Architect, certifying that all the Contract Works are in full

compliance with the Specification and Drawings.

11.0 CUTTING FLOORS, WALLS OR CEILING

Contractor should work out in advance the position of holes, channels etc. to be

left. Where this is not reasonably possible, cutting and chipping of walls etc.

may be permitted only with the prior written permission of the Engineer. All

cutting and chipping of walls etc. for installing material concerning

electrification will be done by the electrical contractor who shall also repair any

147

damage caused and will be responsible for bringing back the general finish to

the position that it was before the cutting and chipping done by the Electrical

Contractor where applicable.

Cutting, chipping, repairing, patching of plaster and finishing of carpentry

work, metal work or concrete work, etc. which may by required for the electrical

work shall be done by craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. When cutting

is required, it shall be done in such a manner as not to weaken walls, partitions

or floors and holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without breaking

out around the holes. Where patching is necessary in finished areas of the

building, rights are reserved to determine the extent of such patching and/or

refinishing and work should be done only upon express instructions.

12.0 SLEEVES

Sleeves through floors and walls shall be black iron pipe, flush with walls,

ceilings or finished floors of a size to accommodate the raceway. Sleeves

through outside walls shall be caulked with an approved caulking material.

13.0 IDENTIFICATION OF CIRCUITS

Distribution Board shall be designated in accordance with the reference letters

or number used in the specifications and/or shown on the drawing but the

legend and description shall clearly spell out the full name of the equipment.

a) Distribution boards shall be provided with a substantial circuit sheet

fixed by screws to the inside of the front cover. The function of each

circuit shall be clearly printed on the chart under the respective circuit

number. Spare branch ways shall not be printed "Spare" but left blank.

b) On AC system the phase sequence shall be maintained through the

installation and all phase connections shall be in the order Red, Yellow,

Blue from top to bottom and/or left to right. Neutral connections shall be

below or to the right side of the phase connections, links or bus-bars.

c) The particular phase connected to a fuse bank and bus-bar shall be

clearly indicated by marking with the appropriate colour.

d) Where medium voltage exists a label shall be fixed externally to the

equipment with the words "DANGER 440 VOLTS" engraved in 25 mm.

letters.

148

14.0 EARTHING

Earthing continuity conductors of the sizes as specified in Schedule of

Quantities shall be provided and installed as specified herein and to comply

with the latest I.E.E. regulations. Earth continuity conductors shall be laid

along the length of conduit. This should preferably be installed at the time of

laying of conduit and shall be connected using earthing clamps between the

ends of conduit where conduit enters or leaves, elbows, joints outlets boxes etc;

to ensure proper bends and clamps shall be connected to earth continuity

conductor by means of thimbles or lugs duly soldered at the end of copper earth

continuity conductor. All nuts, bolts, washers, etc; shall be galvanized. The

earth pin of socket shall be connected to the earth continuity conductor. The

earth continuity conductor should form a continuous path from any point of

installation to the earthing sets.

15.0 SETTING TO WORK

As soon as practicable after the completion of any section of the installation, the

Contractor shall, when so required by the Engineer, clean out all plant spaces,

remove all rubbish (rubbish etc caused by the Contractor or his sub-

Contractors must be removed) and generally leave the particular portion of the

installation and the access ways thereto in a tidy and finished state. The

Contractor shall then set such portion of the installation to work, adjust all

regulators, controls, etc and set and adjust the system so that it complies with

the Specification requirements

16.0 TESTING

16.1 General

Upon completion of the installations the contractor shall perform field tests on

all equipment, materials and system. All tests shall be conducted in presence of

the Engineer's Representative. In general all tests made by the Contractor shall

be of the nature to assure that the entire installation is sound and that all

circuits, lighting and power and equipment etc; will function properly and as

intended.

The Contractor shall furnish and install all tools, instruments, test equipment

material etc; and furnish all personnel required for carrying out complete

testing.

149

The Contractor shall record all test results and submit the same duly initialed

by the Consultant's Representative.

16.2 Insulation Tests

The insulation resistance test shall be performed on all electrical equipment

and wiring. Using Megger tester or any self-contained instrument such as direct

indicating Ohmmeter of the generator type. Only D.C. potentials shall be used

for such testing and these shall be as follows:

Circuit under 230 Volts : 500 volts

Circuit 230 to 400 Volts : 1000 volts

The minimum acceptable insulation resistance values shall be per relevant IEC

standards.

The insulation test between each phase shall be made and also between earth

and each phase. All equipment shall be tested to earth.

If the insulation resistance of the circuit under test is found less than that

specified above, the cause of low reading shall be determined and removed. The

corrective measures shall include dry out procedure by means of heaters if

equipment is found to contain moisture but if circuit cable is found defective,

these shall be removed and replaced and test carried out again. The tests shall

be carried out at least three times and the lowest reading shall not be less than

70% of the average value.

16.3 Result of Tests

If the test results show that the plant and equipment is not functioning in a

satisfactory manner or providing the requirements of this Specification, the

Engineer shall decide whether this is due to incorrectness of faulty work by the

Contractor. If this be the case, the Contractor shall, when called upon, carry

out at his own expense such alterations, replacements and adjustments as may

be required, to the Engineer's complete satisfaction. The Engineer's decision as

to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final.

17.0 COMPLETION CERTIFICATE AND ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE

The Contractor shall submit the details of the commissioning engineers whose

qualifications need to be submitted to the Architect for approval. The Architect

reserves the right to reject any person deemed unsuitable.

The Contractor shall also refer to the relevant clauses in the Main Contract.

150

18.0 MAINTENANCE PERIOD

During the Maintenance Period, the Contractor shall provide a 24-hour 'call out'

service whereby at any time the Contractor shall despatch skilled personnel to

repair any equipment that has broken down.

Immediately answering the breakdown calls, whether true or false, the

Contractor shall attend to such calls within a maximum time limit of 6 hours

during night and 2 hours during daytime of receiving such calls.

During the Maintenance Period, the Contractor shall at his own cost remedy

and make good with all possible speed any faults or defects in the Plant or

Works, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, due to faulty materials,

workmanship or design. The Contractor shall indemnify the Client and/or the

Main Contractor against any damage or injury to the Building contents and/or

occupants arising as a result of such faults or defects.

If the Contractor fails to remedy such faults or defects within a reasonable time,

the Client may proceed to do so at the risk and expense of the Contractor and

without prejudice to such other rights as the Client may have under the

Contract. The Contractor shall also refer to the relevant clauses in the Main

Contract.

19.0 SPARES

1. When main equipment is part of Owner's supply the 12 months

maintenance spares supplied by the equipment manufacturer will be

handed over to the Contractor who will maintain its account of

consumption and will hand over the unutilized spare parts to the PE at

the end of the maintenance period. For equipment which are part of

Contractor's supply, the Contractor will maintain spares supplied by the

equipment supplier in accordance with the requirement of this contract

and hand over the unutilized spare parts to the PE at the end of the

maintenance period.

2. Any spare parts required by the Contractor for satisfactory completion of

maintenance work during the maintenance period but not supplied by

the manufacturer as normal supply with the equipment shall be

procured by the Contractor through his own resources and at his own

cost.

151

3. A list of spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer or as

specified, for the maintenance of installation for a period of two years (or

specified otherwise) after the expiry of maintenance period shall be

quoted. Individual prices shall be quoted for each recommended spare.

20.0 AS-NEW CONDITION

At the time of hand over of the Contract Works after the Maintenance Period,

the whole installation shall be in 'as-new' condition. The Contractor shall,

during the course of the Contract, protect all plant and equipment and shall

restore/repaint as necessary before completion of the Contract works.

152

153

SECTION – 1

CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM

1.0 Cable Support System

1.1 Steel Conduit

Conduits shall be of heavy gauge steel conforming to British Standard. They

shall be solid drawn or seamed by welding. Both ends of the conduit shall be

screwed.

Conduits shall show no appreciable unevenness and their interior and ends

shall be free from burrs, fins and the like which may cause damage to cables.

Removal of any rough internal edges shall be made by a reamer rather than any

tools that comes to hand.

Conduits shall be galvanized to Class 4 type of BS 4568:1970 and be of

approved reputable manufacture. Adequate protection against corrosion shall

be applied to both conduit interior and exterior.

Flexible conduits shall be of mild steel complying with BS 731:Part 1:1952.

Where the situation requires, they shall be PVC covered.

a. Fittings

Samples of conduit fittings shall be submitted for approval prior to

installation.

Fittings shall be those intended for use with screwed conduits and shall

comply with BS 4568:Part 2:1970. However, bends, elbows and tees shall

not be installed.

Boxes and cover plates that are installed outdoors shall have fixing lugs

exterior to the box so that fixing screws do not enter the box interior.

Adopters used with flexible conduits shall conform to BS 731:Part

1:1952.

b. Circular Boxes

Circular boxes shall be of malleable cast iron, galvanized and of standard

pattern with spout(s). When used for connecting lengths of conduit,

circular boxes shall be provided with cover plates of similar make that

are complete with brass fixing screws.

c. Rectangular Boxes

154

Rectangular boxes (adaptable boxes) shall be of mild steel not less than

2.4 mm gauge and galvanized. When used as junction boxes, lids of the

same gauge with brass fixing screws shall be used.

d. Boxes for Accessories

Boxes for accessories shall be suitable for surface mounting or recessed

mounting according to the requirements. Surface mounted boxes and

accessories shall be of metal clad pattern. Recessed boxes and

accessories shall be complete with insulated moulded type cover plates.

1.2 PVC Conduit

Conduits shall conform to BS 6099: Part 1 and shall be heavy gauge of wall

thickness of 1.6 mm rigid tubes which are unscrewed without coupling and

with plain ends. All conduits used shall not be less than 25 mm in diameter.

PVC conduit mounted outside building will not be accepted. PVC conduits shall

not be used where liable to mechanical damage.

a. PVC Conduit Accessories

Accessories used for conduit wiring shall be of an approved type

complying to BS 4607.

All accessories used shall be of standard white or black colour, identical

to conduit used.

Plain conduits should be joined by slip type of couplers with

manufacturer's standard sealing cement.

All conduit entries to outlet boxes, trunking and switchgear are to be

made with Adopters female thread and male bushes screwed.

PVC-switch and socket boxes with round knockouts are to be used. The

colours of these boxes and the conduits shall be the same.

Standard PVC circular junction boxes are to be used with conduits for

intersection, Tee-junction, angle-junction and terminal. For the drawing-

in of cables, standard circular through boxes shall be used.

Samples of accessories shall be submitted for approval prior to

installation.

All jointing of PVC conduits shall be by means of adhesive jointing.

Adequate expansion joints shall be allowed to take up the expansion of

PVC conduits.

155

1.3 Conduit Installation

The whole conduit system shall be installed to comply fully with IEE Wiring

Regulation.

1.4 Layout

The conduit layout and conduit routes shall be submitted for approval.

Allowance for adjustments due to site conditions shall be provided with no extra

cost.

Conduit routes shall be chosen for easy, straight runs with a minimum of

bends and crossings. Generally they shall follow the structure of buildings,

running at right angles or in parallel to floors and ceilings. Conduits shall be

kept within 300 mm of floors and ceilings when running parallel to them.

Outlet boxes for housing accessories shall be used as draw boxes. The total

number of draw boxes shall be kept to a minimum and shall be provided so

that conduit runs do not exceed 12m or have more than two right angle bends.

All conduits shall be kept clear of gas and water pipes. In particular, conduits

shall be at least 150 mm away from gas pipes. Where proximity to these pipes is

unavoidable, they shall be effectually segregated e.g. using rubber or other

insulating material to prevent appreciable voltage differences at possible points

of contact. Segregation from extra low voltage circuits and telecommunication

circuits shall also apply unless these are wired to the same voltage

requirements as lighting and power circuits.

Conduits from different distribution boards shall not be connected to the same

junction box. Each run of conduit shall be assembled complete with draw-in-

wires.

1.5 Joints and Terminations

Electrical and mechanical continuity shall be maintained throughout all

conduit joints and terminations. Conduit threads shall be thoroughly cleaned

and the conduits tightly screwed. The conduit system shall be watertight after

installation.

Conduits shall be connected using couplers or via boxes. With a coupler, the

ends of the conduit shall butted close together and the running coupler is

screwed tightly on and tightened by a locknut.

156

Conduits terminating into boxes provided with spouts shall be threaded so that

there are no exposed threads. For boxes with no spouts, the termination shall

be made using a brass bush and a coupler. The conduit is pushed through the

knockout or drilled entry and the bush is screwed tightly onto its end. The

coupler is screwed to butt firmly against the exterior wall of the box.

Where conduits are not joined or terminated in boxes, they shall be terminated

in a screwed brass bush.

In all joints and terminations, conduits threads shall not be exposed. Where

this cannot be avoided as in a running coupler, the exposed threads shall be

coated with red lead paint to seal against the ingress of water.

1.6 Bends

Conduits shall only be bent cold with an approved type of bending block or

bending machine, without altering the dimensions of their sections.

All conduit bends shall be such as to permit compliance to the requirements for

bends in cables to as stated in the IEE Regulations.

Bends shall be made with as large a radius as the position of the conduit within

the building permits. Where the bend is more than 90 degree, circular or

rectangular junction boxes are to be used for connecting conduits.

1.7 Cabling

The conduit system must be completely installed and free of obstructions and

sharp corners before any cables are drawn in. Conduits shall be thoroughly

swabbed to remove moisture and dirt immediately prior to the drawing in of

cables.

Cables shall be drawn without crossing each other and shall not be pulled

against the walls of the draw boxes. Slack cables shall left in all draw boxes.

Cables shall be continuous throughout conduit lengths and no joints are

permitted. There shall be no kink in cables, neither any cut, abrasion or chink

in the cable insulation.

157

The same conduit shall carry the lead and return conductors bunched together.

However, the same conduit shall not house cables from different distribution

boards.

Cables for power and lighting circuits and extra low voltage systems shall not

be drawn into the same conduit. Lighting and power final circuits shall be run

in separate conduits except, where an adaptable box is employed as final

distribution point, a number of final circuits may be grouped together in larger

conduits between the distribution board and the adaptable box provided that all

final circuits in one conduit are of the same phase. In the case of three phase

circuits, all three phases including neutral, if any, shall be drawn into the same

conduit.

Conduits shall not constitute the earth continuity path for the electrical circuit.

A separate circuit protective conductor shall be installed within the conduit.

The whole conduit system shall be effectively earthed.

Flexible conduits shall also have a separate earthing conductor installed within

the

tubing and connected at conduit ends and in the case of long runs, at suitable

intervals throughout the run.

1.8 Access and Drainage

The conduit system shall be re-wireable, that is, draw boxes must be accessible

for the purpose. Where boxes are concealed, their covers shall be flushed with

the finished surface.

The need for accessibility notwithstanding, the conduit system shall be

protected against the ingress of water and impurities. When installed, conduits

shall be kept dry and free of debris with approved pipe plugs or caps. Such

plugging is especially essential prior to pouring concrete for concealed

installation. As for boxes, they shall be covered by steel plates prior to

concreting.

When installed outdoors, and in situations liable to condensation of moisture,

conduits shall be arranged to be self-draining, so that water may drain to low

points which are fitted with a drain plug. Conduits laid under concrete floors

158

shall have watertight floor-traps of approved design for access to these drainage

points.

1.9 Surface Conduit Wiring

Conduits run on surfaces other than structural steel members shall be secured

using galvanized space bar saddles and brass fixing screws. Spacing of saddles

shall not exceed 1.2 meter for conduit sizes up to and including 25 mm and 1.8

m for sizes 32 mm and above.

Conduits run on structural steel shall be secured using girder clips or an

approved clamp. These conduits and those run in the vicinity of structural steel

shall be bonded to the steel work using an efficient and permanent metallic

connection. The conduits shall not in any way be under mechanical stress.

All conduit boxes except loop-in patterns shall be fixed direct to the building

structure in addition to the support provided by the conduits.

Conduits terminating into surface boxes shall be secured by a minimum of 3

saddles at not less than 32 mm, 150 mm and 300 mm respectively from the

box.

Conduits shall be painted with an approved paint to blend with visual

environment. A zinc rich undercoat shall be provided before painting the final

coat.

1.10 Cable Tray and Trunking

Metal trunking shall comply with BS 4678 and shall be manufactured in

minimum lengths of 2m from 18 SWG GI sheet. Covers are to be held in place

by screws. Trunking shall be terminated with end flanges bolted directly to

switch or distribution boards. Connecting pieces are to be used and bolted with

cadmium plated mushroom head steel screws, nuts and shake-proof washers.

Each joint is to have a copper link to ensure electrical continuity.

Conduit entries to trunking shall be made with couplings and brass male

bushes. Knockouts will not be required and trunkings may be drilled on site.

Trunkings shall not contain more cable than allowed by the space factors

described in the IEE Regulations.

159

Each joint shall have a copper bond bolted to each adjacent trunking to ensure

electrical continuity. All frayed and sharp edges shall be removed from trunking

before installation.

Conduit entry to trunking shall be by coupling and male bush. Knock-outs

shall not be provided, and trunking shall be drilled on site.

Where trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking system which will allow for

expansion and maintain earth continuity shall be used. The system used shall

be reviewed by the Engineer prior to manufacture.

Where the trunking passes through floors or fire compartments, fire resisting

barriers shall be provided.

All supports and hangers shall be of hot-dipped galvanized mild steel

construction to BS 729:1971 Part 1 with min. coating thickness of 85 and 210

for indoor and outdoor installation respectively. All bolts and nuts shall be

electroplated with zinc or cadmium to BS 3382: Parts 1 and 2 with min. plating

thickness of 25.

Cable tray shall be of perforated type and constructed of minimum 1.6 mm hot

dipped galvanized mild steel. All cable trays shall be installed in a straight run

parallel to walls where possible.

Cable trays shall be supported by electro-galvanized 'U' channel with galvanized

threaded rod for indoor suspended tray and hot-dipped galvanized for area

subject to weather.

All hangers shall be installed at 1 metre intervals and shall be primed and

painted to match with the surrounding building finish approved by the

Architect.

Cable trunking shall be manufactured from 1.6 mm minimum electro-

galvanized sheet steel to BS 1449:Part 1:1983 finished in oven-baked electro-

statically coated epoxy powder coating with colour to the Architect's choice.

Cable trunking, subject to weather, shall conform to BS 729, hot dipped

galvanized and painted. External flanges shall be provided to avoid ingress of

water. Factorymade bends, joints, elbow, riser, tee, reducer and accessories

with same material shall be provided throughout the installation for tray and

trunking.

160

Copper earth link bar shall be fixed at every joint of the cable tray and trunking

run.

1.11 Outdoor Wiring

All accessories, fittings and glands used for outdoor installation shall be

corrosion proof and weatherproof type to approval.

161

SECTION – 2

CABLE AND WIRING

2.0 Cables and Wiring

2.1 General

Install and terminate cables and wires as required. Furnish all necessary

(whether specified or not) miscellaneous items to form a complete wiring

installation in accordance with best modern practice and the Specification.

Cable sizes and circuit details are shown on the drawings.

2.2 11 KV Power Cables

Only Cu XLPE cables of a suitable rating shall be used.

All XLPE cables shall be manufactured to BS 7870-4.10:1999.

Galvanized steel armor is provided underneath an overall PVC sheath.

The XLPE cables shall be provided with extruded semi conducting

conductor screen over stranded circular conductors before XLPE

insulation is provided.

On each core of conductor another layer of extruded semi-conducting

core screen and copper tape screen are provided. The number of cores

required then shall be put together and the anti-spaces filled with non-

hydroscopic fibre filler and binding tape. The core is extruded with PVC

bedding.

Glavanized steel armour is provided underneath an overall PVC sheath.

11 kV XLPE cables shall be manufactured by M/s. Pakistan Cables

limited or Pioneer cables LTD. in order of preference as approved by the

Engineer.

2.3 600/1000-Volt PVC, XLPE/PVC, PVC/PVC, XLPE/SWA/ PVC and

PVC/SWA/PVC Cables

Cables shall utilize stranded copper conductors only. All cables shall be made

in accordance to the following standards: BS 6346:1997 BS 7870-3.1:1996 BS

6004:1995. Insulation colors and wire sizes shall be in accordance to IEE

Regulations.

Circuit and sub-main wiring shall have an adequately sized earth continuity

conductor. The maximum continuity resistance from any point of the

162

installation including the earth continuity to the earth electrode shall not

exceed one Ohm.

All wires and cables shall be arranged as per manufacturers‟ recommendations,

with bends of adequately large radius. Wiring shall be continuous between

terminations and use of connectors or joint will not be allowed (joints in point to

point cable runs are prohibited).

Cables for 3 phase 4 wire system shall be colors coded red, yellow, blue for

phases, black for neutral and green/yellow for earth.

For flexible cords the minimum size shall be 1.5 sq. mm. Flexible cords

connecting into lighting fittings shall be 3 core heat resistant Butyl' rubber

insulated.

2.4 Installation methods

PVC/PVC cables installed on cable tray/ladder shall be fixed by approved PVC

sheathed steel saddles/cable tie at intervals of not more than 600 mm. They

shall be installed to an acceptable way conforming to IEE Regulations. Proper

labeling shall be installed at both ends. Avoiding of overlapping of cable is

necessary. Cable tray/ladder shall be adequately sized to allow a minimum of

50mm spare space at each side of the installed cables.

Unless otherwise specified, all outdoor wiring shall be PVC/SWA/PVC for multi-

core cable or PVC/AWA/PVC for single core cable direct buried in the ground

and in heavy duty PVC or RCC pipes under driveway pavement, hard core area

etc.

2.5 Wiring to 5A & 15A Power Outlets

Power wiring shall be kept separate and distinct from lighting wiring. All wiring

must be done from distribution boards as shown on the drawings.

A separate earth wire will run all along the power wiring and will be properly

earthed.

2.6 Terminations and Cable Glands

All cables entry into the main or distribution switch boards shall be through

approved glands adequately sized for all cables. All accessories, fittings and

glands used for outdoor installation shall be corrosion proof and weatherproof

type to approval.

163

a) Proprietary cable glands shall be used for "making off" all metal

sheathed, armoured, and neutral screened cables.

b) Cable bends shall be followed by a minimum of 50mm of straight cable

before the cable enters a gland where practical. Terminate conductors

with cable lugs for direct bolting to equipment terminals, except where

equipment terminals are designed to accept cable ends directly under

clamp fittings. Compression joints shall comply with BS 4579 or an

approved equivalent standard and be made with correct sized die.

c) Fit neoprene or PVC insulating sleeves over all exposed cable tails within

switchboard enclosures. Cut back PVC serving on cables the minimum

necessary. Terminate serving with PVC tape wrapping close to the cable

gland. Fully shroud connections and terminals of switchgear.

d) Provide phase identification on all cable cores with a coloured PVC sleeve

firmly attached to the core.

2.7 Underground Cables

Provide the minimum cover specified below:

Location and Depth of Cover

Cable Open Areas Under

Type or under roadways

footpaths

LV 600mm 750mm

HV 750mm 1000mm

a) Excavations shall be open for the minimum possible time and shall be

kept free of water and shored up as necessary. Report immediately any

services exposed or damaged during trenching.

b) Protection in the form of day and night marking, barricades or covers

shall be provided.

c) Grade trench floors evenly and remove all stones. Where cables are

buried directly into the ground, the cables shall be enclosed by a

164

minimum 50 mm of sand on all sides of the cables alternatively, by soil

which has passed through a sieve with a mesh no greater than 10mm

d) Where cables are buried encased in duct, the duct may be enclosed in

the material previously excavated. Cable ducts shall be checked to

ensure they are clear of obstructions, have draw wires fitted and are

installed to allow easy drawing in of cable.

e) Pull in cable over rollers spaced to avoid the cable rubbing on other

cables or suffering mechanical damage.

f) Backfilling shall not be carried out until the cable installation has been

inspected. Reinstate by back filling in 100mm layers, hand ramming the

first two layers, followed by power consolidation. Polythene signal strip

100mm wide and coloured orange with a printed warning shall be laid at

a depth of 150mm. Complete backfilling and consolidation to finish not

more than 25 mm above normal ground level. Finish to match original

surface

g) Cable end markers shall be fitted over the ends of all runs giving voltages

and depth of cables. Markers shall be permanent material with red words

'LIVE CABLES UNDERGROUND' and a vertical arrow on a white

background nominal size 75mm wide by 100mm high. Cable end

markers shall be fitted at all entries and exits of cables at buildings.

165

SECTION – 3

ACCESSORIES

3.0 Accessories

3.1 Switch and Socket Outlet Boxes

Gang outlet boxes shall be used where two or more devices are grouped in one

location. These outlet boxes shall be made of 1.63-mm. sheet steel with

protective black enamel paint coating inside and outside the box.

Before applying black enamel the cleaned surface of sheet steel box shall be

given lead oxide antirust coating inside and outside the box. The cover of such

outlet box shall be approved masonite, Teflon, Bakelite or plastic as specified in

the Bill of Quantities, for mounting the switches or switch socket units. Where

switch and socket outlet boxes are to be installed on surface in an exposed

conduit wiring system, these shall have, in addition to the protective coating,

color paint coating to match the color of the walls etc.

Weatherproof enclosure shall be of the high impact water resistant to IP 56. The

isolator provided shall be complete with a lockable device.

3.2 Switches

Switches controlling light and fan points shall be single pole. These shall be

made of Bakelite or plastic and suitable for flush mounting in an outlet box.

Where more than one switch is to be installed at one location, the switches are

formed in gangs.

Switches shall be rated at 5/20 ampere (Logic Grids), 250 Volt. Samples shall

be submitted for approval prior to the purchase of wall switches and

faceplates.

Switches for external use shall be of weatherproof construction with IP 65

rating.

3.3 Switched Socket Outlets

Only switched socket outlets shall be used. Socket and plug unit shall be 3-pin,

rated for 15/20 Amps at 250 Volts. These shall be made of Bakelite and

suitable for mounting flush with wall or column or for surface mounting as

required.

166

Where socket and switch units are installed outdoor, or in a damp or wet area,

they shall be IP65 rated. The samples of outlets and plates shall be submitted

prior to purchase. Heavy-duty receptacle outlets shall be as indicated on the

drawings.

3.4 Installation of Switches and Socket Outlets

Switches and socket and plug units shall be installed flush in the wall at

locations indicated on drawings.

All switches shall be installed at a height of 1.2m from finished floor level.

Socket plug and switch units shall have its centerline at 300mm above finished

floor level unless specified otherwise on drawings.

167

SECTION 4

LIGHT FITTINGS AND FIXTURES

4.0 Light Fittings and Fixtures

4.1 Standard Products

The schedule of the light fittings is mentioned in the legend accompanying the

drawings and each type of light fitting is specified in detail in the items of the

Bill of Quantities. The manufacturer's type specified shall be strictly adhered to.

The Contractor shall submit a sample of each and every light fitting specified

and obtain Engineer/Architect‟s approval before commencing with the

installation.

4.2 LED/SMD

SMD LEDs 5050 are the first that combines a good luminous flux with small

dimensions. Such excellent performance immediately found application in the

first LED strip and avtolampy.

They became the progenitor of SMD 5630 and 5730, their performance was

already decent 80 lumens per watt. Before their appearance was the leader of

use SMD 3528. Pets lamp SMD 5050 began to give a good light output, the best

way to use steel corn bulbs, which are easily placed on itself from 30 to 100

members. The largest corn could already shining like a lamp incandescent

100W

4.3 Dimmer Control Unit

The Dimmer Control Unit shall be a lighting controller for providing a simple

and convenient method to preset and recall various lighting scenarios to suit

different activities. Time interval taken for light to come and go shall be

adjustable to the user‟s preference. Dimming shall also be controlled remotely

for fine adjustment instantly. It shall have input voltage of 220 V AC, 50 Hz.

with an operating temperature of 40 degree centigrade and an internal overload

temperature of 75 +/- 3 degree centigrade. The Dimmer Control Unit shall have

a thermal protection in case overheating occurs, in which case, the light

intensity of each zone shall automatically reduce to 50% of full brightness, with

the temperature returning to 65 +/- 3 degree centigrade or lower to resume

normal power operation. It shall have a minimum of 3 and a maximum of 18

zones. For changing the light intensities Ramp UP/DOWN buttons shall be

168

provided for each zone. Output rating shall be of 400 watts per zone. The load

type shall be incandescent, halogen, fluorescent lamps. The Dimmer Control

Unit shall have the fade rate options for 1 sec, 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec or 10 min.

set by a fade button. It shall also be controlled by Infrared Remote Control

having a range of 15 meters at normal and 6 m +/- 45 degree. It shall have LED

indicators for scene selection, light intensity adjustment of each zone and fade

rate setting. A two-way switch shall be provided for recalling scene 1 when

toggled ON and switching off all lights when toggled OFF. The Power Booster

shall be compatible with Infrared Remote Control, 2 way Entrance switch.

Dimmer Control Unit shall comply with BS 5518.

4.4 Infrared Remote Control

The Infrared Remote Control shall be an accessory unit of Dimmer Control Unit.

It shall be hand-held remote control to allow scene selection, masterly switching

off and temporarily changing of light intensities. It shall be powered by Lithium

battery. It shall have 5 selectable scenes, an ALL OFF switch for the purpose of

switching OFF and RAMP UP / DOWN buttons for changing the light

intensities.

4.5 Exit Lights

Emergency Exit light fixture shall have a powder coating rigid steel box having

Fluorescent tubes. The exit light shall be maintained with additional mains

fluorescent tube. In the event of power failure emergency lighting application

shall be triggered automatically.

4.6 Samples

The Contractor shall provide sample of each lighting fixture for approval.

4.7 Installation

The light fixture shall be installed pendent, on surface of wall/ceiling or

recessed in false ceiling. All surface mounted fixtures shall be installed by

means of galvanized screws or bolts as required. Light fixtures installed in the

false ceiling shall be supported to the roof.

Pendent light fixtures shall be supported to the ceiling with double sheet/MS

pipes for Fluorescent light fixtures. All pipe supports shall be 25 mm dia

minimum and provided with suitable fixing arrangement., nuts, washers and

169

any other hardware required for proper installation. All materials shall be

anticorrosive painted and finished in colour as advised by engineer Incharge.

170

171

SECTION – 5

LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

5.0 Low Voltage Switchgear

5.1 Scope of Work

The work under this section consists of manufacturing, fabricating, supplying,

installing, testing, and commissioning of all material and services of the complete Low

Tension (LT) Distribution Boards as specified herein, shown on the Tender Drawings

and stated in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout with the Engineer and co-ordinate at

site with other services for exact location and position of the electrical lines and

equipment.

5.2 General

The Low Tension Distribution Board shall be sheet steel fabricated suitable for

recessed mounting, totally enclosed, dust and damp proof. It shall be complete in all

respect with material and accessories; factory assembled, tested and finished

according to the Specifications and to the normal requirements.

The Low Tension Distribution Board shall be dead front and front operation type and

shall:

have a rated service short circuit breaking capacity, Ics, of 10 kA at 400

V AC

be suitable for 415/230 Volts, 3 phase 4 wire, 50 Hz system.

be designed for flush mounting of all instruments on the front side.

have incoming and outgoing cable termination arrangement, terminal

block/lineup terminals.

be provided with stainless steel nameplate on the front side of door and

wiring diagram on inside of door.

have all incoming and outgoing connections from top or bottom

according to site requirements.

have door grounded by flexible copper strip/cable.

Comply with requirements of IP44 for indoor and IP55 for outdoor units.

5.3 Applicable Standards/Codes

The latest editions of the following standards and codes shall be applicable for

the materials specified within the scope of this section:

172

IEC 51 - Direct setting electrical measuring instruments.

IEC 73 - Colours for indicator lights and push buttons.

IEC 947-2 - Low voltage

IEC 157/158 - Low voltage switchgear and control gear.

IEC 439 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies.

BS 4752 - Circuit Breaker.

BS 88 - HRC fuses.

BS 89/90 - Ammeters and Voltmeters.

BS 3938 - Low voltage current transformers.

BS 3245 - Bus Bars.

5.4 Material

5.4.1 Sheet Metal Work

The Low Tension Distribution Board shall be fabricated from electro

galvanized/zinc

coated sheet steel. All the components shall be installed on a common

component mounting plate inside the enclosure and protected from the front

with screwed sheet steel dead front cover plate. The door and dead front cover

shall be made of 14 SWG sheet steel. The door shall be fully gasketed with

hinges on the left-hand side and locking handle on the right hand side for

fastening the door. The locking handle should be detectable. The dead front

assembly shall be fastened to enclosure by means of self- locating fasteners for

quick and easy fixing.

The distribution board shall be supplied complete with all installation materials

as recommended by the manufacturer. The incoming and outgoing cable

connections shall be according to the wiring requirements. If required, an

adapter box for accommodating the cables and conduits may be provided. The

box shall be of the same material and finish as the DB.

The cabling inside the DB shall be suitably harnessed by means of straps or

cords. An earth bar or terminal strips shall be provided for connection of

incoming and outgoing earth conductors. The earth bar or terminals shall be

permanently connected to the body of DB at two points. Flexible copper strip

shall be provided for earthing of the door of DB.

173

Neutral bus assembly shall consist of outgoing screw terminals with one

terminal for each MCB.

All holes, cutouts, etc., shall be tool or jib manufactured and free from burrs

and rough edges.

Removable glad plates shall be provided at both the top and bottom.

All metal work of the DB shall be cleaned down to bare shining metal

phosphate and the surfaces chemically prepared for powder coating. Then these

shall be coated with powder of colour RAL 7032 and then baked in oven. The

thickness of powder coating shall not be less than 120 microns.

Each breaker shall have a circuit identification label fitted below the breaker

perture of the protective cover.

A clean plastic pocket shall be provided at the back of the front access for

placing wiring diagram.

Labels described shall have block letters (7 mm high) on a white background, to

be made from trifoliate and be fixed with screws.

5.4.2 Components

The Low Tension Distribution Boards shall be provided with components as

specified, as shown on the Tender Drawings and required for the satisfactory

operation of the distribution board and of the electrical system.

Typical component specifications are given below: -

5.4.2.1 Bus Bars

The Bus bars shall be made of 99.9% pure high conductivity annealed

electrolytic copper and shall be completely isolated and mechanically braced for

the specified fault level. The phase identification of bus bars shall be by colours

applied on bus bars and these shall be red, yellow and blue for phases and

white for neutral. The earth bus bar shall be green.

The bus bars shall be for three phase neutral and earth and shall be of

appropriate size to meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

system. The temperature rise shall not exceed 45oC at rated current.

5.4.2.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

The MCCBs shall be moulded case triple pole 440 volts or single pole 250 volts

of current ratings as shown on the drawings. These shall have fixed magnetic

short circuit and adjustable/fixed thermal overload protection.

174

The MCCBs shall be installed such that their switching levers are accessible

through the front plate for operation. Circuit numbers /designation on all

circuits shall be conspicuously marked to facilitate connection and

maintenance.

The single and triple pole MCCBs shall have short circuit rupturing capacity

suitable for the distribution system as approved by the Engineer or as shown

on the drawings. The MCCBs shall be suitable for working on lighting and

power circuits.

The breaker shall have quick make, quick break toggle mechanism with positive

`ON', `OFF' and `Tripped' positions.

Trip mechanism shall be trip free on over load or short circuit, ensuring that

the breaker will not remain close even when the operating handle is manually

held closed or with circuit breaker handle locked in the `ON' position during

short circuit or continuous over load. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by a

handle position between the manual `ON' and `OFF' positions.

5.4.2.3 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)

MCBs (rated 1 to 100A) shall comply with BS EN 60-898 or IEC 947-2, and be

suitable for DIN-rail mounting, and shall be maintenance-free and fully

tropicalized (T2). It shall be designed for horizontal or vertical mounting, or

reverse feeding, without any adverse effect on electrical performance.

The operating mechanism shall be quick-make, quick-break type, trip-free, with

all poles opening or closing simultaneously (except for the neutral pole, if

required, which shall be of the advance-closing, late-opening type). The

operating toggle shall clearly indicate the ON and OFF/TRIP positions.

The individual operating mechanism of each pole of a multi pole MCB shall be

directly linked within the MCB casing and not by the operating handles. Each

pole shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload protection

and magnetic element for short-circuit protection.

The tripping characteristics shall be:

Type 2/BS EN60-898, or Curve B/IEC 947-2 for 10A & 15A MCBs

Curve MA/IEC 947-2 for motor starter back-up protection

5.4.2.4 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs)

175

Earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCB), or residual current devices (RCDs), to BS

4293, shall be protected against nuisance tripping due to transients and shall

be sensitive to pulsating DC fault currents. All ELCBs shall be provided with

backup protection adequate for the fault level at the point of installation. Single

pole MCB‟s of appropriate kA/Amp rating may be used for providing backup

protection to 2- pole/4-pole ELCB‟s.

The ELCBs shall have an electrical life of at least 4000 operations, and a

mechanical life of at least 20,000 operations, and shall be equipped with a

positive contact position indicator and a "test" button.

5.4.2.5 Load-Break Switches

Load-break switch, to IEC 947-3, shall be of AC22 switching duty on general

lighting and power panels. Motor feeders and panels shall be equipped with

AC23 duty switches.

5.4.2.6 Contactors

Magnetic contactors, to IEC 947-4-1, shall be of utilisation category AC-1, AC-

2, AC-3, etc., as required for lighting control, motor control etc., and shall be of

mechanically latched type.

5.4.2.7 Ammeters and Voltmeters

All meters shall be flush mounting, moving iron, spring controlled. The front

dimensions shall be 96 x 96 mm.

The meters shall be of accuracy class 1.5 according to BS-89 and 90. The

ammeter shall be suitable for connection to 5 Amps secondary of current

transformers or directly through shunt as shown on drawings. The ammeters

and voltmeters shall have measuring range as indicated on the drawings. A red

mark shall be provided at the working voltage on the scale of all voltmeters.

5.4.2.8 Current Transformers

Air-cooled, ring type current transformers shall be provided having

transformation ratio as indicated on the drawings. The current transformers

shall be of suitable burden having accuracy class 1.0 according to BS 3938.

The current transformers shall have 5 amps secondary.

176

5.4.2.9 Selector Switches

Ammeter and voltmeter selector switches shall be complete with front plate and

grip handle. R-Y-B and OFF position for ammeters and RY-YB-BR-RN and OFF

position for voltmeters shall be marked on the respective selector switches. The

selector switches for controls shall be rotary cam types, having required

number of positions. It shall be provided complete with knob and front plate

showing all positions as required.

5.4.2.10 Air Break Contactors

The contactor shall be air break, triple pole, 400 volts. Each contactor shall be

provided with a 230 volt operating coil, one 6 watt, 230 volt red coloured

signaling lamp, control fuse and two normally open and two normally closed

type auxiliary contacts wired upto terminals for electrical interlocking.

5.4.2.11 Push Buttons

Push Button shall be momentary contact type and suitable for flush mounting

on the door of panel and on remote area. The push button for ON and OFF

switching shall be spring-loaded.

5.4.2.12 Indicating Lamps

Indicating lamps shall be suitable for flush mounting, complete with base and 230

volts incandescent lamp. It shall have rosettes of suitable colours as approved by the

Engineer.

5.5 Motor Control Centers

5.5.1 Starters

Contactors used in starters shall be of Class A3 type provided with silver alloy

contacts. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided to facilitate the connection of

interlocks, status indication and auxiliary controls. Unless explicitly described,

a minimum of one normally open and one normally closed contact shall be

provided.

Each starter shall be completed with protection incorporating the following

features:

Overload protection in each supply phase adjustable from 80 to l20% of full

rated load

Manual reset

Phase failure protection

177

Ambient temperature compensation

An auxiliary contact to signal an overload condition.

Contactors or complete starters not mounted in switchboards shall be

contained in metal or approved metallic enclosures with conduit entries,

shrouded "stop" and "start" push buttons and a manual "reset" button, which

may be combined with the "stop" button.

Generally, reduced voltage starters of the following type shall be selected:-

Motors from 5.5kW to 29kW Star delta

Motors in excess of 29kW Soft Starter

Each starter of the open transition "Star-Delta" (OT.SD) type shall include the

following:

One (1) main-line contactor suitably rated for the motor.

Star and Delta configuration contactors suitably rated for the motor,

mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent simultaneous operation.

One (1) triple pole overload relay meeting the requirements as specified

previously in this clause under 'Generally'.

One (1) approved time delay relay, with at least 0-30 second adjustable time

delay period, to control the star to delta switching contactors.

Closed transition reduced voltage starters shall be approved type and

manufacture and shall be capable of starting the motor from stopped to full

load speed without interruption and in such a manner that the torque

developed by the motor increases as uniformly as practicable during the

whole starting sequence.

Closed Transition "Star-Delta" Starters (CT.SD)Each starter of this type shall

include the following equipment:

The equipment as specified in Clause "Open Transition Star-Delta Starters

(OT.SD)".

A suitably rated transition resistance bank such as to allow approximately

full load supply current when in circuit prior to opening of the star point.

The short time rating of the resistors shall also be considered in relation to

the length of their "in circuit" requirements.

A transition contactor suitably rated to facilitate connection of the resistance

bank during the transition period.

178

Any additional auxiliary contacts, timers, etc required for the transition

sequencing operation.

Auto-Transformer Starters

Auto-transformer starters shall be of the type having standard tappings and

connections, and shall include the following equipment:

One (1) contactor operated auto-transformer type starter tapped 50 per cent,

65 per cent and 80 per cent and comprising main-line contactor, run

contactor and auto-transformer star point contactor, all complete with the

necessary auxiliary relays suitably rated for the motor.

One (1) triple pole overload relay meeting the requirements specified

previously in this clause under "Generally".

One (1) set of thermostats for auto-transformer protection with relay and

reset push button. Alternatively, thermostats embedded in the transformer

windings and a thermistor relay may be provided.

One (1) approved time delay relay, with at least 0 to 30 second adjustable

time delay period, to control the start and run contactors.

Electronic Control Soft starter

The Electronic Control Soft starter shall consists of the following major

components:

thyristor stack

line contactor

fuse for thyristor protection

electronic control PCB

Voltage : 380/415/440 Volts

Frequency : 50 Hz

Voltage Regulation : 10%

Frequency Regulation : 5%

Harmonic: Less 1% on motor full speed condition

The Electronic Control Soft starter shall be of constant current start mode.

This constant current start mode shall be incorporated with DIP-switch which will be

able for adjustment of between one (1) to three (3) OR three (3) to five (5) times of the

179

motor full load current. The increase or decrease of adjustment is in steps of 0.5

times.

The starting time shall be 5 to 60 sec user adjustable. In additional, the facility for

incorporation of operation instant mode shall be available.

The required optional modes are:

(a) Timed Current Ramp Mode

This module shall be able to modify the current limit characteristics of the

constant current mode where the load can vary from stop to start.

(b) Constant Acceleration

This module shall be designed to monitor the acceleration of the motor. It shall

be connected to the output of a tacho-generator attached to the motor and

compare the voltage generated by the tacho-generator with a reference ramp

voltage.

(c) Time Voltage Ramp

This module shall be able to provide an extended soft stop for the motor and

load.

For all 100 kW and above, constant current Softstarters must have time current

ramp mode option and a correctly rated by-pass contactor.

For all motors of 50 kW below, constant current Softstarters must have time

voltage ramp mode option.

For all motors between 50 kW to 100 kW, constant current Softstarters must

have time current ramp mode option but less the by-pass contactor. All

Softstarters offered shall be AuCom Aucostart closed loop series or equivalent.

The following protection shall be provided:

Phase Loss Protection

Over current

Excess Start Trade

Over temperature

The following shall also be provided:

Interface Module

(a) Off Loader Module

This module shall provide isolated contacts for A.C. control up to 500 volt.

180

It shall be designed to indicate when the Electronic Control Softstarter is in

start mode and this may be used to inhibit load application to the motor until

full speed and voltage has been reached.

(b) AC and DC Alarm Module

This module shall be designed to allow Electronic Control Softstarter shall be

less than 20 watts.

The total power consumption required by this Electric Control Softstarter shall

be less than 20 watts.

The isolation between power circuit, control circuit and ground shall be not less

than 2 KV A.C.

The Electronic Control Softstarter shall be housed in free standing cabinet

constructed from extruded aluminum of minimum 1 mm thickness.

The cabinet shall be accessible from the front for servicing, maintenance and

inspection with lockable door.

The enclosure shall be finished with enamel gross paint.

Where IP55 environment applies, the vendor shall ensure the enclosure to be

meeting the same if not better standards.

Sufficient ventilation shall be provided to ensure that all components are

operated within their environmental ratings. Built-in air blower shall be used

and air inlet and exhaust shall be suitably placed.

5.6 Tests and Inspection

The following tests and inspections shall be performed in accordance with

relevant engineering standards:

(a) Visual inspection of appearance, construction, dimensioned

workmanship.

(b) Mechanical operating test

5.7 Installation

Location of distribution boards are shown diagrammatically on the drawings.

Actual location shall be determined at site, keeping in view the site conditions

and other equipment, as approved by the Engineer.

Low-Tension distribution board for recessed mounting in wall shall be installed

such that the door shall finish flush with the surface of wall. The recess

181

mounted distribution board shall be installed before the plastering of walls. The

DB shall be protected to avoid any damage due to the civil work.

All loose parts dispatched separately with the DB shall be installed as per

manufacturer instructions and all adjustments or setting shall be made as

required. All screws nuts and bolts used for fixing the distribution board shall

be galvanized.

Location of distribution boards are shown diagrammatically on the drawings.

The actual location shall be determined at site, keeping in view the site

conditions and in coordination with other equipment.

The distribution boards installation shall include connecting all incoming and

outgoing cables. The cable entry in the boards shall be provided from top or

bottom as required.

The distribution boards shall be tested as per instructions contained in article

"Testing" of General Specifications for Electrical Works, Section-8001 of these

Specifications.

5.8 Provision of Electrical Services and Equipment to meet Local Authorities'

Requirement

All other requirements by the local Authority that are imposed in the course of

execution of the work, particularly those listed below shall be provided.

a) Danger signs

b) Rubber floor mat of 6m-thickness and 1 meter width provided for the full

length of the switchboard

c) A dry chemical type fire extinguisher of 9 kg capacity with approved label

d) Framed single line diagram with minimum A1 size

e) 'First-Aid' Demonstration sign

182

183

SECTION – 6

FANS AND HAND DRYERS

6.0 Fans and Hand Dryers

6.1 Fans

Fans, to BS 5060, shall be of the capacitor type, with ball bearings, complete

with appropriate sized down rods, canopies, mounting brackets, 5 speed regulators or

solid state fan speed regulator (with radio interference suppression to BS800), self-

closing louvres, etc. Mounting of all fixtures and fittings shall be mechanically and

electrically sound.

6.2 Hand Dryers

The warm-air hand dryer shall be of the surface mounting heavy-duty, vandal-

resistant type, of impact-resistant plastic or die-cast aluminium. The sound

level shall not exceed 70dBA at 1 metre.

The fan motor shall be protected by an internal circuit breaker or fuse, and

shall be maintenance free suppressed to BS 800. The heater shall be rated

2000W, and shall be protected with a safety temperature limiter.

Operation of the unit shall be controlled automatically ("no touch") by an

infrared admitting/receiving electronic (proximity switch), control device,

positioned to turn the dryer ON when the person enters the drying zone. The

dryer shall continue to operate until the person leaves the drying zone, but for

no more than 50 seconds of continued use.

The rating of the dryer shall be 230V, 50Hz, and it shall be warranted for 2

years after commissioning.

Hand dryers shall be installed 1230mm above finished floor level, at least

300mm from washbasin. Multiple dryers shall be fixed with at least 600mm

between adjacent units.

184

185

SECTION – 7

DATA/VOICE NETWORKING SYSTEM

7.0 Data/Voice Networking System

7.1 General

The work under this section consists of supplying, installing, testing and

commissioning of all material and services for data/voice networking system.

The contractor is required to provide and install switcher hubs, patch panels,

cabinets, Main Distribution Frames, data/voice conducting, schneider CAT 6, 4

Pairs cable /CAT6 Giga speed UTP wiring, outlet boxes with RJ-45 sockets and

face plates.

All works shall be performed in accordance with Rules and Regulations of the

Local Authorities. Guideline for the provision of Telecommunication Facilities

and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

7.2 Switching Hubs

Switching Hubs shall be of multi-speed (10/100 Mbps) ports, rack sized, having

versatile network devices, both standard and “Cisco SG300- 52-Port Gigabit

Managed Switch & SG 100 - 24 Port Unmanaged Cisco” ports. Each Power

switch ports shall create a separate network segment and provide dedicated

bandwidth to the attached device. All ports shall support Half or Full-Duplex

operation. It shall have UTP crossover up link connector. Front Panel LEDs to

be provided to clearly display real time network status. It shall comply with

IEEE 802.3u 100 BASE-TX standard.

7.3 Patch Panel

Patch Panel shall be high density Insulation Displacement Contact, having 24,

32, 48 channel versions, features channel identification labeling and an optical

Rear Cable Management Tray, maintaining the industry standards approved

bend radius required for Category 6E cable plant. It shall ensure that the signal

path length is kept within the patch panel to a minimum, consistent and

balanced data transmission is assured. KATT IDC contacts shall be provided at

the back of the panel for effective cable termination. Screw packs comprising

cage nuts, bolts and nylon washers shall be provided with the panels for ease in

installation. It shall meet the highest performance standards of AS/NZS 3080,

ISO IEC 11801, TIA 568A and UL.

186

7.4 Conduit & Conduit Accessories

The specifications for conduit and conduit accessories shall be the same as

described in the previous section. Outlet boxes shall be of appropriate

dimensions made of 16 SWG sheet steel and provided with earth terminals.

7.5 RJ-45 Socket outlets

RJ-45 sockets shall be of premium performance, industrial standard and

having superior transmission characteristics. It shall be tested and stable to

350 MHz. This shall support high speed advanced LAN protocols such as 1.2

Gbps ATM and Gigabit Ethernet which use Parallel Transmission Schemes,

transmitting simultaneously over multiple pairs. This shall be designed to

eliminate short link resonance effect.

Suitable for mounting flush with wall or column or for surface mounting as

required.

Gang outlet boxes shall be used where two or more devices are grouped in one

location. These outlet boxes shall be made of 1.63-mm. sheet steel with

protective black enamel paint coating inside and outside the box.

Before applying black enamel the cleaned surface of sheet steel box shall be

given lead oxide antirust coating inside and outside the box. The cover of such

outlet box shall be approved masonite, Teflon, Bakelite or plastic as specified in

the Bill of Quantities, for mounting the socket units. Where RJ-45 socket outlet

boxes are to be installed on surface in an exposed conduit wiring system, these

shall have, in addition to the protective coating, color paint coating to match the

color of the walls etc.

Weatherproof enclosure shall be of the high impact water resistant to IP 56.

7.6 4 Pair Schneider CAT 6, 4 Pairs Cable /CAT6 UTP Cable

UTP cable shall be Data Grade/ Data service, superior channel performance

exhibiting extensive ACR headroom, ability to support network protocols that

use Parallel Transmission Schemes, such as 1.2 Gbps and Giga bit Ethernet.

UTP Cable shall be of stable impedance, characterized to 350 MHz. It shall be

band stripped colour coded. It shall have an overall outside jacket. Conductors

shall be of 24 AWG solid copper and paired with varying twist rates for each

pair. Cable must be UL or ETL listed, and verified.

187

7.7 Back Bone Cable

Optic Fiber or CAT6 Giga speed cable to be used between Patch panels to server

as per manufacturer/supplier of equipment recommendation.

7.8 Main Distribution Frame

Main Distribution Frame shall be 300 Pair version, compact, wall mounted and

fabricated from steel. It shall have pre-drilled holes for fixing all Distribution

System Equipment including KATT 100 pair bases, horizontal and vertical cable

management panels, drip trays, screws to fix these items for ease in

installation. The frame shall accommodate 4 pair KATT IDC connectors,

catering for all cable termination requirements for voice cabling.

188

189

SECTION – 8

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

8.0 Fire Alarm System

8.1 General

Fire alarm and detection equipment shall comply with BS 5445, BS 5839, BS

3116,

NFPA 72 and other relevant local codes.

The system shall be closed circuit, class A wired, supervised intelligent

analogue addressable fire alarm system consisting of analogue addressable

manual call point, (break glass type), optical (photoelectric) smoke and heat

detector combined unit, ionisation smoke and heat detector combined unit,

ionisation smoke detector, heat detector, loop powered analogue addressable

sounders, loop isolators, input/output modules, etc.:

The system shall be analogue in operation, with each sensor device providing

signal levels relative to the current operating environment. These analogue

samples will be transmitted to the control panel in a digital format to reduce

possible corruption.

To maintain system performance & compatibility, all equipment‟s to be provided

by one manufacturer.

All field devices to be connected to the control panel are to be wired directly via

2 wire loop circuits which return back to control panel in separate

raceway/route. Both initiation and annunciation devices to be connected on the

loop in the same manner. The system will be capable of providing full fire fault

warning and supervisory monitoring facilities, short or open circuit wiring fault

isolation will be provided. Ionization smoke sensor, heat sensor, combined

(optical) smoke sensor, manual call point, electronic sounder, repeat and mimic

panel shall all be connected to the main fire alarm control panel. The complete

system shall be intelligent and analogue in operation.

On activation of any sensor or manual call point, the panel shall

alphanumerically pin point the area of fire. The panel shall give indication of

manual call point (MCP) in case the alarm is activated by breaking the glass.

The alarm shall sound only in the areas which are programmed for that

190

particular sensor or manual call point. It shall be possible to send a timed

general evacuation.

The mains power supply to the system shall be 230V, single phase, 50hz.The

panel shall be provided with a 24 volt maintenance free rechargeable battery,

with automatic charger, and sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire

system upon normal power failure for a period of 24 hours followed by 5

minutes of operation of all bells. The incoming power failure shall be audibly

and visually indicated at the control panel.

8.2 System Description/Equipment

The fire detection and alarm system consisting of fire smoke detectors, alarm

bells, manual call point (break glass unit) and in association with sprinkler

water flow switches shall be provided.

The fire alarm system shall be of the continuously monitored design.

All fire signals of each floor, such as from smoke detectors, break glass units,

and sprinkler flows switches shall be grouped in several zones and wired to the

Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) which is located at the Security Room

Ground Floor.

Whenever a fire alarm signal is detected at any zone, the sequential

function/commands shall be carried out:

Transmit the fire alarm signal to FACP in loop basis.

Raise a general alarm on the entire building with all alarm bells sounding.

When false ceiling is present, decorative mounting plates shall be provided for

flush mounting of the detector onto the false ceiling.

8.3 Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel (AAFACP)

The fire alarm control panel shall comply with BSEN 54 PART 2 & 4 ,be LPCB

or FM approved, multi-tasking, microprocessor controlled.

True Class „A‟ wiring shall be done by using separate routes from panel to

detectors and then from sensors to panel. There will be a spacing of at least six

inches from other system wiring. Wiring shall be carried out with 2 core1.5

mmsq shielded twisted pair cable for each loop, in concealed PVC conduit or

surface 16SWG enameled steel conduit.

All internal cards shall be fully monitored for fault condition.

191

It shall be possible to connect a number of devices on a loop. Electronic

sounders shall also be connected on the same loop but shall remain

individually addressable. It shall be possible to connect mimic panel, repeat

panel, interface box etc., also on the same loop. Removal of one or more devices

on the loop shall not render any of the remaining devices inoperative.

The panel shall log at least 50 fire events on a last in first out basis. The

information can be either printed and/or displayed.

The control panel shall be capable of accepting non-fire signals and auctioning

a preconfigured series or events. These shall be initiated manually or

automatically via the internal panel clock, or resulting from an alarm clock.

Each loop shall have the capacity to accommodate a minimum of 120 analogue

addressable devices.

Control panel shall be capable of networking with another control panel and PC

(Graphical Interface).

Control panel shall contain following as a minimum:

LCD display for zone number, device number, & device type & zone area

name display.

Numeric keypad.

Zone LED‟s.

Alarm buzzer.

Supply healthy/faulty LED/common alarm

Printer

Control panel shall contain suitable over-voltage protection to prevent any

malfunction or damage which might occur from line power surges.

Following faults shall be monitored & displayed at LCD display/LED.

Power supply failure

Battery short circuit, disconnection, low voltage.

Battery charger short circuit or disconnection.

Short circuit or disconnection of loop detectors, call points, PC, I/O

modules.

Removal of any detector or call point.

Sounder circuit short circuit or disconnection of any leads to sounders.

8.4 Analogue Addressable Smoke Detector

192

The analogue addressable smoke detector shall be solid state lionisation type,

compatible with the other loop devices and fire alarm panel and obtain

operating power from the fire alarm panel. Removal of the detector head shall

interrupt the supervisory circuit of the fire alarm loop and cause a trouble

signal at the control panel. Detectors shall have a flashing status-indicating

LED for visual supervision.

Normally two way bases shall be used for loop in and loop out. Three way base

shall be used where there is a spur or tee.

8.5 Analogue Addressable Heat Detector

The analogue addressable heat detectors shall be combination rate-of-rise and

fixed temperature type. When fixed-temperature portion is activated, the unit

shall be nonrestorable and give visual evidence of such operation.

Normally two way bases shall be used for loop in and loop out. Three way base

shall be used where there is a spur or tee.

8.6 Analogue Addressable Optical (Photoelectric)/ Heat Combined Detectors

The analogue addressable microprocessor based smoke/heat sensor shall be a

combined type having two individual sensing elements to provide excellent

cover for slow smouldering and fast free burning types of fire. Optical sensing

shall be carried out by means of infra-red LED transmitting a pulse of light

across an obtuse angled chamber. Heat sending shall be carried out by two

thermistors which sample the surrounding environmental temperature. It shall

be temperature type or rate of rise type. Normally two way bases shall be used

for loop in and loop out. Three way base shall

be used where there is a spur or tee.

8.7 Analogue Addressable Manual Call Point

Analogue addressable Manual Station shall be of the semi-flush mounting

“breakglass” type, painted red with white lettering. Each station shall be

provided with spare glass. A single key shall be used for opening, testing and

resetting of call point.

The key shall test the actual movements of the contact.

8.8 Analogue Addressable Electronic Sounder

The analogue addressable electronic sounder shall be wired on the same two

wire polling loop which is being used by sensors, manual call points etc.

193

Electronic sounders shall be capable to provide upto three different sound

signals which can be configured via the fire alarm panel. The sound level shall

be selectable. The sound output of all the electronic sounders shall be in phase.

It shall be completely programmable for the fire alarm control panel to sound

various sounders as programmed.

8.9 Protection Against Indirect Contact

As called for in Section 413 of the 16th Edition of IEE Regulations for Protection

against Indirect Contact, the Contractor shall connect the metallic ducts, risers,

and trunking/conduit and the panels of the fire detection and alarm system by

copper tapes to the main earthing terminals.

194

195

SECTION – 9

POWER TRANSFORMER

9.0 Power Transformer

9.1 Three phase Power Transformers for indoor use having transformation ratio of

11000/380 Volts at frequency of 50 Hz and KVA ratings as given in the Bill of

Quantities shall be supplied and erected by the Contractor.

9.2 The Transformers shall be manufactured, supplied and tested in accordance

with the following standards: -

i- British Standard 171/1959 - Power Transformers

ii- British Standard 358/1959 - Measurement of Voltage with sphere gaps.

iii- British Standard 923/1940 - Impulse voltage testing.

iv- British Standard 2757/1964 - Classification of insulating materials for

electrical machinery and apparatus on the basis of thermal stability in

service v- American Standards Association C.57.12.1956 – Requirements

terminology and test code for distribution power and regulating

transformers and reactors other than current limiting reactors.

vi- I.E.C. Publication 76 - Recommendations for Power Transformers

vii- I.E.C. Document 14 (Secretariat) 53.

viii- I.E.C. Document 14 (Secretariat) 54.

ix- I.E.C. Document 14 (Secretariat) 55.

x- I.E.C. Publication 60 - High Voltage test techniques.

9.3 The transformer shall be oil-immersed type with core and windings immersed in

natural mineral oil. The core shall be of a laminated construction made of high-

grade electric steel sheets rigidly packed and free of vibrations due to frequency

and stresses. The windings shall be uniformly insulated. The thermal class of

insulating material shall be Class-A. Test voltages shall be based on highest of

the system voltage i.e. 12 kV. Power frequency voltage shall be 28 kV and

impulse voltage to be 95 kV. The wave being 1/50 microseconds. The insulation

to earth of the winding shall be uniform.

196

The limits of temperature rise above ambient of the windings, core and oil shall

be as below:

Winding - 50 Degree Centigrade

Core - 50 Degree Centigrade

Oil - 40 Degree Centigrade

The transformer shall be designed and constructed to withstand, without

damage, the effects of short circuit of magnitude equal to 25 times the

symmetrical r.m.s. value of full load current for 2 seconds.

Under service conditions, the transformer shall be capable of withstanding

without damage on any tappings, the electromagnetic forces, arising under

short circuit conditions.

The transformer shall be capable of withstanding without damage to any

tappings under service conditions the thermal effects of short-circuit at the

terminals of any winding for 2 seconds.

The transformer shall be provided with regulating taps. The adjusting tapping

shall be + 2-1/2%, normal, - 2- 1/2%, - 5% and - 7-1/2%. The tappings being

located on the higher voltage winding

Tap changing shall be effected by means of an externally operated on load

circuit switch capable of being locked in position.

The method of cooling shall be natural air; the method of circulation of oil shall

be by natural thermal head and would be indicated by symbol ON. The primary

windings shall be "delta" connected and the secondary winding shall be "Star"

connected internally. The star point shall be brought out as neutral. The

internal connections shall be clearly indicated on the nameplate together with

tap changing connections. The vector group DY 11 of the transformer shall also

be indicated on the nameplate.

The transformer tank shall be of welded construction made of high-grade steel

plate. It shall have either a finned external construction or tubular construction

to facilitate the natural air-cooling.

An oil conservator tank fitted with a dehydrating breather and oil level indicator

shall be fitted to the transformer tank.

The complete assembled tank shall be tested to withstand without deformation

or leakage a pressure of 15 lbs./sq. in (1.05 kg/sq. cm).

197

The tank finish shall be battleship grey color. The paint shall be highly resistant

to the effects of high temperatures and shall have a long life under the normal

working conditions. As a minimum it shall consist of a priming coat and two

finish coats applied after complete derusting and degreasing of the tank. The

thickness of the paint shall not be less than 0.12 mm.

The oil level indicator shall be visual glass type with minimum oil level marking

at 30 degree centigrade and with two additional marks "Empty" and "Full" to be

provided. These corresponding to the upper and lower temperatures for which

the transformer is required to operate on site.

9.4 The following routine tests shall be carried out on the transformers in the

presence of the Engineer.

i- Temperature Rise Test

ii- Impedance Test.

iii- Ratio and Phase angle test at one Standard Load.

iv- Dielectric Test of Low Frequency

A certified copy of a complete type tests carried out by an approved testing

authority on an identical transformer shall accompany each transformer failing

which the Contractor shall make arrangements to carry out these tests in the

presence of the Engineer without any extra expense to the KPT 14.5. The

following fittings shall be provided with each transformer.

i- Rating Plate.

ii- Terminal Marking Plate

iii- Lifting Lugs.

iv- Earthing Terminals for Tank

v- Oil filling holes and plug.

vi- Oil level indicator.

vii- Drain valve with built-in sampling device.

viii- Conservator

ix- Air Vent

x- Dehydrating Breather

xi- Dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator.

xii- Single Float Buchholz Relay complete with auxiliary relay on the panel.

198

xiii- Steel Rollers with rolling direction parallel to the longer side.

9.5 The rating plate shall carry the following information:-

i- Manufacturers Name.

ii- Manufacturers Serial Number

iii- Year of Manufacture

iv- Owner's Identification Mark.

v- Rated KVA

vi- No. of Phases

vii- Frequency

viii- Rated Voltage at no load (Higher Voltage/Lower Voltage).

ix- Percent Impedance Voltage

x- Rated current (Higher Voltage/Lower Voltage)

xi- Winding connections and phase displacement symbols of vector diagram.

xii- Type of Cooling

xiii- Total weight of the transformer.

xiv- Total quantity and weight of the oil.

xv- Weight of core and winding assembly

The terminal marking plate shall carry the following information: -

i- Vector Group Symbol

ii- Winding connections of high voltage and low voltage sides.

iii- Tappings with subscripts

iv- Voltage ratios at various tappings the lower voltage being kept constant.

v- Rated Current (Higher Voltage/Lower Voltage)

Letters ABC shall be used for the high voltage side and a b c shall be used for

low voltage side.

The transformers shall be manufactured by an approved manufacturer.

The transformers of the ratings as given in the Bill of Quantities shall be

supplied tested erected and commissioned under this Contract and shall be

complete in every respect with first filling of dehydrated mineral oil specified

hereinafter.

199

9.6 Oil for Transformers

9.6.1 Oil for transformers shall conform to British Standard 148.

9.6.2 Insulating oil shall be straight run mineral oil obtained from

fractional distillation of crude petroleum, refined specially for use

as an insulating and cooling medium in oil immersed

transformers.

It shall be free from water, sediments, foreign materials, and

petroleum fractions, which may be injurious to equipment or any

of its components, such as insulation, paint, varnish and metallic

or other parts. It shall be free of synthetic additives of all types.

9.6.3 The oil dielectric strength above 40 kV will be required when

tested according to BS 148.

200

201

SECTION – 10

NURSE CALL SYSTEM

10.0 GENERAL

Hospital design process requires some kind of Nurse Call System which

includes patient-to-staff and staff-to-staff calls when the need arises. Nurse call

system for GMC Type „A‟ is designed for patient to staff only with provision of

recording all calls in the Hospital IP system.

10.1 OPERATION

When the nurse call is initiated, it buzzes at the nearest staff base, where the

staff responsible can find out from the nurse call panel mounted on the wall,

where the call originated. Once in the correct location, they can spot the nurse

call lamp which can be installed ceiling or above door wall mounted to guide the

staff to the correct room, where they can use the reset button to reset the

buzzers and blinking lights and attend to the patients needs.

10.2 CAPABILITIES

A Nurse Call system and layout should be basic that handles patient and

emergency calls by use of a button to initiate the call, a lamp that lights to

show the staff where the call originated from and a buzzer.

At the opposite end of the scale, these systems can be extremely complicated

depending on the requirements of the client and the department it is being used

in. Many modern Nurse Call systems are not only the basic functionality, but

the capability of staff presence; cardiac call and bedside communications from

the staff base to the patient.based on LAN Work‟s networks or an I.P.

addressable system and offer

10.3 PLANNING THE SYSTEM

While designing the consideration should be given to the size of the nursing

zones and the relationship between staff bases / main corridors / reception

desks / clean and dirty utilities with regards to where the calls will originate

and where the staff may be (during the day and during night when there is low

number of staff monitoring a larger area).

202

10.4 DESIGN INPUT

Following items and descriptions have been considered for the design;

10.5 PATIENT CALL

Various descriptions for this item: Patient call handset or call pull cord or call

handset or call handset with integrated light controls

Patient call description may also include;

urse Call button / Reset button with integrated patient reassurance light / Staff

emergency call. The call button must be in reach of the patient

10.6 COMMISSIONING OF THE SYSTEM

Thought should also be given to the priority of call and how it should be

presented to the staff. For example, a staff-to-staff call for Crash Call (to

resuscitate a patient with cardiac arrest) would take priority over a normal

patient-to-staff call for a glass of water or pain killers.

LED panel shall also be mounted at the Staff bases and if required, at strategic

points within the area served by each system such as Nursing Station, Staff

rest rooms and Corridors and connected to the server. All connections should

be from Cat – 6 cable in which no other service other than Nurse Call

System is connected.

A patient call should display on the appropriate indicator panels displaying the

source of the call providing audio and visual indication of an active call. Clean

and Dirty utilities should have as a bare minimum lamp buzzer units fitted so if

the staffs are working there, they can be alerted. Over door indicators generally

illuminate the source of the call outside the room and in multibed areas above

the patient bed.

The type of call generated will define the priority of a call i.e., the lowest to the

highest are defined as follows:

Low: Patient call

Medium: Bathroom / Toilet call

High: Emergency

Highest: Cardiac arrest call

Consideration should be given to the above the door indication when a call is

active and are generally overridden by extinguishing the light outside the room

203

when the system receives a higher priority call returning to the previous state

when the higher priority call has been reset. In multi bed areas the lower

priority call should remain on to reassure a patient that their call has not been

cancelled.

10.7 ROUTING

10.7.1 CABLE ROUTING:

It must however be observed that the use of cabling and installation

material containing halogen is not permitted.

Cables for the nurse call system must not be routed with cables of

other systems (with hazardous voltage) in common cables, tubes or

installation channels. Circuits for safety purposes must be routed

independently of other circuits. Electrical errors or modifications to

the general power supply must not influence the operational safety of

the call system.

The cable material of the call system must be routed with a minimum

distance of 30 cm to 230 V~ cables. With shorter distances of less

than 10 m, a distance of 10 cm suffices. Cabe routing must be

explicitly documented in the system documentation by the installation

company.

With installation of the cable network of the call system, fire protection

requirements must be complied with, for example when the bus line is

routed in escape and rescue routes (hall-ways).

10.8 ROOM AND WARD CABLE ROUTING.

From the control unit of the room in a star configuration or from device to device (looping through).

The ward bus is routed from device to device; star-shaped wiring as with the room bus is not permissible.

10.9 CABLE MATERIAL

TYPE OF CABLE MATERIAL

Communication line Cat – 6 or equilent cable is used.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT CONNECT POWER SUPPLY UNITS IN PARALLED.

A new voltage line must be installed for each further power supply unit in the

system. Parallel switching of power supply units is not permissible.

204

10.10 INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION HEIGHTS FOR DEVICES

The devices of the call system must be mounted at the following heights above

the floor:

Components such as the call button or switch-off button at a height of 0.7

m to 1.5 m.

With pull-cord buttons in bathroom units, specific requirements i.e.

Pull-cord buttons must be fitted at least 20 cm above the highest possible

position of the shower head.

It must be possible for the pull cord to be reached by persons lying on the floor.

Operating elements for wheelchair patients should be mounted to a height of

0.85 m.

10.11 REEF KNOT ON THE HANDLE OF PULL-CORD BUTTON.

The handle is to be secured with a reef knot on the pull cord.

10.12 INSTALLATION HEIGHTS FOR SIGNAL LIGHTS AND LARGE DISPLAYS

Components such as signal lights and large text displays should be installed at

a height of 1.5 m to 2.2 m.

10.13 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS FOR CONTROL UNITS, ENERGY SUPPLY

DEVICES

Central control devices such as system central control units, ward control

centres, energy supply devices and other components without operating or

signalling functions may only be installed in dry rooms (max. humidity 75 % at

approx. 18 °C), and not in patient's rooms. They must be easily accessible at all

times (inspection access at least 60 cm in width). Heat dissi-pation must not be

inhibited. When installing in switch cabinets and similar facilities, heat loss

must be dissipated if necessary with forced ventilation.

205

10.14 SOFTWARE FOR INSTALATION OF IP NETWORKING OF NURSE CALL

SYSTEM

The contractor shall also provide software for functioning of Nurse Call System

and its linkage to the server and storage in the main control

10.15 TECHNICAL DATA

Installation of devices in 1/2-gang flush-mounted boxes (DIN 49073) or in bed head unit

of medical gases/ flush-mounted housing.

System Bus

Cable type = Ethernet cable of category 6

Ward Bus

Cable type = Twisted communication line,

cable material 4 x 2 x 0.8 mm

(2 wire pairs for +24 V and GND

for doubling of cross-section)

Max. Cable length of power supply = 300 m

Max. Cable length of bus line = 1000 m

Max. Number of bus participants = 26 (see also the energy point

table in the Planning chapter)

Type of cable routing = from device to device (not star-shaped)

terminating resistance required at last = activate terminating resistances

device on the bus with jumpers

(included with the ward control centre)

Room Bus

Cable type = Twisted communication line,

cable material 4 x 2 x 0.6 mm

max. cable length = 40 M

max. number of devices in the room = 16 (duty-/room terminals and room

modules not included)

Type of cable routing = from device to device or star-shaped

206

Power Supply

Direct current 24 V (± 10%)

Power rectifier with UPS

Input (primary voltage)

Rated voltage: 115 V (-15 %) to

230 V (+15 %)

Mains frequency: 45 to 65 Hz

Output (secondary voltage)

Output voltage in mains operation: 27,2 V (+/- 0.5 %)

Output voltage in battery operation: 24 V (+/- 0.5 %)

Rated output current: 6 A

Charging current limitation: Yes

Output power: 150 W

Battery capacity: 2 x 12 Ah

Battery Voltage Thresholds

Switching threshold for advance warning prior

to battery shut-down: 1,85 V/cell

Switching threshold for complete drainage

Protection: 1,8 V/cell

Protection class: I

Protection level: IP 30

Fuse on the primary side: T 2.0 A

Fuse on the secondary side: T 6,3 A

Ambient temperature at 100% load: -5º C to +40º C

Dimensions (L x W x D): approx. 320 x 240 x 120 mm

Weight: approx. 10 kg, incl. batteries

Power Rectifier

Input (primary voltage)

Rated voltage: 230 V (+/- 15 %)

Mains frequency: 45 to 65 Hz

Output (secondary voltage)

Output voltage in mains operation: 27,2 V (+/- 0.5 %)

Rated output current: 6 A

207

Output power: 150 W

Protection class: I

Protection level: IP 30

Fuse on the primary side: T 2.0 A

Fuse on the secondary side: T 6,3 A

Ambient temperature at 100% load: -5º C to +40º C

Ward Control Centre

Operating voltage: 24 V DC

Current consumption: 300 mA

Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +50 °C

Storage temperature: -25 °C to +75 °C

Humidity: max. 90%

Protection type: IP 20

Connection terminals: Ø to 2.5 mm2

Mounting: intended for DIN top-hat rail

System Central Control Unit

Operating voltage: 24 V DC

Current consumption: 400 mA

Power consumption: approx. 9.6 W

Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +50 °C

Humidity: max. 90%

Protection type: IP 20

Connection terminals: Ø to 2.5 mm2

Mounting: possible on DIN top-hat rail

208

209

SECTION – 11

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

11.0 The public Address System shall be consisting of the following:

a. Amplifier

b. Ceiling mounted speaker

c. Cable connecting speaker with amplifier and control room

d. Auto switches for central (all) speakers operation each zone operation.

11.0.1 AMPLIFIER

The amplifiers for main reception and control room shall be BOSCH or PLE-

1P 120-EU a high-power plug-and-play cost effective power

amplifiers that deliver 120 W to constant voltage or 8 ohms loads..

The amplifier shall be UL approved model. Zone amplifier: the amplifiers for

small operations i.e. specialist/consultants reception and laboratory (Pathology)

area shall be BOSCH model-or PLE-1P 120-US PLENA Amplifier UL approved.

11.0.2 SPEAKER

The speakers shall be ceiling mounted Ceiling Mount, 6W - LHM060610 -

BOSCH.

11.0.3 MICRO PHONE:

Microphone shall be desktop as per specification attached.

11.0.4 MAIN CONTROL:

Main control shall be connected to all three sub control and announcement to

any portion can also be made from main control.

210

11.1 BOSCH SPEAKER

11.1.1 DESCRIPTION:

Integrated with a speaker unit and panel, the loudspeaker,

Ceiling Mount, 6w - LHM060610 - BOSCH is of all metallic

construction and ideal for use in a voice alarm system. It

features spring clamp mechanism for easy speaker mounting

to the ceiling. The input impedance can be easily changed by

changing the tap position of the transformer. The push-in

type input terminal block makes cable connections easy and

allows bridge wiring.

SPECIFICATION:

Rated Input 6 W (100 V line), 3 W (70 V line)

Rated

Impedance

100 V line: 1.7 kΩ (6 W), 3.3 kΩ (3 W), 6.7 kΩ (1.5 W), 13 kΩ

(0.8 W)

70 V line: 1.7 kΩ (3 W), 3.3 kΩ (1.5 W), 6.7 kΩ (0.8 W), 13

kΩ (0.4 W)

Sensitivity 93 dB (1 W, 1 m) (500 - 5,000 Hz, pink noise)

Frequency

Response

45 - 20,000 Hz (peak -20 dB)

Speaker

Component 16 cm (6") double cone-type

Dimensions for

Fixing Hole

Mounting hole: φ200±3 mm (φ7.87"±0.12")

Ceiling thickness: 5 - 25 mm (0.2" - 0.98")

211

Speaker Mounting Method

Spring clamp

Applicable Cable

600 V vinyl-insulated cable (IV wire or HIV wire)

Solid copper wire: φ0.8 - φ1.6 mm (equivalent to AWG 20 -

14) 7-core twisted copper wire: 0.75 - 1.25 m㎡ (equivalent

to AWG 18 - 16)

Connection Push-in connector (bridging terminal-2 branch type)

Finish

Baffle: Steel plate, off-white (RAL 9010 or equivalent color),

paint Grille: Surface-treated steel plate net, off-white (RAL

9010 or equivalent color),paint

Dimensions φ230 × 79 (D) mm (φ9.06" × 3.11")

Weight 760 g (1.68 lb)

212

11.2 MICROPHONE

11.2.1 DESCRIPTION:

PM-660 DESK-TOP MICROPHONE

Designed for paging calls and general

announcements, the PM-660 desk-top microphone comes with a large talk switch and a lock lever for easy and

convenient operation.

SPECIFICATION:

Type Moving coil microphone

Polar Pattern Unidirectional

Rated Impedance 600 Ω, unbalanced

Rated Sensitivity -58 dB (1 kHz, 0 dB=1 V/Pa)

Frequency

Response 100 Hz - 10 kHz

Output φ4.5 (φ0.18"), 2-conductor shielded cable (2.5 m (98.43"))

with stereo phone plug

Talk Switch 1-push-to-talk switch, 1-locking lever, Short-off type

Remote Control 500 mA or less at 30 V DC

Finish Microphone head : Zinc plated steel wire, gray baked paint

Main unit: ABS resin, gray

Dimensions 100 (W) × 215 (H) × 150 (D) mm (3.94" × 8.46" × 5.91")

Weight 440 g (0.97 lb) (cord excluded)

213

11.3 PLE-1P120-US PLENA AMPLIFIER

The PLE-1P120-EU is high-power plug-and-play cost effective power

amplifiers that deliver 120 and 240W to constant voltage or 8 ohms loads. Built

with premium quality and protections, they offer basic functionality at a budget

price. The amplifiers offer straight 1 and 100V line in, and 70V, 100V and 8

ohms out. They can extend the power of the PLE- series mixer amplifiers or be

combined with the PLE-10M2-EU mixer, or work anywhere where more power

on an existing 100V line is needed or when a line level signal is provided.

120 W power amplifier in a compact housing

1V line level balanced input

70V, 100V and 8 ohms outputs

100V input for slave operation on 100V speaker line

Temperature-controlled forced front to back ventilation (directly

stackable)

11.3.1SPECIFICATIONS Mains power supply Voltage : 115 to 230V AC ±10%, 50/60Hz

Inrush Current : 4.5 / 9 A

Power Consumption : 380 VA

Battery power supply : 24V DC, +10% / -15%, 5.5A

Maximum / rated power : 180 / 120 W

Power reduction on backup power : -1 dB

Frequency Response : 50Hz to 20kHz (+1/?3dB at ?10dB ref. rated

output)

Distortion : <1% at rated output power, 1kHz

Storage Temperature : -40 to +70 ºC

Relative Humidity : <95 %

Acoustic noise level of fan : <40dB SPL at 1m temperature controlled

Mounting : Stand-alone, 19in rack

Operating Temperature (Maximum) : 45 C

Depth : 10.63 in

Height : 3.94 in

Width : 16.93 in

Product Weight : 10.50 kg

214

11.4 BOSCH PLE-1ME240-US PLENA MIXER AMPLIFIER

OVERVIEW

The Bosch PLE-1ME240-US Plena Mixer Amplifier is a compact, yet powerful

240 watt amplifier and 4-channel mixer for providing background music and public

address audio in commercial applications, office spaces or at home. The unit is easy to

use with 4 line / microphone inputs, each with their own level controls on the front

panel. Dedicated speaker terminals provide the output signal to speakers. There are

treble and bass controls for signal contouring and switchable phantom power to

condenser microphones.

4 microphone / line inputs, plus music source input

Announcement only output, 3-wire volume override

Wide range of output power (240 Watts)

2-tone chime

SPECIFICATIONS

Power Supply

120 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz (reduced power at lower

mains voltage)

Inrush: 24A

Power Consumption: 800 VA

Frequency Response

Line: 60 Hz to 20 kHz (+1/‐ 3 dB @ ‐ 10 dB ref. rated

output)

Mic: 70 Hz to 20 kHz (+1/‐ 3 dB @ ‐ 10 dB ref. rated

output)

Distortion <1% @ rated output power, 1 kHz

Tone Controls Bass: Max. ± 8 dB

Treble: Max. ± 8 dB

Audio Inputs

Mic and Line Inputs

Input 1: (push-to-talk contact with 5‐ pin Euro style,

balanced, phantom priority)

215

Input 2: 3‐ pin Euro style, balanced, phantom

Input 3 and 4: TRS Jack (1/4, 6.3mm) balanced

Sensitivity: 1 mV (mic.); 300 mV (line)

Impedance: >1 kohm (mic.); >5 kohm (line)

Dynamic range: 93dB

S/N (flat at max volume): >63 dB (mic.); >70 dB (line)

S/N (flat at min volume/muted): >75dB

CMRR (mic.): >40dB (50Hz to 20kHz)

Headphone: >25dB

Speech Filter: -3dB @ 315Hz, high-pass, 6dB/oct

Phantom Power Supply: 16V via 1.2 ohms (mic.)

Music Input

Connector: Cinch, stereo converted to mono

Sensitivity: 200mV

Impedance: 22k Ohms

S/N (flat at max volume): >75dB

S/N (flat at min volume/muted): >80dB

Headroom: >25sB

Speaker Output Screw terminal, floating, 120W

Loudspeaker output @ 4 ohm: 22V

Temperature -10° to +45° C

Humidity: < 95%

Dimensions (HxWxD) 3.93 x 16.93 x 10.63" (100 x 430 x 270mm)

Weight 19.63 lb (8.9kg)

216

217

SECTION – 12

EARTHING

12.0 Earthing

12.1 General

The contractor shall install a complete earthing system shown on drawing.

The contractor shall install a complete earthing system comprising a main earth

electrode system, main earthing conductor, earth bars (in Distribution Boards

etc.), earth continuity conductors, potential equalizing bars and potential

equalizing (bonding) conductors.

12.2 High Voltage Earth

Separate and independent HV earth shall be installed to comply with the KESC

and relevant regulations.

12.3 Main Earth Electrode System

In the vicinity of the Main LT Panel and Generator Panel, an earth electrode

system shall be installed by the Contractor to achieve less than one ohm

resistance to earth.

It shall be constructed of 610 mm x 610 mm x 6 mm copper plate

exothermically (Cadweld) welded to (minimum 95 sq. mm.) bare copper earth

wire laid horizontally 750mm under the ground surface.

If the required resistance cannot be achieved in the specified configuration,

additional ground earthing plate shall be installed and added to the system,

provided that they are installed not less than 5 meters away from the existing

earth plate.

The installation shall be inspected before covering with soil and photographs

shall be taken for the record. They shall be included in final Maintenance and

Operation Manuals.

On completion, the tests to prove the achieved results shall be carried out,

utilizing the “Fall of potential method” .The Engineer reserves the right to be

present at all tests.

Certified test results shall be forwarded to the Engineer.

218

12.4 Main Earthing Conductor

Main Earthing conductor shall comprise two 95mm2 copper conductors cad

welded to the main earth electrode and connected to the main earth bar with an

approved type double crimp double hole compression lugs. The conductors

shall be labeled with a permanent label: “Main Earthing Conductor - do not

remove”

12.5 Main Earth Bar

Main Earth Bar shall consist of a (minimum 100mm wide 9mm thick) high

conductivity tinned copper bar of a suitable length (minimum 600 mm),

installed next to the LT panel, Distribution Boards. The bar shall be easily

accessible, wall mounted over the cable duct on approved insulating spacers

installed at intervals not exceeding 300mm. The bar shall be predrilled and

equipped with necessary (cadmium plated) bolt / locking washer / double nut

arrangement for connection of the earthing conductors.

12.6 LT Panel, MCCs, DBs and Generators Earthing Conductors

The Main Earth Bar shall be connected to the LT Panel, earth bar with two

insulated 95mm2 copper conductors. The conductors shall be labeled with a

permanent label at both ends: “Do not remove - Main Earthing Conductor – LT

PANEL”.

Main Earth bar shall be connected to the Generators earth Bar with two

insulated 95mm2 copper conductors. The conductors shall be labeled with a

permanent label at both ends: “ Do not remove - Main Earthing Conductor –

Generators”.

Neutral earthing (N.E) shall be done with PVC insulated cables connecting the

neutral bar of the LT panel to the substation earth bar.

12.7 Earth Continuity Conductors

Insulated earth continuity conductors of adequate cross-section shall be run

from the LT Panel earth bar to all electrical equipment powered from the LT,

together with phase and neutral cables.

12.8 Potential Equalizing Conductors

Insulated potential equalizing conductors of adequate cross-section shall be run

from the Main Earth Bar to all bonded to earth structures and potential

equalizing bars in various areas.

219

The earthing system shall be bonded to the rebars of the building foundation

and UG water tank, with approved rebar clamps / welding of already laid steel

reinforcement bars within the structural concrete around the entire periphery

of the basement retaining wall to form a continuous loop with clamps to vertical

rebar at column positions.

220

221

SECTION 13

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

13.0 Lightning Protection System

13.1 General

This section covers the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the

complete lightning protection system. The lightning protection system shall be

installed in accordance with BS standard. The system shall be Faraday-Cage

type and shall consist of air terminals, down conductors, test points, earth

termination and earth electrodes. The arrangement of the system shall be as

indicated on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer Incharge.

13.2 Air Terminal

An air terminal shall be a vertical electrolytic copper rod size as specified in the

drawing. Air terminal should project atleast 300 mm above the structure. It

should be interconnected to the entire network and should not be more than 30

m apart.

13.3 Roof Conductor

Roof conductor shall be bare copper wire of size as indicated in the drawing. It

must be securely fastened with clamps as shown in the detail drawing.

13.4 Down Conductor

The down conductor shall be installed in heavy-duty PVC pipes (Class-D). The

size of the pipe shall be as per drawing.

The down conductor shall preferably shall follow the shortest path between Air

terminal or network and earth electrode.

Where the conductor penetrates the roof the sleeves/holes shall be effectively

sealed with water proofing sealant. Use of a sheet pitch pan is a requirement. A

close coordination with the specialist roofing contractor must be carried out.

Chilled water pipe, fire hydrant pipe, down pipe, cable trays and other metal

component running through the building shall be bonded with the system

network.

13.5 Test Point

A test point shall be provided for each conductor at 500 mm above finished

ground level and shall be of electrolytic copper. The test point shall be protected

222

from unauthorized interference. It shall be as per drawing and shall be enclosed

in a heavy duty PVC box (flush with column or wall)

13.6 Bonding Joints

All joint/tee-off shall be exothermic welded (Cad weld) where due to site

condition cad weld is not possible, written permission to use solder clamped

bolts or screwed joint shall be sought.

Joint shall be few as possible. All joints be coated with epoxy resin paint and

protected against moisture and corrosion.

13.7 Earth Electrode

Earth electrode shall be copper clad steel of size as indicated in the drawing. All

earth electrode shall be connected to the nearest test point by stranded wire of

size as indicated in the drawing.

The top section of the earth shall be protected from damage by RCC inspection

chamber having heavy duty cover. The termination of cable at the inspection

chamber shall be accessible and visible when cover is removed.

The lightning protective system shall have earth resistance of 10 ohms

maximum.

13.8 Trenches

Trenches shall be excavated to a depth of one meter. The trench shall be back

filled and compacted with earth to its original level.

13.9 Tests

All tests pertaining to lightning protection system shall be carried out in

presence of Engineer Incharge. Test result shall be submitted for Engineers

approval.

223

SECTION – 14

PABX

(Panasonic KX-TDE 600)

14.1 PABX

All work shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the

Pakistan Telecommunications Corporation Ltd. and it will be the responsibility

of the Contractor to have the installation approved and passed by the PTCL, at

no extra cost to the Employer.

The PABX (Panasonic KX-TDE 600) shall be approved by the Pakistan

Telecommunications Corporation Limited for connection to their network. It

shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to obtain all necessary

approvals and NOCs from the PTCL and the local exchange.

The PABX shall have the following features:

All electronic, microprocessor-controlled digital Stored Programme

Controlled system using pulse-code-modulation (PCM) with a single stage,

non-blocking time division multiplex (TDM) network, DTMF and pulse

dialling.

Cabinet design with plug-in modules and connecting cables.

Integrated and discrete components of high level of quality and reliability to

guarantee a high level of availability over extended usage period.

Integrated security system which optimises system availability when faults

occur, simplifies maintenance and enables automatic restart to take place if

there is a power outage/ disconnection.

Shall be capable of connecting the following types of trunks:

Incoming/outgoing/bothway normal trunks.

Direct-inward-dialling (DID) lines

Tie Lines

(Signalling on the above may be Pulse or DTMF type).

Stations may have Impulse or DTMF signalling.

Suitability for data-signal switching.

Modular expansion capability for incoming/outgoing lines.

All facilities of modern PABXs shall be provided, including

Call waiting

224

Night-answering arrangements

Call-charge computer for extension billing, complete with

hardware/printer & software

Abbreviated dialing

Music-on-hold

Conference calling

Class of service

Voice mailing

Telephone instruments shall be of rugged ABS plastic of the push-button type,

with radial and recall buttons, and adjustable bell volume/tone controls.

Flexible incoming cable (3m length) and instrument cable shall be connected to

the base with modular jacks. Colours shall be as chosen by the

Employer/Consultant. The instrument shall be approved by PTCL and be

compatible with the PABX.

Wiring shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Pakistan

Telecommunications Corporation Limited and it will be the responsibility of the

Contractor to have the installation approved and passed by the PTCL, at no

extra cost to the Employer.

The wiring shall be laid in concealed PVC conduits. External wiring shall be

carried out in heavy-duty (Class D) PVC pipe, 500mm below grade, with hand

holes 50m intervals or as required by site conditions.

To maintain system performance & compatibility, all equipment shall be of

same make.

All equipment shall be new and of latest make & model.

The complete system hardware plus software shall be year 2000 compliant.

14.2 Installation

The Contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawings laying out the work, with

comprehensive technical submittals in duplicate for the approval of the

Engineer/ Consultant. The final shop drawings & technical submittals shall be

submitted in triplicate.

225

All installation and termination work shall be undertaken by the Contractor,

under the supervision of a qualified Engineer who has been trained by the

manufacturer.

Cables shall be laid by others under the supervision of contractor.

14.3 Testing & Commissioning

Complete planning, installation, and operating manuals/documentation shall

be made available in triplicate to the Employer through consultant, and the

Employer‟s security personal shall be trained in the operation, programming,

and maintenance of the system.

14.4 Guarantee & Maintenance

The Contractor shall provide an on-site warranty and free maintenance (1

visit/3 moths), covering materials and labour, valid for 1 year from date of

commissioning, for the entire security alarm system.

226

227

SECTION – 15

CCTV CAMERAS & EQUIPMENT

15.0 GENERAL

This Particular Specification shall be read in conjunction with the Technical

Specifications, other sections and relevant drawings accompanying this

document. The Contractor shall not be absolved from his responsibility for not

carrying out the Contract works in accordance with the requirements of the

foregoing sections of this document and the detailed Specification of Work as

outlined hereunder. In cases where any discrepancies arise between the

Particular Specification and Technical Specification, the former shall prevail.

The word "Engineer" where used throughout the Specification, shall be

interpreted to mean the Project Manager, Consulting Electric Engineer or other

suitable person as authorized by the Employer

15.01 SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREME NTS

a. New CCTV system is to be installed to cover the 250 Beds Female

Wing Hospital Building and outer perimeter.

b. The CCTV equipment shall comprise a combination of fixed line and

PTZ cameras meeting the requirements of the User.

c. All the CCTV cameras housing shall have IP 65 rating.

d. The CCTV installation shall comply with the requirements of

SPD /UL/ BS EN 50132 (2001 or latest version).

e. “All the cameras shall be IP based installed with Cat-6 cables from

the camera systems to the Server Station through a dedicated LAN”.

15.2 CAMERAS – GENERAL

i. CCTV cameras shall be installed on demountable poles or building ceiling/

walls/ columns. The final camera location shall be based on a camera /

lighting survey, to be carried out by the contractor and ratified by the User.

ii. CCTV systems shall be connected to a 220-240V.a.c. power supply.

Plug and socket arrangements on the back of the cameras shall be

preferred for power and signal at the camera.

228

iii. Image measurements to be taken with the monitor in under-scan

mode using the ROTAKIN (or equivalent) test for image height and

resolution, not less than 570TVL for monochrome and colour.

iv. Cameras should be capable of low light recording (less than .05 lux),

colour by day and monochrome at night (Day and Night Camera).

v. All cameras shall be Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor

(CMOS) fitted with iris lens, CS mounts and Vari-focal lenses. With

resolution of 2592 x 1944 pixels (5 mega-pixels) and compression

H.264.

vi. All cameras shall be supplied complete with camera head, camera

lens and camera electronics housed within the same unit. A local

junction box shall be installed in the area adjacent to each proposed

camera position. This junction box will be used as an interface

between field cables, installed by contractor and the umbilical cables

supplied with the camera that will be installed and terminated by the

camera installer. The junction box will contain interface terminals,

mains distribution terminals, a lockable isolator, an RCD protected

socket and a low voltage power supply unit if required.

viii. All CCTV local junction boxes and environmental housings will be

fitted with tamper protection with alarms generated at the

Server/Control.

ix. Camera umbilical cables shall be integral with the camera supply,

contained within a flexible conduit arrangement with length of

generally 2 meters. If necessary, longer umbilical cables can be

specified.

x. Where PTZ camera is specified, consideration of the umbilical length

is important to avoid snagging of the umbilical through its proposed

travel. Lightweight umbilical is recommended to reduce drag on PTZ

head.

15.3 PAN TILT AND ZOOM:

i. With high-speed pan/tilt performance at 500° per second and

maximum of 255

ii. Preset locations for automatic monitoring.

229

iii. The pan angle shall be 360 degrees endless.

iv. The Tilt angle shall be 5~185 degrees. This angle must be within

the focal length view for the colour cameras.

v. The built-in auto focus zoom of 37X optical (minimum) to capture

distant objects clearly, with a combined optical/digital zoom up to

444X (minimum) for broad area monitoring.

vi. With horizontal resolution of not less than 550TV lines (Color) minimum

vii. Backlash to be better than +/- 0.25 degrees. In any case this shall be

better than +/- 2.5% of picture movement on the monitor screen at full

lens zoom, including movement due to flexing of the bracket, column and

mounting platform.

viii. The rigidity of the whole camera/bracket assembly is such that, with the

lens at maximum focal length, and the camera manually panned at full

speed from a 90-degree angle and then suddenly stopped, the picture

must stabilize within 2 seconds.

ix. Cameras should be located to take into account the ambient lighting

conditions and minimize shadows and glare.

x. All camera assemblies and housings shall be resistant to the extreme

weather conditions experience and accredited to National Standards for

these conditions (conform to the requirements of IP 66).

15.4 CCTV CONTROL SYSTEM:

i. An IP switch will be provided to give the operator access to the CCTV

system. Information shall be presented to the operator in the form of

pre-engineered mimic screens using industry standard symbols. The

software provided shall also allow the System Administrator and

Nominated persons to modify and create new graphics.

ii. Control Desks to be established in Control Room should consist of

following but not limited to:

a. Install two 32 inches LED Samsung screens/ monitors to be

mounted on racks in each demonstration display room (see detail

at Anx „B‟).

b. Install two 60 inches Samsung screen above the control desk

console (see detail at Anx „B‟).

230

c. Computer units (see attached Anx „A‟ for detailed

specifications).

d. Connectors: Video Out: BNC. Power: DC Jack type

e. Necessary cabling and switching hardware.

f. Network Video Recorders (NVRs)

iii. The screens and operator control desk will comply with the following:

a. The graphics shall present information via a top/down hierarchy

method, drop-down menu selection and text commands. This shall

allow access to simple site and show the location of all cameras.

b. A BNC connector on the CPU shall allow connection to a video

monitor and the diagnostic screens shall be displayed on this

monitor.

c. The control of the CCTV cameras shall be from an IP switch that

will have the ability to interface to a video switcher that will

display the picture as viewed by the camera on screens. The video

switcher will be located within the control room.

d. The equipment panel shall be modular in nature to allow for any

future expansion.

e. The equipment panel may house the following equipment but not

limited to video switching modules, an address decoder, split

screen unit to enable an 8-way split screen, a central processing

unit and power supply unit.

f. The IP switch shall have the ability to programme the system to

show alarm cameras at all monitors or pre-selected monitors and

alarms should be capable of being prioritized at the control desks.

g. The IP switch shall be able to assign text to a monitor that will

explain to the operator which area is being viewed and the location

of the intruder detection device, which has been activated.

h. The IP switch shall enable cameras to be identified to the operator

when viewed via text on screen.

i. The Video Switcher shall provide digital control and switching for

all camera inputs and monitor outputs.

231

j. The software shall allow the operator to interrogate and modify

information, but this function will not disrupt normal operation

and control of the CCTV system.

k. Software shall be provided to enable individual cameras to be

viewed on selected monitors. The software will allow the operator

to define or alter all system parameters; this shall include

passwords, camera time and date, camera titles, alarm messages

and system diagnostics.

l. The IP switch shall be able to programme camera control units to

give an operator authorized access only.

m. The IP switch shall be able to assign any camera to any monitor

and will not interfere with real time alarm video or other operator

selections.

n. The IP switch shall be capable of creating controlled and random

camera tours with varying dwell times.

iv. The details of technical specifications of Ethernet Switches are

given as Anx 'D'.

15.5 SOFTWARE AND SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS):

i. The software provided with the system shall be compatible with Windows

7 or later operating systems. All software will have been fully tested and

evidence of such testing will be provided to the User prior to installation.

ii. The Security Management System (SMS) will be located at the Security

Office. The associated electronic racks, modules and equipment shall be

housed within suitable enclosures in an equipment room adjoining the

control room.

iii. The SMS shall perform the following operational and training functions:-

a. Acquisition and processing of data and signals from Automatic

Access Control Systems, Video Surveillance, Perimeter Intruder

Detection Systems and other Intruder Detection Systems;

b. Continuous integrity monitoring and status display for the

intruder detection devices and their associated cabling;

c. Detection and recording of unauthorized attempts to use the

Automated Access Control Systems.

e. Manual operation of facilities and controlled overriding of signals;

232

f. Archiving to a database, with appropriate access facilities for the

Training Personnel and other authorized officials;

g. Generation of printed reports of site security status data;

h. Testing of the communication links between the components of

the access control system.

iv. The SMS shall be designed as a 'distributed intelligence system', whereby

system resilience and operating functionality are not solely dependent

upon the central operating system software and network infrastructure.

Each respective sector control panel shall have an intelligent capability to

provide standalone functionality.

v. The system shall be equipped with a System Administrator‟s workstation.

This will have controlled access and special privileges to facilitate

maintenance functions including system checking, diagnostics,

adjustments, configuration changes, and system upgrades. Students

shall not have access to any maintenance functions.

vi. The SMS shall incorporate measures to protect against tampering

through physical or electronic intrusion.

vii. The system hardware shall be designed in a modular fashion and shall

incorporate adequate spare space to accommodate foreseeable future

expansion of the GMC.

15.6 VIDEO RECORDING:

i. Network Video Recorder (NVR) shall be used for recording of data and

capable of retrieving minimum 15 days old recording with the

specification; but not limited to the following:

ii. Video compression=H.264

iii. Recording and playback resolution= 4CIF/DCIF/2CIF/CIF/QCIF real-

time

iv. Frame rate=25 fps

v. Bit rate of more than 2 Mbps

15.7 CCTV MONITORS:

i. Monitoring units shall be high quality colour, suitable for the

environment in which they will be utilized. The resolution shall be 570

lines minimum.

233

15.8 OPERATOR INTERFACE:

i. The operator interface desk and monitor arrangement will comply with

the following:

a. Where a single set of controls relates to more than one camera,

the operator shall be provided with a means of identifying which

camera is active.

b. Camera controls shall be located close to the CCTV monitor on

which a particular view is being displayed.

c. Re-set functions shall be provided to allow the operator to re-

center pan/tilt axis or return to a default setting. This can save

considerable time by allowing the operator to return to particular

known view quickly and easily.

d. When using split screen facilities, consider the effect on image size

and visibility as the number of views per screen increases.

e. Tilt able CCTV monitors (up, down, left and right) shall be

provided allow the operator to view monitors directly rather than

at an oblique angle.

f. Where multiple camera units are used in an area, the operator

shall be provided with a means of identifying at a glance which

camera is currently active.

g. Viewing distances shall be considered when selecting the size and

position of CCTV monitors at the workstation. Positioning of

CCTV monitors shall be considered in parallel with the need to

view other workstation controls and displays. As a rule of thumb,

Viewing Distance = (Diagonal Tube Size x 1.7).

ii. The design of the console will be undertaken at detailed design and will

be subject to customer approval, in particular customer ergonomics

advisor.

234

15.9. NVR 7732NI-K4/16P

15.9.1 OVERVIEW

Third-party network cameras supported Up to 8 Megapixels resolution

recording, Support 1-ch HDMI, 1-ch VGA, HMDI at up to 4K(3840x2160) resolution

16/32-ch network cameras can be connected with 160M/256M incoming bandwidth

Up to 4 SATA interfaces Plug & Play with up to 16 independent PoE network interfaces

Support dual-os to ensure high reliability of system running. Support various VCA

detection alarm and VCA search Support H.265/H.264/MPEG4 video formats

15.9.2 SPECIFICATIONS

Video/Audio Input

IP video input: | 32-ch

Two-way audio input: | 1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1kΩ)

Network

Incoming bandwidth: | 256Mbps

Outgoing bandwidth: | 160Mbps

Video/Audio Output

HDMI Output: |

1-

ch, resolution: 4K(3840*2160)/60Hz, 4K(3840*2160)/30Hz, 1920*1

080P/60Hz, 1600*1200/60Hz,

1280*1024/60Hz, 1280*720/60Hz, 1024*768/60Hz

Recording

Resolution: | 8MP/6MP/5MP/4MP/3MP/1080p/UXGA/720p/VGA/4CIF/DCIF/2

CIF/CIF/QCIF

235

Audio Output: | 1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1kΩ)

Synchronous

Playback: | 16-ch

VGA Output: |

1-

ch, resolution: 1920*1080P/60Hz, 1280*1024/60Hz, 1280*720/60

Hz, 1024*768/60Hz

Decoding

Live view / Playback: | 8MP/6MP/5MP/3MP/1080p/UXGA/720p/VGA/4CIF/DCIF/2CIF/

CIF/QCIF

Capability: | 8-ch@1080P

Hard Disk

SATA: | 4 SATA interfaces for 4HDDs

Capacity: | Up to 6TB capacity for each HDD

External Interface

Network Interface: | 1RJ-45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet interface

Serial Interface: | RS-232; RS-485;

USB Interface: | Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0

Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0

Alarm In: | 16-ch

Alarm Out: | 4-ch

236

POE

Interface: | 16 independent 10/100 Mbps PoE Ethernet interfaces

Max. Power: | 200W

Supported Standard: | AF and AT

General

Power Supply: | 100 to 240 VAC

Consumption(without

hard disk and POE): | ≤20 W

Working

Temperature: | -10 ºC ~ +55 ºC (+14 ºF~ + 131 ºF)

Working Humidity: | 10 % ~ 90 %

Chassis: | 19-inch rack-mounted 1.5U chassis

Dimensions: | 445 × 390 × 70 mm (17.5"× 15.3" × 2.8")

Weight(without

HDD): | ≤ 5 kg (11 lb)

237

15.10 CISCO SRW2024P 24-PORT GIGABIT SWITCH

HIGHLIGHTS

24 high-speed ports optimized for the network core or to support bandwidth-

intensive applications

Power over Ethernet easily and cost-effectively powers wireless access points,

video cameras, and other network-connected endpoints

Enhanced QoS helps ensure a consistent network experience and supports

networked applications including voice, video, and data storage

Simplified, web-based management for easy installation and configuration

FEATURES

Twenty-four 10/100/1000 switched RJ-45 ports deliver up to 2 Gbps of throughput per port.

Two shared 10/100/1000 mini Gigabit Interface Converter (mini-GBIC) ports.

Switching capacity delivers wire-speed performance at 48 Gbps non blocking capacity.

Web View monitoring allows administrators to view the current status and configuration using their favorite web browser.

PoE on twenty-four 10/100/1000 ports supplies up to7.5W per port, or on twelve 10/100/1000 ports supplies up to the IEEE 802.3af maximum of 15.4W per port.

Automatic medium dependent interface (MDI) and MDI crossover (MDI-X) cable detection.

Port-based and 802.1Q-based VLANs support up to 256 VLANs-4096 range.

Port trunking for up to 8 groups allows you to increase your bandwidth for each uplink or server connection.

Port configuration settings for link, speed, auto MDI/MDIX, flow control, and more.

Fully rack mountable using the included rack-mounting hardware.

238

MAC address table supports up to 8000 MAC address entries.

Optimal platform to support real-time applications such as voice and video by providing features like Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping; multiple queues (4) with appropriate scheduling techniques; prioritization of traffic based on port, 802.1p, IP ToS/precedence/DSCP, TCP/User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port, and line rate forwarding mechanisms.

Enhanced QoS functions including rate limiting for ingress/egress and per flow at 64 kbps granularity.

Secure control via SSH for Telnet interface and SSL for HTTP interface.

User/network security via 802.1X (with RADIUS authentication).

Advanced security ACL can be a restricted-access network by denying or rate-limiting based on L1–L4 information- for example, MAC address, Ethernet type, VLAN ID, IP address, protocol ID, or TCP/UDP port.

Containment of storms - broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast.

Expandability and availability increased across multiple switches using link aggregation.

Port trunking for up to eight groups with up to eight ports per group allows you to increase your bandwidth for each uplink or server connection.

SNMP and RMON management expand your visibility options.

11.11 CLIENT PC FOR NVR IP 3000

11.11.1 (NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER)

Client PC for 32 Ch with NVR IP 3000, should have the following

configuration:

Motherboard: Intel 945GC or above, CPU: Intel Dual Core 2.6 GHz

or above RAM: 2G or above, Graphic card: ATI is suggested, with

512 MB memory or above. HDD: It is suggest touse RAID since all

32 channels are NVR IP 3000 with D1 recording. If CIF recording,

normal SATA HDD shall be used. Windows XP is preferred, if Win

7 is to be installed, then log in the system with "Administrator",

that would make sure the operation from the software will not be

refused.

239

15.11 SAMSUNG 60" SMART FLAT FULL HD LED TV

SERIES 6 (60J6200)

High-definition LED television from Samsung F6400

of series 6.

Eco-sensor makes it possible to conserve energy

while viewing television.

More clear view with 40" / 60" large screen and 1920 x 1080 Resolution.

3D Dolby Digital plus and DTS studio sound for sound that will transform your

living room into entertainment zone.

Crisp and superior video experience with the 200Hz Clear Motion Rate technology

and Micro Dimming ultimate feature.

Smart technology increases functionality and convenience through Voice, and

Motion Interactivity.

Samsung App's and with amazing feature of Smart Hub which brings the variety of

contents from around you.

With built-in Wireless LAN which allows you to connect with your smart devices

without wires

15.11.1 OVERVIEW

Samsung is a unique in its category. It is a perfect mixture of design and

features. Its 40/60 inches large screen and ultra-unique design make it

perfect for any kind of decor. Samsung 40"/60" is equipped with latest

and most abrupt technologies for its users. With Dolby Digital Plus,

Wide colour enhancer plus, Connect share, built-in Wi-FI and many

more it is a perfect entertainment box for its user. All the new and the

latest features included in the best in cutting- edge television technology.

15.12.2 HARDWARE

Samsung 40"/60" comes in a very new sleek slim design. It is made up

by combining to different designs which make it look aesthetically

appealing. It's 40"/60" screen with finest collection of features for

improved video quality ensures that you will love watching your favorite

T.V. It is light and portable. It comes with its own stand. The height of

240

the T.V. measures 70.6cm. The screen gives exceptionally strong

resolution of 1920 x 1080 taking the view and the video quality to a new

level. A light effect feature also helps to enhance the beauty of Samsung.

SPECIFICATION

Product LED

Display 40 / 60 Inches

Resolution 1920 x 1080

Picture Engine 3D Hyper Real Engine

Video 200HZClear Motion Rate

Audio Dolby Digital Plus

Wide Colour Enhancer Yes

Digital Noise Filter Yes

Auto Volume Leveler Yes

Game Mode Yes

Social TV Yes

Smart Hub Yes

Web Browser Yes

History Yes

Family Story Yes

HDMI 4

USB 3

Advanced Sports Mode Yes

WiFi Direct Yes

voice interaction No

All share Yes

Eco Sensor Yes

3D Glasses 2

Power AC220 - 240V 50 / 60Hz

weight 5.7KG / 6.8KG

Package 8.9KG / 10 KG

241

15.13 DS-2DE7330IW-AE

The Hikvision DS-2DE7330IW-AE Value Series Network Speed Dome Cameras

are designed for demanding applications and feature IP66 and IK10 ratings. DS-

2DE7330IW-AE cameras also feature a wide range of Smart functions, including

intrusion detection, line crossing detection, and audio exception, benefitting users

with great improvements on security efficiency and, more importantly, with key events

and objects being recorded for further forensic needs. Also featured is Smart Tracking,

which enables a camera to detect any progressively moving object and follow it within

the camera‟s area of coverage. Defog is also supported to improve image quality in

challenging conditions.

1/2.8" Progressive Scan CMOS Up to 2048 x 1536 Resolution 30× Optical

Zoom, 16× Digital Zoom IR Distance up to 492 ft (150 m) Digital WDR 3D Intelligent

Positioning Function Support for H.265+ / H.265 Video Compression IP66, IK10 24

VAC / Hi-PoE (injector supplied), 40 W

242

15.13.1 Camera Module

Image Sensor:

| 1/2.8" Progressive Scan CMOS

Min. Illumination:

| Color: 0.05 lux @(F1.5, AGC ON); B/W: 0.01 lux @(F1.5, AGC ON); 0 lux with IR

Focal Length:

| 4.3 mm to 129 mm, 30× Optical

Digital Zoom:

| 16×

Zoom Speed:

| Approximately 3 s (optical lens, wide-tele)

Angle of View:

| 57.4° to 2.8° (wide-tele)

Min. Working Distance:

| 10 mm to 1500 mm (wide-tele)

Aperture Range:

| F1.6 to F5.0

Focus Mode:

| Auto / semi-automatic / manual

Shutter Time:

| 1/1 s to 1/10,000 s

AGC: | Auto / manual

White

Balance: | Auto / manual / ATW (auto tracking white balance) / indoor / outdoor / fl

uorescent lamp / sodium lamp

Day & Night:

| IR cut filter

Privacy Mask:

| 8 programmable privacy masks

3D DNR: | Yes

243

BLC: | Yes

HLC: | Yes

Digital WDR:

| 92 dB

Defog: | Yes

PTZ

Range: | Pan: 360° endless, Tilt:from -15° to 90°

Speed: | Pan: configurable, from 0.1°/s to 160°/s, Preset Speed: 240°/s, Tilt: configurable, from 0.1°/s to 120°/s, Preset Speed: 200°/s

Number of Preset:

| 300

Patrol: | 8 patrols, up to 32 presets for each patrol

Pattern: | 4 pattern scans, record time over 10 minutes for each scan

Park Action:

| Preset/Pattern Scan/Patrol Scan/Auto Scan/Tilt Scan/Random Scan/Frame Scan/Panorama Scan

Scheduled Task:

| Auto Scan / Frame Scan / Random Scan / Patrol / Pattern / Preset / Panorama Scan / Tilt Scan / Dome Reboot / Dome Adjust / Aux Output

Smart Features

Smart Detection:

| Intrusion Detection, Line Crossing Detection

ROI encoding:

| Main stream, sub-stream and third stream respectively support two fixed areas.

Alarm

Alarm I/O: | 2-ch input, 1-ch output

Alarm Linkage:

| Alarm actions, such as preset, patrol scan, pattern scan, memory card video record, trigger recording, notify surveillance center, upload to FTP / memory card / NAS, send email, etc.

244

Input/Output

Audio Input:

| 1-ch

Audio Output:

| 1-ch

Network

Audio Compression:

| G.711 alaw / G.711 ulaw / G.722 / G.726 / MP2L2 / PCM

Protocols: | IPv4/IPv6, HTTP, HTTPS, 802.1x, Qos, FTP, SMTP, UPnP, SNMP, DNS, DDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTCP, RTP, TCP/IP, DHCP, PPPoE, Bonjour

Simultaneous Live View:

| Up to 20 channels

User/Host Level:

| Up to 32 users; 3 levels: Administrator, Operator and User

Security Measures:

| User authentication (ID and PW), Host authentication (MAC address); HTTPS encryption; IEEE 802.1x port-based network access control; IP address filtering

Maximum Resolution:

| 2048 x 1536

Main Stream:

| 50 Hz: 25 fps (2048 × 1536, 1920 × 1080, 1280 × 960, 1280 × 720); 50 fps (1280 × 960, 1280 × 720); 60 Hz: 30 fps (2048 × 1536, 1920 × 1080, 1280 × 960, 1280 × 720); 60 fps (1280 × 960, 1280 × 720)

Sub Stream:

| 50 Hz: 25 fps (704 × 576, 640 × 480, 352 × 288); 60 Hz: 30 fps (704 × 480, 640 × 480, 352 × 240)

Third Stream:

| 50 Hz: 25 fps (1920 × 1080, 1280 × 960, 1280 × 720, 704 × 576, 640 × 480, 352 × 288); 60 Hz: 30 fps (1920 × 1080, 1280 × 960, 1280 × 720, 704 × 480, 640 × 480, 352 × 240)

Video Compression:

| Main Stream: H.265+ / H.265 / H.264+ / H.264; Sub-Stream: H.265 / H.264 / MJPEG; Third Stream: H.265 / H.264 / MJPEG; H.264 with Baseline / Main / High Profile

245

System Integration

Network Interface:

| 1 RJ45 10 M/100 M Ethernet Interface

Memory Card:

| Built-in memory card slot, support microSD / SDHC / SDXC, up to 128 GB, NAS (NPS, SMB/ CIPS), ANR

API: | Open-ended, supports ONVIF, PSIA and CGI, supports HIKVISION SDK and third-party management platforms

Web Browser:

| IE 7+, Chrome 18+, Firefox 5.0+, Safari 5.02+

Client: | iVMS-4200, iVMS-4500, iVMS-5200

General

Protection Level:

| IP66 Standard, TVS 4000 V Lightning Protection, Surge Protection and Voltage Transient Protection

Working Environment:

| -22° F to 149° F (-30° C to 65° C), humidity: ≤ 90%

Power: | 24 VAC and Hi-PoE, maximum: 40 W

Dimensions:

| Ø 8.66" × 13.91" (Ø 220 mm × 353.4 mm)

Weight: | Approximately 9.92 lbs. (4.5 kg)

246

15.14 DS-2CD2052-I

15.14.1 Key Features

Up to 5 megapixel (2560 × 1920) resolution Standard

video compression with high compression ratio, ROI (region of interest)

encoding Progressive scan CMOS, capture motion video without incised

margin Support dual stream, and the sub-stream for mobile surveillance

High-performance and long service life Infrared LED, Approx. 20 to 30

meters IR range IR cut filter with auto switch PoE (Power over Ethernet)

Ingress Protection level: IP66 Electronic shutter for different surveillance

environments Other functions: alarm, reset button, mirror, etc 3-axis

adjustment Support VCA, which is compatible with NVR for the second

time of video searching and analysing

15.14.2 Specification

Image Sensor 1/3" Progressive Scan CMOS

Min. Illumination 0.01Lux @ (F1.2, AGC ON) ,0 Lux with IR

Shutter Speed 1/3 s to 1/10,000 s Lens 4mm@ F2.0 (6mm optional)

Lens Mount M12 Day &Night IR cut filter with auto switch Digital Noise 3D

DNR

Wide Dynamic

Range DWDR

Compression Standard

Video Compression H.264/ MJPEG

Video Bit Rate 256 Kbps – 16 Mbps

Dual Stream Yes

Image

Max. Resolution 2560 × 1920

Frame Rate 50Hz: 20fps (2560 × 1920), 25fps (2048 × 1536), 25fps (1920 ×

1080), 25fps (1280 × 720) 60Hz: 20fps (2560 × 1920), 30fps (2048

× 1536), 30fps (1920 × 1080), 30fps (1280 × 720)

247

Image Settings Rotate mode, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast adjustable by client

software or web browser

Backlight

compensation Yes, zone optional

ROI Support

Network

Network Storage NAS (Support NFS,SMB/CIFS)

Alarm Trigger Intrusion Detection, Line Crossing detection, Motion detection,

Dynamic analysis, Tampering alarm, Network disconnect , IP

address conflict, Storage exception

Protocols TCP/IP,ICMP,HTTP,HTTPS,FTP,DHCP,DNS,DDNS,RTP,RTSP,

RTCP,

PPPoE,NTP,UPnP,SMTP,SNMP,IGMP,802.1X,QoS,IPv6,Bonjour

Security One-key reset, Flash-prevention, dual stream, heartbeat, mirror,

password protection, privacy mask, watermark, IP address

filtering, Anonymous access

Standard ONVIF, PSIA, CGI, ISAPI Interface

Communication

Interface 1 RJ45 10M/100M Ethernet interface

Reset Button Yes

General

Operating

Conditions -30 °C – 60 °C (-22 °F – 140 °F)

Humidity 95% or less (non-condensing)

Power Supply 12 V DC ± 10% PoE (802.3af)

Power Consumption Max. 5 W

248

15.15 DS-2CD2152F-I(W)(S)

15.15.1 Key Features

Up to 5 megapixel 2560 × 1920 @ 20fps resolution. Standard video

compression with high compression ratio, ROI (region of interest)

encoding Progressive scan CMOS, capture motion video without incised

margin Support dual stream, and the sub-stream for mobile surveillance

Built-in Micro SD / SDHC / SDXC card slot, up to 128GB

Two-way audio (-S)

Alarm & audio I/O (-S)

Support wifi (-W)

High-performance and long service life Infrared LED, Approx. 10 to 30

meters IR range

IR cut filter with auto switch

PoE (Power over Ethernet)

Ingress Protection level: IP66

Electronic shutter for different surveillance environments

Impact Protection: IEC60068-2-75 test, Eh, 50J; EN50102, up to IK10

Other functions: alarm, mirror, etc

3-axis adjustment

Support VCA, which is compatible with NVR for the second time of video

searching and analyzing.

DS-2CD2152F-I(W)(S)

5 Megapixel CMOS ICR Infrared Network Dome Camera

Image Sensor 1/3" Progressive Scan CMOS

Min. Illumination 0.01Lux @ (F1.2, AGC ON) ,0 Lux with

IR Shutter Speed 1/3 s to 1/10,000 s

Lens 2.8mm (4mm, 6mm option) @ F2.0

Lens Mount M12

Day &Night IR cut filter with auto switch

Digital Noise

Reduction 3D DNR

249

Wide Dynamic Range Digital WDR

Angle Adjustment Pan:0° - 355°, Tilt: 0° - 75°, Rotation: 0-355°

Compression Standard

Video Compression H.264/ MJPEG

H.264 Type Main Profile

Video Bit Rate 256 Kbps – 16 Mbps

Dual Stream Yes

Image

Max. Resolution 2560 × 1920

Frame Rate 50Hz: 20fps (2560 × 1920), 25fps (2048 ×

1536), 25fps (1920 × 1080), 25fps (1280 ×

720) 60Hz: 20fps (2560 × 1920), 30fps (2048 ×

1536),30fps (1920 × 1080), 30fps (1280 × 720)

Image Settings Rotate mode, Saturation, Brightness, Contrast

adjustable by client software or web browser

Backlight

compensation Yes, zone optional

ROI Support

Network

Network Storage NAS (Support NFS,SMB/CIFS)

Alarm Trigger Intrusion Detection, Line Crossing detection,

Motion detection, Dynamic analysis,

Tampering alarm, Network disconnect , IP

address conflict, Storage exception

Protocols TCP/IP, ICMP, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, DHCP,

DNS, DDNS, RTP, RTSP, RTCP, PPPoE, NTP,

UPnP, SMTP, SNMP, IGMP, 802.1X, QoS,

IPv6, Bonjour

Security One-key reset, Flash-prevention, dual stream,

heartbeat, mirror, password protection, privacy mask,

watermark, IP address filtering, Anonymous access

Standard ONVIF, PSIA, CGI, ISAPI

Interface

Communication Interface 1 RJ45 10M/100M Ethernet interface

250

KEYBOARD 1005KI.

251

SECTION – 16

MEDICAL GAS & PIPE LINE SYSTEM

16.1 Clinical Purpose For supplying piped oxygen, nitrous oxide, vacuum and

medical air to facility.

16.1.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:

The given below is the designed turnkey solution of complete hospital, procuring agency need to define the items required and quantities of

each items as per the bed strength of hospital. In case of requirement of any of the given below equipment, with in the running/equipped

hospital, procuring agency may select the required items and define the quantities as per its actual requirement.

16.1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS/ CONFIGURATION

The Medical gas Pipe line should strictly comply with the international standards and configuration for requirements of HTM

2022 or latest, however, ISO 7396-1 or latest can also be used. It would be the choice of the bidder for adherence to any standard

which would be mentioned in the bid. The objectives are to ensure the following:

a) Non-Interchangeability Between Different Pipeline Systems By

Design; b) Continuous Supply Of Gases And Vacuum At Specified

Pressures By Providing Appropriate Sources; c) Required Flow Rates In Particular Areas/ Outlets;

d) Use Of Suitable Materials; e) Cleanliness Of Components;

f) Correct Installation; g) Provision Of Monitoring And Alarm Systems;

h) Correct Marking Of The Pipeline System; i) Following Of Testing And Commissioning Protocols;

j) Maintaining The Purity Of The Gases Delivered By The Pipeline System;

k) Correct Operational Management.

16.1.3 The firms will follow the specifications mentioned below and if found contradiction between specifications and design standard then the

design standard would prevail (only if the quantities mentioned are less; otherwise adjustment will be made).

252

AUTOMATIC MANIFOLD FOR OXYGEN. The Manifold shall be a fully automatic type & shall switch from

“Bank in Use” to “Reserve” bank without fluctuation in delivery supply line pressure & without the need for external power after the

switch over the “Reserve” bank shall then become the “Bank in Use” and the banking use shall become the reserve bank. The system

should be able to maintain continuous supply in case of power failure.

CAPACITY: (2 x 20) with capacity of 140-160 m3/h.

FUNCTION: o Fully automatic self-contained shuttle-valve with no electrical

power required for switching. o Microprocessor controlled display unit for monitoring of different

parameters and loggings

o Units of pressure measurement (psi/Pa/bar). O LCD /LED display for the left bank, the right bank& for the

supply pressure. Complete with relief valve, Emergency shut off valve and battery / bank room alarm for left and right cylinder bank.

O VIE Connection with shut off valve, controlled by the manifold cabinet.

O The primary source of Oxygen will be the VIE System. o The complete automatic manifold unit with shifting from VIE

System to Main Bank and then to Reserve Bank automatically with display of

pressures for each source. O Equipped with NIST Connection.

1 System

AUTOMATIC-MANIFOLD FOR NITROUS OXIDE The Manifold shall be a fully automatic type & shall switch from

"Bank in Use" to "Reserve"bank without fluctuation in delivery supply line pressure &without the need for external powerafter the

switch-over the "Reserve" bank shall then become the “Bank in Use" and the bank inuse shall become the reserve bank. The System -

should be able to maintain continuous supplyin case of Power failure.

CAPACITY: (2 x 10) with capacity of 140-160 m3/h.

FUNCTION:

o Fully automatic self-contained shuttle-valve with no electrical power required for switching.

o Microprocessor controlled display unit for monitoring of different parameters and loggings.

o Units of pressure measurements (psi/Pa/bar)

1 System

253

o LCD / LED display for the left bank, the right bank for the supply

pressure. Completewith relief valve, Emergency shut off valve and battery /

bank room alarm for left and right cylinder bank. o Equipped with NIST Connection

GAS OUTLETS (BS/DIN SYSTEM)

Gas outlets, complete in Box/casing gas Specific, Self-sealing valve, indexed to eliminateinterchangeability /erroneous tapping of gas,

Filter and cover plate as per Standard Designrequirements of the bidder with following color coding;

Oxygen White (……… Nos.) Nitrous Oxide Blue (….. Nos.)

Compressed Air 4 bar Black/ B&W Stripes (…. Nos.) Vacuum. Yellow (…. Nos.)

Surgical Air @ 07 bar B&W Stripes (…. Nos.)

BED HEADS UNIT FOR ICU • Each unit consists of: 1500 mm and above

• Horizontal type • Built in over bed Light with ON/OFF switch.

• Built in reading Light with ON/OFF switch. • Gas outlets (1x Vacuum, 2x Air, 2x Oxygen complete fitted).

• Electrical provisions: Electrical sockets: 6 Nos. & 2Nos. Multi Pin Plug and above schuko/ F-type All wiring conforms to standards,

ground/earth • Separate ducts for Electrical &Gas Pipes.

…… Nos.

BED HEAD UNIT FOR WARDS& PRIVATE ROOM

• Each unit consists of: 1000 mm and above • Horizontal type

• Built in over bed Light with ON/OFF switch. • Built in reading Light, with ON/OFF switch.

• Gas outlets (1x Vacuum, 1x Air, 2x Oxygen complete fitted). Electrical provisions: Electrical sockets: 4 Nos. & 2Nos. Multi Pin

Plug and above schuko/ F-type All wiring conforms to standards, ground/earth

Separate ducts for Electrical & Gas Pipes.

…. Nos.

MULTIPLE ZONE VALVE BOX with ALARM

Multiple zone valve box for two/three/four/five/six gases. (Procuring agency to specify in accordance with the requirement) Each wall type zone valve box shall consist of the following

Components. A steel valve box which can house two to six shutoff ball valves. Pressure gauges to display the pressure of various

gases. For Two Gases (…… Nos.)

254

For Three Gases (…… Nos.)

For Five Gases (…… Nos.)

ALARM WITH REMOTE SENSORS Alarm with remote sensors for two/three/four/five/six gases.

(Procuring agency to specify in accordance with the requirement) Individual display and sensor module. Self-diagnostic & error

message display readable for ease of maintenance psi, kPa or bar readout. Test & Mute Button, low alarm condition.

CEILING PENDANTS FOR THEATRES:

CEILING PENDANTS FOR ANESTHETIST

Ceiling pendants with 300 Degree rotating arms (1000 mm + 800 mm) with pneumatic brakes.

Height 750 mm Payload of minimum 150kg

Hooks/ Clamps to lift the anesthesia machine (with telescopic LINEAR ACTUATOR “inside the profile” VERTICAL MOVEMENT =

500mm) Two shelves for monitor and/ or other equipment/ accessories

Outlets with arm for 2xO2, 2xAir (4 &7 bar), 1xVacuum, 2xN2O& 1xAGSS with color coded hoses & terminal unit, user-definable hose

length integral fist fix check valves. 6xElectrical Sockets; schuko/ F-type, Switches and facility for low voltage outlet for data

transmission/telephone/NC system.

….. Nos.

CEILING PENDANTS FOR SURGEON Ceiling pendants with 300 Degree rotating arms (1000 mm + 800

mm) with pneumatic brakes. Height 750 mm

Payload of minimum 80kg Two shelves for other equipment/ accessories

Outlets with arm for 2xAir (7 bar) with color coded hoses & terminal unit, user-definable hose length integral fist fix check valves.

6xElectrical Sockets; schuko/F type, Switches.

….. Nos.

OXYGEN FLOW METER Oxygen flow meter with humidifier and probes Oxygen Flow meter

complete set from 1 to 15 lpm With autoclave able and unbreakable humidifier bottle

….. Nos.

VACUUM REGULATOR WITH GAUGE / DIGITAL

The Vacuum Controller should be connected to Wall Source of Vacuum using directprobe or rail mounting System. Vacuum Levels

0 to 750 mm Hg complete with 1 Litersuction Bottles, Unbreakable/ Autocleavable. Complete with overflow safety system.

….. Nos.

255

COPPER PIPING Supply and installation of seamless medical graded copper pipe,

deoxidized and degreasedalong with required fitting etc., various sizes /diameter as per Drawing of the project and Design standard

of the bidder with matching color indications of out lets. The sizes will varyfrom minimum of 10mm to onward as per design offered by

the firm; Oxygen White

Air Black/ B&W Stripes Nitrous Blue

Vacuum Yellow Carbon Dioxide Grey stripes mixtures from operating theatres.

…….. Meters Copper Pipe 35 mm. ……. Meters Copper Pipe 28 mm.

……. Meters Copper Pipe 22 mm. ………. Meters Copper Pipe 15 mm.

……. Meters Copper Pipe 12 mm.

ANESTHESIA SCAVENGING OUTLET Passive/ Active Anesthetic Gas Scavenging OUTLET designed to

remove exhaled anesthetic gas

….. Nos.

TRIPLEX MEDICAL VACUUM SYSTEM (procuring agency to define the requirement out of duplex or triplex

medical vacuum system) The capacity of Vertical Vacuum System is 2,500 L/min per

vacuumpump Vacuum level @ 700-725 mm Hg. Vibration Isolation, Pads, Hour

meters, Circuit barkers, Vacuum pump run lights. Tank mounted system. Complete with filters.

Vertical Tank Capacity 1,000 Liter. Or as per actual requirement.

1 System.

MEDICAL COMPRESSED AIR STATION

(procuring agency to define the requirement out of duplex or triplex medical air compressorsystem)

Medical Air Plant with Breathable Air. Elimination of Toxic Gases such as carbon dioxide,Nitrogen dioxide, Nitrogen monoxide,

Carbon monoxide; and other pollutants as per EuropeanPharmacopeia standard; followed.

COMPRESSOR O Duplex Compressor unit. O Reciprocating/ Screw/ Scroll type. (IO to specify)

o Capacity of air producing approximately minimum of each compressor: - 1000

liters/min/FAD at 15 bar. O Mounted on anti-vibration base.

1 System.

256

RESERVOIR

O Compatible medical grade. O Air receiving tank 1,000 L. or as per actual requirement.

O Vertical type. O Galvanized internally with auto drain.

O Minimum 13 bars out put pressure of tank. AIR DRYER

O Desiccant type, Duplex. o Dew Point range between -40 to -80oC

o Dew point monitoring on LCD Panel o Capacity suitable according to the compressor output.

O Including oil water separator. FILTRATION SYSTEM

o Clean Medical Grade Air supply in accordance with the requirements of HTM/ISO

standards. O Consisting of Pre-filter / humidity, Oil free and sterile/bacteria

filter. O Mounted with shut-off valves on an assembly panel.

O Parallel Connections of the filters. This will make it possible to exchange filter without interrupting the air supply. O Flow / filtering rate according to the compressed air output.

REDUCER PANEL COMPRESSED AIR o Parallel switched reducer with gauge, safety valve, pressure switch

for high and low Pressure and shut off valve with assembly panel size 4+ 7 bar.

o Complete with distribution block according to requirement, Incl. Shut off valve and pressure gauge for every distribution block,

complete assemble panel with incoming and outgoing copper pipe for complete system QTY as per design.

CONTROL o Complete with 1x main warning system for compressed air for

visual and acoustic monitoring of alarms conditions for the compressor room.

O Test point in the system for air quality. O 1x switch cabinet for automatic Unit incl. All necessary fitting and

installation material for smooth running of the system without any interruption.

POWER: Power Supply- 3 Phase, 380 – 400V/50 Hz.

SPECIAL TERMS & CONDITIONS:

1. The Major equipment like manifold, pendants, bed head units and outlets should be manufactured and supplied by the same

Principal. 2. The Vacuum System and medical air compressor may be of

different manufacturer but should be supplied by the same

257

manufacturer of medical gas system.

3. All equipment must be according to international safety standard. 4. The color of outlets, piping and cylinder for recognition will be BS

/ DIN type for all the system equipment. 5. The drop outlet/ Connection will be flushed surface. Separate

ducts for piping and electrification.

258

259

SECTION – 17

HVAC SYSTEM

17.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF HVAC SYSTEM

SCOPE

The work covered by this section of the specifications consists in furnishing all

Plants, Labour, equipment, appliances and materials, and in performing all operations

in connection with the installation of the air-conditioning and ventilating systems

complete, in strict accordance with the applicable drawing, and specified herein,

except for equipment furnished by the Employer. The General provisions of the

contract and the special conditions of the specifications, apply in full to the work to be

done under this section of the specifications.

APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS

The following specifications, codes, rules and standards or British equivalents shall

form a part of this specification:

a) American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Unfired Pressure Vessel Code

b) American Society of Refrigerating Engineers Standards

0.15- Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (1950).

c) National Board of Fire Underwriters Pamphlet

No. 90 – Air Conditioning, Warm Air Heating, Air Cooling and Ventilating

System (1950)

d) Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.

Standards, Definitions, terms and Test Codes for Centrifugal, Axial and

Propeller Fans

e) British Standards Codes of Practice CP-353-2 (1598)

Mechanical Ventilation and Air-Conditioning in Buildings (for duct

construction)

f) British Standard Code of Practice 1470: 1955

Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys, sheet and strip

260

DESIGN PARAMETERS

DESIGN CONDITIONS ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

SUMMER

OUTDOOR 115 ± 2 F DB & 83 F WB 400 V ± 10%

Room Conditions 72 ± 2 F DB & 50 ± 5%

RH 3 Phase, 50 Cycles

WINTER

OUTDOOR 40 ± 2 F DB 220 V ± 10%

Room Conditions 68 ± 2 F DB & 45 ± 5%

RH 1 Phase, 50 Cycles

TS-01 MULTI COMPRESSOR WITH MULTI CIRCUITS

AIR – COOLED SCREW/SCROLL CHILLER

TS-01A AIR – COOLED SCREW CHILLER

i. GENERAL

The air cooled type liquid screw chiller shall be completely factory assembled

including screw compressor(s) with integral oil saperator, motor, cooler, condenser,

control box and all interconnecting unit piping and wiring.

Each machine shall be shipped completely charged with refrigerant HFC-134a

and with lubricating oil.

ii. High Performance Screw Compressor

The compressor shall be serviceable semi hermatic twin rotor and shall have an

automatically reversible oil pump. The compressor shall have low vibration and low

noise. The compressor motor shall be cooled by suction gas.

The capacity shall be controlled through slide valve down to 25% of the full load

for single compressor and 12.5% for multi compressor.

The compressor motor shall be Wye-delta unloaded startup.

The compressor shall be provided with an integrated high efficiency oil

separator and built- in oil filter. The compressor shall be provided with two thermal

protection devices high temperature protection temperature sensor to protect motor

261

temperature sensor to protect unit and lubrication oil from high discharge gas

temperature.

iii. Evaporator

The evaporator shall be flooded type shell and tube with removable heads. The

tube line takes chilled water, shell line takes refrigerant The construction shall

conform to ASME CODSES sectons VIII Division-1 for unfired pressure vesel.

The design pressure on refrigerant side shall be 300 Psig and water side

200 PSIG.

The evaporator shall be insulated with 2” thick polyurethane foam insultaion.

iv. Condenser

The air cooled condenser shall have high efficient axial fans, anti-corosion, vane

shape designed for even air flow and air pressure of the air cooled unit and should be

tested for static and dynamic balance, efficiency, vibration and sound level.

Each fan shall be protected by a fan guard. The air discharge shall be vertical and

each fan must be coupled with an electric motor capable to work at ambient

temperatures from -4°F(-20°C) to 149°F(65°C).The fan motor shall have individual over

load protection through relay switch. The motor shall meet the standard of IP-54

The condenser shall have aluminium fins mechanically bonded to seamless

copper tubing and coil shall be treated with anti-corrosive treatment. The condenser

coil shall be tested for 450 PSIG pressure.

v. Refrigerant Circuit

The heat pump refrigerant circuit shall include but not limited to, a hot gas

muffler, combination moisture indicator and sight glass, refrigerant filter drier, liquid

line solenoid valve, Thermal expansion valve, high and low pressure switch and relief

valve on discharge line, 4 way reversing valve and liquid suction heat exchanger.

vi. Controls

The chiller shall have micro process based controls having capacity control

shall either be modular or multi-step, fully automatic with manual option, and shall

be of fail safe type. Machine shall be shut down on low oil pressure, chilled water low

temperature, refrigerant low pressure, condenser high pressure, compressor discharge

high pressure and motor high temperature. Control shall ensure thorough lubrication

of compressor prior to start and during coast down after machine stops. Motor shall

262

be protected against drawing more than rated full load amperes. Control shall prevent

machine re-start until after a safe preset time.

All controls shall be in weather proof enclosure, and shall include, but not

limited to power controls for starters, low voltage control power transformers, terminal

strips relays. High pressure and low pressure controls, low temperature controls,

motor protection, oil pressure control and chilled water temperature controllers.

vii. Accessories

Following accessories shall be included:-

Suction and discharge gauges, oil pressure guage.

viii. Safety Features

Following safety features shall be included:-

high and low pressure switches, phase asymmetry and under voltage relays,

compressor starting relay, internal thermal controls of compressors and fans,

compressor crank case electric heater and oil pressure switch.

TS-01B AIR COOLED SCROLL CHILLER

General:

Unit shall be assembled on heavy gauge steel mounting/lifting rails and shall be

weather proofed. Unit Shall include a hermetic scroll compressor plate fin condenser

coil, fans and motors, controls, and holding charge of nitrogen. Operating Range shall

be between 115o F and 35o F in cooling as standard from factory. Unit shall be UL

1995 listed and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210/240 or 340/360.

Casing:

Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior

surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, finished with a weather-resistant baked

enamel finish. Unit‟s surface shall be tested 500 hours in salt spray test. Unit shall

have removable end panels which allow access to all major components and controls.

Refrigeration System – Single Compressor:

Unit shall have a single refrigeration circuit. The refrigeration circuit shall havean

integral sub cooling circuit. A refrigeration filter drier, expansion valve, and check

valves shall be provided as standard. The unit shall have both a liquid line and

suction gas line service valve with gauge port.

Unit shall have one direct drive, hermetic scroll compressor with centrifugal oil pump

providing positive lubrication to moving parts. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and

263

shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of nameplate voltage.

Crankcase heater, discharge line thermostat, internal temperature, and current-

sensitive motor overloads shall be included for maximum protection. Scroll type

compressor shall provide in herenatly low vibration and noise by having no suction

and discharge valves. External high and low pressure cutout devices shall be provided,

by temporarily interrupting compressor operation low evaporator coil temperature are

encountered.

Refrigeration System – Dual Compressor:

Units shall have two separate and independent refrigeration circuits. Each

refrigeration circuit shall have an integral subcooling circuit. A refrigeration filter direr

shall be provided as standard. Unit shall have both a liquid line and suction gas line

service valve with gauge ports. \

Unit shall have two direct drive, hermetic scroll compressors with centrifugal oil pump

and provide positive lubrication to all moving parts. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled

and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of nameplate

voltage. Crankcase heater, temperature, and current-sensitive motor overloads shall

be included for maximum protection. Scroll type compressor shall provide inherently

low vibration and noise by having no suction and discharge valves. External high and

low pressure cutout devices shall be provided.

Condenser Coil:

Coils shall be internally finned or smooth bore, 3/8” (10mm) copper tubes

mechanically bonded to a configured aluminum plate fin as standard. Coil shall be

factory pressure and leak tested to 420 PSIG air pressure. Metal grilles with PVC

coating for coil protection is optional.

Condenser Fan And Motor(s) :

Direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced. Propeller fan(s) with aluminum

blades and electro-coated steel hubs shall be used in draw-through vertical discharge

position. Either permanently lubricated totally endclosed or open construction type

motors shall be provided and shall have built-in current and thermal overload

protection. Motor(s) shall have either ball or sleeve bearing type.

Low Ambient Operation:

Standard units shall start and operate to approximately 35o F (1.7o C) (-17.8oC).

264

ACCESSORIES:

Low Ambient Head Pressure Control:

The accessory shall modulate the RPM of unit outdoor fan motor in response to

outdoor ambient temperatures and liquid line temperature. Accessory provides unit

cooling operation to outdoor temperature.

Vibration Isolation Packages:

The accessory shall reduce transmission of noise and vibration to building structures,

equipment, and adjacent spaces. Packages should be available in either neoprene-

inshear or spring-flex types.

Time Delay Relay:

This accessory shall prevent compressors in dual compressor unit from coming on line

simultaneously. Timer shall be 24-volt, 50 cycle, with four minute timing period.

Anti-Short-Cycle Timer:

This accessory shall prevent rapid on-off compressor cycling in light load conditions by

not allowing compressor to operate for 5-7 minutes upon shutdown. The accessory

shall consist of a 24-volt, 50 cycle, solid state timing device with either 5 or 7 minute

fixed-off timing period.

TS-02 VRF EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL

The contractor shall supply and install All DC inverter VRF system (outdoor & indoor

units) of the capacity and rating as shown on the Equipment Schedule and Bill of

Quantities.

The units will have guarantee/warranty period of 1 year (12 months) from the

date of commissioning the units, and should any defects arise during this period

which can be attributed to poor workmanship, improper materials, or defective

manufacture of the air conditioning units, for which the client shall be the sole judge,

the contractor shall be required to replace or repair all defective parts, except

compressors (burnt or otherwise) which shall be replaced with new compressors, all

repairs and replacement shall be as desired by the client.

265

All equipment shall be of such overall dimensions, operating weights, service area

requirements and configuration that it can be located where shown on the plans

without any adverse effect on its performance and clearance requirements.

Provision for clearance and service spaces shall be made around all mechanical

equipment as recommended by equipment manufacturers.

All equipment supplied under this section shall be brand new factory

manufactured and factory assembled and complete in all respects. The type,

characteristics, capacity ratings, component sections of all equipment shall be as

specified /scheduled. All equipment shall be tested at factory for performance

before shipment.

All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall include vibration isolation

mounting pads, anchor bolts, frames or any other mounting or supporting

accessories.

All equipment shall be complete with all accessories necessary to serve the

intended purpose, whether specified or not.

MULTI SPLIT VRF AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS (R410A)

OVERVIEW

ALL DC INVERTER VRF SYSTEM

All equipment shall be brand new products from certified and approved

manufacturers.

All DC Inverter VRF system shall comprise outdoor unit (air-cooled), indoor DX

evaporator device, liquid, suction and pressure relief pipes, condensate pipe, branch-

joints, and a built-in control system.

All Indoor/outdoor units and other key parts shall be manufactured and assembled by

the same manufacturer.

266

The refrigerant for the all DC Inverter VRF system shall only be R-410a

The refrigerant for the all DC Inverter VRF system shall comply with local regulations

and ensure a high COP value for the A/C equipment.

The all DC Inverter VRF system shall satisfy the requirement for design indoor

temperature.

Nameplate shall be attached to each product at a notable position, indicating the

following, as a minimum:

a) Product name, model and specification

b) Name and trademark of manufacturer

c) Date of production, product No. or batch number

d) Output, power, noise and other main parameters etc.

FEATURES

The All DC Inverter VRF system shall have the following salient features:

Both compressors in each condenser module should only be DC inverter type

controlling the cooling and heating capacity automatically according to the load. The

cooling capacity of the outdoor units should adjust automatically, according to the

number of operating indoor unit(s).The maximum pipe length between indoor unit and

outdoor unit should not be greater than 165 m. The maximum height difference

between indoor unit and outdoor unit should not be greater than 90m.The maximum

distance between the first branch to the farthest indoor unit should not be greater

than 40m.The maximum height difference between indoor units should not be greater

than 15m.All DC Inverter VRF system should offer at least 5 basic modules, which

could be freely assembled in 2, 3 and 4 units modular combinations as per

requirement. All DC Inverter VRF system should offer 2HP increments of capacity

range, which should meet customer needs accurately and the maximum capacity

combination should be up to 80HP.

All DC Inverter VRF system should have a gas balance device among compressors,

which should balance the gas suction volume among different compressors.

All DC Inverter VRF system should have a built-in sub-cooling heat-exchanger, which

can create higher heat exchange efficiency and powerful heating capacity especially in

low ambient temperature. Outdoor heat-exchange should be adjusted by running load.

267

All DC Inverter VRF system should have dual EXV, which should achieve refrigerant

adjusting precision to insure precise control of refrigerant and raise system circulation

efficiency.

The combination of one main and one auxiliary four way valve should control the

outdoor heat exchanger and outdoor air flow independently and according to the load,

adjust the heat exchange volume of outdoor unit accurately and prevent wasting the

capacity in part load time. Main 4-way valve should be used as the traditional 4-way

valve, while the auxiliary 4-way valve should be used to adjust the heat-exchanger

area of outdoor unit when in cooling mode.

The structure of the all DC Inverter VRF system and the piping work should be simple,

so that the installation is easy. Each series of indoor units should have the same pipe

dimension, and all the pipes should be connected by flare nut.

All DC Inverter VRF system should have simple refrigerant piping system without any

complicated maintenance work.

The condenser fan motor should be all DC inverter and should have sensor less

control technology. The indoor fan motor should also be DC inverter type.

The system should have auto-energy saving mode with self-adjusting parameters

according to the operation status, thus to lower the cost of electricity. The system

should also have compulsory energy saving mode and limit power output.

The system should have Energy auto allocation technology so that when total load

demands more than 75% of a running unit‟s capacity, one more unit should

automatically start. When total load demands less than 40% of a running unit‟s

capacity, one unit should automatically turn off, so that each unit should share

40%~75% of total load.

The indoor unit and outdoor unit of the system should have DC inverter motors to

realize step less regulation.

The system should have the operating temperature range of -5°C to +50°C (Cooling)

and -20°C to +24°C (Heating).

The system should have working voltage range 320V~460V.

The system should have season setting option so that cooling or heating mode can be

deactivated during a certain season to avoid mode conflict in case of miss operation.

The outdoor unit should have the option to be linked with a fire alarm signal so

that unit can automatically turn off to avoid damage.

268

The outdoor unit should be able to receive a power signal of electricity shortage so

that only specific areas can be air conditioned during power shortages.

The system should have two grades oil separation control technology with up to

99.9% overall efficiency.

The operating priority sequence of the outdoor unit should be able to change

without restart after cumulative operation of 12 hours to maximize the service life

of the system.

The outdoor unit should be able to keep functioning in case any one of the

modules malfunction.

The system should have advanced oil balance technology.

The all DC inverter system should have automatic debugging function.

AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

The condensing unit shall be of the vertical discharge, air cooled type, suitable for

outdoor installation and sized to deliver the required capacity matched to relevant

indoor units at specified ambient temperature. The condensing unit shall be of same

manufacturer as that of Indoor A.C. Unit.

All units shall be air-cooled type incorporating heat exchanger coils manufactured

from copper tube including Aluminum Manganese anti rust alloy which should be

coated with Golden protection Layer (Components: Epoxy Resin & Modified Acrylic,

Silicon free), the anti-corrosive performance in salt-spray testing must be at-least

200% higher than normal blue/golden fins, factory treated to reduce the effect of

atmospheric corrosion. The color shall be manufacturer‟s standard. The air outlet

grilles shall have plastic coated guards.

All outdoor units are to be permanently marked with an identification number. The

removable access panels are also to be marked with the same number.

The outdoor units shall be Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) all DC Inverter compressor

based centralized combination of multiple outdoor units of capacities given in

schedules.

269

The capacity of the outdoor units will be automatically controlled and shall be

determined electronically by sensing operational temperatures, pressures, and

ambient temperature etc.

The access to the internal components for maintenance purposes shall be by

removable panels.

It shall be possible to connect up to 64 indoor units, capacity permitting, to one

modular outdoor unit.

INDOOR UNITS

Direct Expansion type Air conditioning units each carrying its own electronic

expansion valve, shall be decorative Cassette type unit. All necessary

components/parts shall be selected manufactured and assembled by the same

manufacturer as for outdoor condensing units.

The Indoor units shall include following items.

1) DX- Type evaporator coil

2) Filters

3) Supply air fan with step less DC inverter motor

4) Drain arrangement

The following type of indoor units may be used for this type of system.

CASSETTE TYPE INDOOR UNIT

The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanized steel plate.

The heat exchanger coils shall be manufactured from copper tubes and aluminum

fins. It shall have electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in

response to the load variation in the conditioned space. The expansion valve shall

270

be controlled by an integral computerized control system to maintain the desired

room temperature.

The condensate shall be drained from the unit using thermally insulated u- PVC

piping and run directly to the nearest drain piping mains.

Casing

The cassette body shell be made of galvanized steel with thermal insulation (closed cell

polyethylene at least 10mm thick and outside anti condensate lining. The unit shall

have built in fresh air intake of proper size. The unit shall have integrated float switch

centrifugal pump with minimum of 600 mm water head. The unit shall be provided

with synthetic washable filter having low pressure drop and should be easily

removable without any tool.

Condensate Collection Tray

The condensate collection tray shall be of high density polity foam shaped in order to

optimize the air diffusion. It should be fire retardant rating B2 to DIN 4102.

Cooling Coil

The cooling shall be of 1/2” copper tubes and aluminum fins bonded on to the tubes

for maximum heat transfer. The coils shall be tested at 450 PSG.

Adjustable Louvers

The intake air grills, frame and adjustable 4-way air distribution to achieve quick

space cooling. The adjustable louvers should allow a coanda effect when oriented 30°.

Compressor

The compressor shall be high efficiency with internal overload protection.

Condenser Fan

The condenser fans shall be axial flow type with direct drive motor as standard. The

fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced for quiet operation. The fan motor

shall be permanently lubricated having internal thermal protection as standard. All

271

condensing unit should be provided with factory assembled contactors, relays and

terminal blocks for ease of wiring during installation.

Controls

Following control feature should be provided as standard.

i. Wireless remote control

ii. Three operation modes (cool/heat/fan)

iii. Three fan speeds (Low, Medium, High,) and swing control.

iv. Sleep mode and on-off timer.

v. Auto restart function.

vi. 3 minute compressor delay protection.

vii. Room temperature setting.

The tenderer to supply the following information

(a) The unit construction details, overall dimensions and operating weight.

(b) Size of opening for supply air grille.

(c) Coil construction, number of rows, fins per inch, water pressure drop

through the coil, total and sensible cooling capacities and heating

capacity under specified operating conditions.

(d) Type and size of the air filter.

(e) Type and cfm rating of the fans at high and low speeds.

(f) Units noise level rating in NC at high and medium speeds.

(g) Type of fan motor, high speed rpm and total, electric consumption of

unit.

272

(e) Manufacturer‟s performance guarantee certificate and technical

bulletins.

FAN COIL UNIT

1. Fan coil standard basic units, ceiling suspended/mounted shall be installed in

locations as indicated on the drawings, of type and capacity under the

conditions of operation as specified in the schedule of equipment. All

components to be heavy duty type and suitable for continuous operation.

2. Each unit shall be of below-through design and complete with water

cooling/heating coil, sleeved coil and supports, main large sized insulated drain

pan, auxiliary drain pain of moulded fiber board, fan motor, one or two quiet

operating centrifugal directly connected to extend motor shafts and insulated

galvanized sheet steel casing. The coil and drain pan shall be readily reversible.

3. The standard basic units shall be without decorative cabinet but complete with

coil casing of galvanized steel or bounderized zinc chromates base corrosion

resistant primer and bake enamel paint finish. The basic unit shall also have

return air plenum enclosure around the motor and fans and provision for

mounting 1" thick return air filter. The plenum section shall not interfere with

unit water supply, return and drain piping.

4. Water coil shall be suitable for both chilled and hot water services, of plate fin

design with 5/8" OD heavy gauge seamless copper tubing, not less than three

rows deep with flare type connections and tested with at least 250 psig air

pressure. Each coil shall be equipped with manually operated air vent and

drain cocks so located as to permit venting and draining of the coil regardless of

coil position.

5. The unit main and auxiliary drain pans shall cover the coil, coil connections,

motorized and hand valves. The drain pan shall be pitched, of smooth surface

for positive condensate drainage and with flare type outlet connection.

273

6. Fan wheels to be centrifugal, forward curved, double width. Wheels and

housing to be of anticorrosion construction. The fan motor shall be permanent

split capacitor type with three built-in speeds, maximum speed not to exceed

1100 rpm and with suitable thermal overload protection. The motor bearings

shall be factory prelubricated, preferably life time lubricated, alternatively

requiring only yearly lubrication. The fan and motor assembly shall be readily

removable and provided with a quick disconnect coupling on the motor cord.

The unit motor and automatic controls shall operate from a single source of 230

volts (+ -) 10% 50 cycles, I-phase electric power supply.

7. Fan and motor assembly shall be carefully matched and balanced to provide

quiet operation. The unit shall be acoustically and thermally insulated,

guaranteed to operate quietly at noise level rating not exceed NC.35.

8. The unit shall have a collar for fixing supply air duct and grille. Ceiling

suspended units shall have suspension. Brackets and floor mounted units‟

bottom supports. In either case the unit shall not transmit vibrations to the

building structure.

9. All units shall have 1"thick viscous oil permanent cleanable type air filters of

aluminum media.

10. The unit coil and fan capacity and noise ratings shall be ARI certified.

11. Supply and return air grills for the units shall be specified elsewhere.

12. Automatic controls for the units shall be as specified elsewhere.

13. The horizontal units may be installed above false ceiling boxing as shown on

the drawings. In such a case, the contractor shall supply and install a

combination return air grill cum air filter housing-access door as shown in the

drawings.

274

14. The vertical units may be concealed in sheet metal or wooden enclosures as

shown in the drawings and specified elsewhere. The air filter shall be installed

within the unit and return air grill would be a part of the enclosure and access

doors.

15. The tenderer to supply the following information:

(h) The unit construction details, overall dimensions and operating weight.

(i) Size of opening for supply air grille.

(j) Coil construction, number of rows, fins per inch, water pressure drop

through the coil, total and sensible cooling capacities and heating

capacity under specified operating conditions.

(k) Type and size of the air filter.

(l) Type and cfm rating of the fans at high and low speeds.

(m) Units noise level rating in NC at high and medium speeds.

(n) Type of fan motor, high speed rpm and total, electric consumption of

unit.

(f) Manufacturer‟s performance guarantee certificate and technical

bulletins.

TS – 02 DX AIR HANDLING UNIT (HYGIENIC GRADE)

1. The casing shall have perimeter frame with a modular system based on

standardized double wall panels. The AHU shall be of hygienic grade. Removal

of side panels must not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Casing

275

strength shall be designed to meet European standard EN 1886: 1998, casing

class 2A.

2. The casing construction shall incorporate a thermal break in the frame and

panel design and have a thermal break ration, Tr of at least 0.75

3. The framework shall be made from non-corrosive recyclable extruded aluminum

channels fitted together with non-metal corner pieces.

4. The casing panel shall be attached to the frame through a self-locking

mechanism represented by a wedge and frame, exerting pressure evenly onto

the panel and seal attached to the frame, to achieve air tight cabinet

construction. The casing shall be designed to meet Eurovent class B air leakage

requirement. Closed cell foam gasket shall be provided where modules are

joined.

5. The unit shall be mounted on a galvanized sheet steel base frame for ease of

shipment and handling. The minimum height of the floor-mounting base shall

be 120 mm and designed to ensure air circulation and avoid entrapment of

moisture below the unit.

6. Double-Wall Panel

The outer panel wall shall be painted with baked polyester powder paint

resistant to scratch and nicks. The inner wall shall be S.S. 316 steel.

The panels shall be 40-50mm thick double wall type with injected CFC-free

polyurethane foam insulation for a rigid construction. The panel insulation

shall not absorb moisture and should be rot resistant. The insulation material

shall be totally enclosed in the panel to avoid any possibility of insulation being

exposed to air stream. The panel insulation shall have a heat transfer “K” value

of 0.02 w/mK.

7. Drain Pan

Coil section shall be provided with an insulated double-wall with 1 mm thick

S.S. dual pitch sloping drain pan to allow for proper condensate removal.

276

8. Access Doors

Access doors shall be constructed with a double-wall panel that compresses

evenly a durable rubber seal onto a rigid frame. The rubber around the full

perimeter of the access door‟s frame shall be used to prevent air leakage. The

door shall be hinged and able to be lifted off or removed totally for easy access.

9. Fan section

Fans shall be double width, double inlet multi-blade FC fans. All fans shall be

dynamically balanced at the factory as a complete assembly. Fans shall be

equipped with self-aligning bearing with a L50 bearing life of 200,000 hours.

The fan assembly shall be internally isolated. The fan discharge shall be

isolated from the casing by a vibration absorbing flexible connection. All fans to

be tested at ANSI/AMCA 210, ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 51.

10. Motors

Motors shall be TEFC IP54 class F insulation protected suitable for 54 degree

ambient operation. Motor mounting shall permit drive belt tensioning. Each

unit to have factory installed standby motor and drive assembly in addition to

standard motor and drive assembly for emergency.

11. Drives

Drives shall be fixed pitched or variable pitched, selected at a 1.5 service factor.

The belt guard is to be provided.

12. Coil Section

Coils shall be fabricated by the AHU manufacturer to maintain consistency in

quality and reliability. Coil shall be installed such that unit casing enclose

headers and return bends. Coil shall be designed to maximize the utilization of

the available unit cross-section area. Coil connections shall be clearly labeled

on outside of the units. Coil shall be cartridge type mounted on steel channel

for easy removability. Coil shall have aluminum plate fins and seamless copper

tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly bonded to tubes b

mechanical expansion of the tubes. Capacities, pressure drops and selection

procedure shall be designed in accordance with ARI standard 410. The

aluminum plate fin thickness shall be minimum of 0.13 mm. The copper tube

277

shall be 0.5 inch with minimum of 0.016 inch tube wall thickness. All coil to be

leak tested at 250 psig and proof tested to 375 psig.

13. Filter Section

Filter section shall have filter racks, an access door for filter removal and block-

offs as required to prevent air bypass around filters. Bag filters 65% efficient

with 2˝ thick aluminum pre-filters will be provided. Filters will be selected at

mid-life. (See schedule)

14. Make

As per Schedule of AHU, recommended manufacturers list provided or approved

equal by Engineer.

15. The tenderers are required to supply the following information:-

a. The overall unit dimensions and operating weight.

b. Coil(s) constructions, face area, number of fins per inch, face air velocity, air

resistance, water pressure drop.

c. Type of fan, air velocity at fan outlet, unit noise level rating in NC, fan motor HP

requirement, cfm capacity and static pressure.

Manufacturer‟s capacity & performance guarantee certificate and technical bulletins.

CONDENSING UNIT

The unit shall be assembled on heavy gauge steel mounting/lifting rails and shall be

weather proofed. Unit shall include a hermetic reciprocating compressor(s), plate fin

condenser coil fans and motors, controls and holding charge of nitrogen. Operating

range shall be between 115 °F and 35 °F (1.7°C) in cooling as Standard from the

factory. Units shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210/240,340/360 or

365.

Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel, exterior

surfaces shall be cleared, phosphatized, and finished with a weather resistant baked

enamel finish. Unit shall have removable end panels, which allow access to all major

components and controls.

Coil shall be internally finned or smooth bore 3/8” (10mm) copper tubes mechanically

bonded to a configured aluminum fins as Standard. Coil shall be factory pressure and

leak tested to 420 psig (2899Kpa.) air pressure.

278

Direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced propeller fan(s) with aluminum

blades and electro-coated steel hubs shall be used in draw through vertical discharge

position. Either permanently lubricated totally enclosed or open construction motors

shall be provided and shall have built in current and thermal over load prevention.

Motors shall have be either ball or sleeve bearing type.

Condensing shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor

pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Control wiring shall be 24 volts

Control Circuit that includes fusing and control transformer. Unit shall provide

external location for monitoring a fused discount device. Time delay timer to prevent

compressors in dual compressor units from simultaneous start up and anti-recycle

timer. The standard unit should be able to operate under low ambient conditions to

approximately 35 °F (1.7 °C). The vibration isolators shall be provided to reduce

transmission of noise and vibration to building structure. Hot gas by pass be provided

for capacity control. Time delay relay shall be provided to prevent rapid on-off

compressor cycling in light load conditions for not allowing compressor to operate for

5-7 minutes upon shut down.

TS-03 AIR HANDLING UNIT(NORMAL)

16. The casing shall have perimeter frame with a modular system based on

standardized double wall panels. Removal of side panels must no affect the

structural integrity of the unit. Casing strength shall be designed to meet

European standard EN 1886: 1998, casing class 2A.

17. The casing construction shall incorporate a thermal break in the frame

and panel design and have a thermal break ration, Tr of at least 0.75

18. The framework shall be made from non-corrosive recyclable extruded

aluminum channels fitted together with non-metal corner pieces.

19. The casing panel shall be attached to the frame through a self-locking

mechanism represented by a wedge and frame, exerting pressure evenly

onto the panel and seal attached to the frame, to achieve air tight cabinet

279

construction. The casing shall be designed to meet Eurovent class B air

leakage requirement. Closed cell foam gasketing shall be provided where

modules are joined.

20. The unit shall be mounted on a galvanized sheet steel base frame for

ease of shipment and handling. The minimum height of the floor-mounting

base shall be 120 mm and designed to ensure air circulation and avoid

entrapment of moisture below the unit.

21. Double-Wall Panel:

The outer panel wall shall be painted with baked polyester powder paint

resistant to scratch and nicks. The inner wall shall be galvanized steel.

The panels shall be 25mm thick double wall type with injected CFC-free

polyurethane foam insulation for a rigid construction. The panel insulation

shall not absorb moisture and should be rot resistant. The insulation

material shall be totally enclosed in the panel to avoid any possibility of

insulation being exposed to air stream. The panel insulation shall have a

heat transfer “K” value of 0.02 w/mK.

22. Drain Pan:

Coil section shall be provided with an insulated double-wall with 1 mm thick

galvanized, dual pitch sloping drain pan to allow for proper condensate

removal. The galvanized drain pan shall be painted with a mastic compound

for corrosion protection.

23. Access Doors:

Access doors shall be constructed with a double-wall panel that compresses

evenly a durable rubber seal onto a rigid frame. The rubber around the full

perimeter of the access door‟s frame shall be used to prevent air leakage.

The door shall be hinged and able to be lifted off or removed totally for easy

access.

24. Fan section:

280

Fans shall be double width, double inlet multi-blade FC fans. All fans shall

be dynamically balanced at the factory as a complete assembly. Fans shall

be equipped with self aligning bearing with a L50 bearing life of 200,000

hours. The fan assembly shall be internally isolated. The fan discharge shall

be isolated from the casing by a vibration absorbing flexible connection. All

fans to be tested at ANSI/AMCA 210, ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 51.

25. Motors:

Motors shall be TEFC IP54 class F insulation protected suitable for 54

degree ambient operation. Motor mounting shall permit drive belt

tensioning. Each unit to have factory installed standby motor and drive

assembly in addition to standard motor and drive assembly for emergency.

26. Drives:

Drives shall be fixed pitched or variable pitched, selected at a 1.5 service

factor. The belt guard is to be provided.

27. Coil Section:

Coils shall be fabricated by the AHU manufacturer to maintain consistency

in quality and reliability. Coil shall be installed such that unit casing enclose

headers and return bends,. Coil shall be designed to maximize the

utilization of the available unit cross-section area. Coil connections shall be

clearly labeled on outside of the units. Coil shall be cartridge type mounted

on steel channel for easy removability. Coil shall have aluminum plate fins

and seamless copper tubes. Fins shall have collars drawn, belled and firmly

bonded to tubes b mechanical expansion of the tubes. Capacities, pressure

drops and selection procedure shall be designed in accordance with ARI

standard 410. The aluminum plate fin thickness shall be minimum of 0.13

mm. The copper tube shall be 0.5 inch with minimum of 0.016 inch tube

wall thickness. All coil to be leak tested at 250 psig and proof tested to 375

psig.

281

28. Filter Section:

Filter section shall have filter racks, an access door for filter removal and

block-offs as required to prevent air bypass around filters. Bag filters 65%

efficient with 2˝ thick aluminum pre-filters will be provided. Filters will be

selected at mid life. (See schedule)

29. Make:

As per Schedule of chiller, recommended manufacturers list provided or

approved equal by Engineer.

30. The tenderers are required to supply the following information:-

a. The overall unit dimensions and operating weight.

b. Coil(s) constructions, face area, number of fins per inch, face air velocity,

air resistance, water pressure drop.

c. Type of fan, air velocity at fan outlet, unit noise level rating in NC, fan

motor HP requirement, cfm capacity and static pressure.

d. Manufacturer‟s capacity & performance guarantee certificate and

technical bulletins.

16. The tenderer to supply the following information:

(o) The unit construction details, overall dimensions and operating weight.

(p) Size of opening for supply air grille.

(q) Coil construction, number of rows, fins per inch, water pressure drop

through the coil, total and sensible cooling capacities and heating

capacity under specified operating conditions.

(r) Type and size of the air filter.

(s) Type and cfm rating of the fans at high and low speeds.

282

(t) Units noise level rating in NC at high and medium speeds.

(u) Type of fan motor, high speed rpm and total, electric consumption of

unit.

(g) Manufacturer‟s performance guarantee certificate and technical

bulletins.

TS-05 LOW VELOCITY SHEET METAL DUCTING

1. All sheet metal work for various air systems shall be furnished, installed,

completely connected, tested and adjusted.

2. The contractor shall make shop drawings of all duct word and the same

shall include details of all splitters take offs, vanes, dampers, elbows and all

other necessary fittings required for the proper operation of the air system,

drawings and other details shall be submitted to the consultants for

approval before fabrication.

3. Exact dimensions and locations of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be

submitted to the consultants for approval, other wise any changes directed

after installation shall be made without any additional cost. For diffusers

and registers adequate provision shall be made in the neck connections for

installation of deflectors and dampers.

4. All diffuser, registers and grills necks/boxes must be tightly closed during

construction to keep out rubbish.

5. All ducts passing through walls shall have 20 gauge G.I. sheet sleeves

extending ¼" beyond the finished face of the wall on both sides. The sleeves

shall be of sufficient size to cover duct insulation or any other duct covering

283

and allow at least 1/8” clearance in the sleeve for free movement of the

ducting. The contractor shall be responsible for supplying locating and

setting of all necessary duct sleeves.

6. All sheet metal duct work shall be fabricated from commercial quality prime

finish galvanized steel sheets. The specifications for USA and CANADIAN

sources shall be base steel sheets according to ASTM designation A366:62T

and zinc coating according to 525-64T 1.25 oz per sq. ft and for all other

sources base steel sheets cold rolled B.S 1449:part IB;1962 and zinc

coating according to B.S 2989:1958 Class D, 1.25 oz per sq. ft. The zinc

coating should be applied uniformly by continuous got dip method to both

sides of the base metal so that the sheet metal can be drawn, formed , lock-

seamed and spume without danger of flaking or peeling of the zinc coating.

7. All uninsulated ducts shall be cross broken. Insulated ducts are not to be

cross broken.

8. All ducting shall be substantially built with approved joints and seams shall

be made smooth on the inside and the outside. The duct joints shall be

made as air tight as possible. The laps shall be made in the direction of air

flow and no flare shall project inside the ducting.

9. Ducts, the width of the greater dimension of width exceeds 30 inches, shall

be constructed for not more than four feet sections. Ducts, the width of the

greater dimension of which is less than 30" shall be constructed of not more

than eight feet section.

10. All elbows shall preferably be full radius type. If space does not permit,

square elbows may be used with double thickness shop fabricated turning

vanes riveted with the ducting. Due to space limitations curved elbows with

less than a full radius bend may also be used provided single thickness

turning vanes are installed in the elbow. Full radius elbows of width 40"-60"

284

shall give one and over 60" shall have two single thickness turning vanes.

Minimum throat radius of any curved or square elbows shall be 3".

11. Wherever necessary in duct work, casings, or sheet metal partitions

suitable access doors and frames shall be provided to permit inspection,

operation and maintenance of valves, controls, fire dampers, filters,

bearings, traps, or other apparatus concealed behind the sheet metal work.

Access doors shall also be provided at distance not exceeding 75 feet for

duct cleaning. All such doors shall be of double construction, of not less

than 20 gauge sheet metal and shall have sponge rubber gasket around the

entire perimeter to make the joint airtight. They shall be hung on heavy flat

hinges and shall be secured in the closed position by means of wing type

catches. In no case shall access to any of the items of equipment requiring

inspection, adjustment, or servicing require the removal of nuts, bolts ,

screws, wedges or any other screwed or loose device.

12. The supply and return air duct connection with the fans and

equipment shall be made through heavy duty air tight at least 8 oz weight

canvas flexible connection at least 4" wide to prevent transmission of

vibration. The canvas collar shall be properly sewn and clamped at both

ends.

13. The ducts shall be adequately supported from hangers fixed and

generally suspended from the building structure with the help of concrete

inserts, rawal bolts of shooting bolts. The hangers and supports shall not

pierce the insulation which shall be suitably protected and rein forced at

that location. The bottom support shall be1 ¼"x ¼" Ms flat or 1" x1/8" angle

for duct upto12" wide, 1 ¼" x 1/8" angle up to 30" width, 1 ½" x1/8" angle

up to 72" width and 2" x 3/16" angle up to 96" width. Hangers shall be

spaced on average 10 feet centers with a hanger no further than 1 foot on

each side of any changes of direction. Ducting passing through building

expansion points shall be supported on either side of joint. The hangers for

horizontal ducts shall be 3/8" round rod for ducts upto 30" wide similarly

285

½" round rods or 1 ½" x 1/8" MS flat up to 72" width and 1 ½" x 3/16" MS

flat upto 96" width. The vertical ducts shall be supported at each floor with

MS angle or channel supports resting on slab and bolted with the duct

bracing or MS flat straps riveted with the duct. Perforated band or shall not

be used in any case for supporting ducts.

14. The ducting shall be fabricated according to the following schedule:-

15. Rectangular Ducting

To 8" larger dimension 26 gauge (all four sides)

9" - 27" // 24 gauge //

28" - 51" // 22 gauge //

52" - 81" // 20 gauge //

Above 81" // 18 gauge //

16. The ducts shall be fabricated with following type of joints of as

approved :-

a. Longitudinal:

i. Pittsburgh lock, double seam

ii. Or grooved seam.

b. Circumferential:

i. Duct larger dimension

UPTO 23 1"Drive slip

24"- 42" 1" high pocket lock or standing seam.

43"-72" 1 ½" high pocket lock or standing seam.

73"-96" 1 ½" high pocket locks or standing seam, reinforced with

bracing angle.

17. The bracing for ducting shall be as follows:-

Duct larger dimension Size of bracing MS angle.

286

UPTO23" None

24"-30" Joints at 4´centers with bracing or joints at

8´center with 1"x1"x1/8" bracing between

joints.

31"- 42" 1" x 1" x 1/8" @ 4´ center

43"-72" 1 ½" x 1 ½" x 1/8" @ 4´ center

73"-84" 1 ½" x 1 ½" x 1/8" @ 2´ center

85"-96" 1 ½" x 1 ½" x 3/16" @ 2´ center

i. The 2´ centers bracing would be located at joints and between

joints and between joints.

ii. The bracing shall be carried around all four sides and riveted with

the ducts at maximum 6" centers.

iii. Special joints, bracing and hangers as specified by consultants

shall be used for ducts with larger dimension over 96".

18. Hangers:

Hangers and supports shall be fastened to the structure in a manner

approved by the Engineer. All fastening shall be such as to ensure

permanent stability and to be capable of supporting at least three times the

applied load.

Galvanized sheet metal ducts less tan 20" in width (larger dimension) may

be suspended by means of galvanized iron straps extended along the bottom

of the duct to form a trapeze, only if hanger length above the duct is not

more than 12".

All other ducts shall be suspended by means of iron bars securely fastened

to the angle iron bracing or angle iron placed under the duct. Bars shall be

fastened to bracing only on un-insulated ducts.

Bars shall be welded to angles at ceiling, attached therein by anchor screws

and heavy iron washers. Where horizontal ducting is fixed to walls, columns,

287

supported from floor slabs, etc. angle iron frames are to be fabricated and

fitted to support rectangular ductwork and associated equipment.

Vertical ducts are to be supported by steel angles bolted to at least two sides

of the duct and on the complete circumference of the ducts where the larger

ducts dimension is greater than24".

Angle iron extensions shall be either grouted or bolted to the structure.

Hangers spacing and sizes shall be as follows:

Larger duct

dim.

Strap Size

(in.)

Bar Dia.

(in.)

Bottom Angle

Size

(in.)

Maximum

Spacing

(ft)

Thru 20

21thru 60

61 thru 84

85 thru 96

Over 96

1*1/8

-

-

-

-

3/8

3/8

3/8

3/8

3/8

1-1/2*1-

1/2*1/8

2*2*1/8

2*2*1/8

2*2*1/8

2*2*1/8

10

10

10

10

7

Hanger rods shall be cross-braced whenever the length of rod above duct

work is more than 3 ft. to prevent swing of ducts.

All structural steel including hanger rods and angle iron shall be painted

with one coat of approved rust- inhibitive paint before installing.

288

TS-06 DUCT INSULATION

Duct Thermal Insulation:

1. No insulation shall be applied to any duct work or to any surface until all

foreign matter has been removed from the surface, cleaned out and made

operable. All insulation shall be applied in a manner consistent with good

practice and methods.

2. Insulation shall be continuous through floors, walls, partitions etc., except

when otherwise indicated or specified. Where the application of insulation

will cover name plate attached to equipment, the insulation shall be

recessed so as to expose the name or rating plate. Where space will not

permit application of insulation in wall or slab chase, the chase shall be

packed full of 85% magnesia, mineral wood, asbestos rope, expanded

polystyrene of fiber glass and protected with cover plates, as approved by the

Engineer/Consultants.

3. Ducts shall be insulated as specified in the schedule of equipment and

materials.

4. The thermal conductivity at 100ºF for fiberglass insulation minimum density

0.6 lbs. per cu.ft. shall be not over 0.28, expended polyurethane insulation

minimum density 2.0 lbs. per CFT not over .16 and that for fire retardant

self extinguishing type expanded polystyrene insulation minimum density

1.5 lbs. per cu. ft. not over 0.25 BTUs. Inch. Sq.ft. ºF hour.

5. For cold air ducts fiberglass insulation shall either have (as specified in the

schedule) factory applied 2 ply vapor barrier of craft paper and aluminum

foil with internal fiberglass yarn reinforcement at maximum 1" centers or 3

ply vapor barrier comprising 2 layers of craft paper and 1 layer bitumen,

total weight 30 gms per sq. meter, fixed with approved quality adhesive.

Expended polyurethane and polystyrene insulation shall have 3 ply vapor

289

barrier comprising 2 layers craft paper and 1 layer bitumen, total weight 30

Gms. Per sq. meter, fixed with approved quality adhesive recommended by

the insulation manufacturer. Great care will be exercised that vapor barrier

is not damaged/pierced during installation and any damage will be repaired

with the same quality of vapor barrier.

6. The insulation shall be firmly fixed on the ducting with approved quality

adhesive compound recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Adhesive

to be Mayasci, Samadbond Dollar Industrial CPW2 or Polydex (M) or

Hoechst 135 Movilith or approved equal. The adhesive shall cover at least

25% duct area on the sides and top and 50% area on the bottom. All

circumferential and longitudinal joints shall be lapped at least 1-1/2" and

full sealed with adhesive. Where necessary, the insulation shall be further

mechanically secured to the ducts and at least 1” wide metal bands shall be

applied at the corners so that the mechanical fastener does not pierce the

insulation and vapor barrier.

7. The insulation shall be applied to the full length of the ducts including

portion where internal sound absorber liner etc. are fixed.

8. All access doors and removable panels shall be insulated and jacketed

separately. The insulation jacket ends on the duct and door or panel shall

be sealed with 2" wide PVC vapor seal self adhesive type tape to prevent

damage to the insulation during use and servicing.

9. The insulated ducts above false ceiling and other such non-exposed

locations shall have a jacket of coarse cloth, about 4 OZ weight, properly

fixed, to the ducts and seams shall be sewed.

10. Insulated ducts in the plant rooms, service shafts, inspection passages

and other exposed locations within the building shall have a jacket of 8 oz

canvas properly fixed to the ducts and seas shall be sewn.

290

11. External and weather exposed insulated ducting shall be protected with

a jacket of 45 lbs. proofing felt, all joints sealed with hot bitumen PBS, PB4

or approved equal and entire surface given two heavy coats of cold bitumen

PBS Cold Sticker or approved equal. In case of polystyrene insulation cold

bitumen should be used to seas the joints instead of hot bitumen. The

jacket shall be further mechanically secured to the duct with ¼" wide soft

aluminum bands spaced at 18".

12. It would be preferable if indigenous coarse cloth, canvas roofing felt and

asphalt impregnated craft paper of approved quality are used.

13. The fiberglass duct insulation shall be of Gustin-Fiberglass Ltd./Owens

Corning/Johns-Manvile manufacture or approved equal, the fire retardant

self extinguishing type expended polystyrene insulation of

polypor/thermosole manufacture or approved equal and polyurethane of ICI

manufacture or approved equal.

14. The tenderer shall supply complete technical details and manufacturer‟s

technical bulletins for the duct insulation offered by him.

TS-07 DUCT SOUND LINER

1. The supply and return air systems shall be provided with sound insulation

as specified herein and shown in the drawings.

2. The low velocity supply and return air ducts shall have 1” or 2” thick sound

absorbing liner for the portions marked so on the drawings. The low velocity

supply air ducts shall have the liner for a distance of at least 15‟ from the

fan discharge.

3. The sound absorbing liner shall either have a black felted neoprene

compound coating on the air side face or alternatively a tough dimensionally

stable woven glass cloth to resist air erosion upto 30 mps air velocities. The

291

density of the liner shall be at least 1 lb/cuft. And the thermal conductivity

at 100 F shall be not over .28 Btu‟s in. sq. ft. F hour

4. The liner shall be measured and cut to shape, for transverse joints 50 mm

excess to be allowed at downstream, all longitudinal joints to be close

butted. All duct surface to be completely covered with liner without

interruptions or gaps. All internal surfaces to be cleaned and to be free from

dust and grease. The liner shall be cemented with the duct surface with full

coverage of approved adhesive and all exposed leading edges and transverse

joints coated with adhesive. The liner shall be additionally secured with

mechanical fasteners, space as recommended by the manufacturer. The

fasteners shall compress the liner sufficiently to hold it firmly in place.

Caps/washers shall be applied to fixing pins and excess pin length removed.

The facing overlap at the transverse joints and initial and final edges of lined

sections shall be secured under a metal strip. The longitudinal joints shall

be sealed with an approved sealant and 2” wide PVC self adhesive stapes.

5. The liner shall have effective sound absorption over the full frequency range

from 125 to 4000 cps as given below:-

Thickne

ss

Absorption Coefficient at cps N.R.C.

125 250 500 1000 2000

4000

1" .23 .50 .49 .63 .73 .82 .80

2" .41 .71 .86 .95 .97 .90 .90

6. The fiberglass sound absorbing liner shall be of Gustin-Bacon/Fiberglass

Ltd/Owens Corning/Johns-Manville manufacture or approved equal.

7. The tenderer shall give complete technical details and manufacturer‟s

technical bulletin for the sound absorbing liner offered by him.

292

TS-08 PIPING & VALVES

1. All black MS piping 1-1/2" and above shall be arranged with welded joints,

providing flanges where necessary for easy dismantling. In particular flanged

joints shall be provided for equipment, valves, strainers, expansion joints

and other specialties. The welding fittings shall be of Tube-Turn or Grinnell

or as approved.

2. All site welding shall be done by electric arc welding process with all joints

45º bevel type, pipe to the mill beveled or beveled at site by the Contractor,

all scale and oxide shall be removed with hammer, chisel or file, bevel shall

be smooth and lean before welding, two pipe ends to be lined straight and

concentric.

3. Both conductors of welding machine shall be brought to the work location

and shall be taped and held together to prevent induced currents in pipes,

other metals and structural steel. The earthing lead shall be connected to

pipe with suitable clamp in a manner so that welding current shall not flow

through pipe joints, pipe supports or structural steel. Earthing lead shall

not be spot welded to the pipe.

4. The weld metal shall be thoroughly fused with base metal at all points and

the welds shall be of sound metal and free from slag or other defects.

5. All welders shall be fully qualified and approved for the work. If required

their test certificates shall be submitted to the engineer for approval before

the welders are allowed to work.

6. Where screwed joints are used, the screw threads shall be cut clean and

true, screwed joints made tight with litharge or plastic tape. Red and white

lead, pipe dope, caulking or filling compounds shall not be used. Reducing

fittings shall be used to change pipe sizes and no bushings shall be used. All

necessary unions shall be provided for easy dismantling.

293

7. All pipes shall be properly supported on clamps, hangers etc., of approved

design. Supports shall be designed to permit from expansion and

contraction to minimize vibrations. All hangers, clamps etc, for piping in the

plant rooms, inspection passage and vertical risers shall be provided with

rubber in shear or spring on combination or equal anti vibration supports to

prevent transmission of vibrations to the building structure. No pipe shall be

suspended from other pipes.

8. In general for horizontal M.S. piping, pipe supports shall not be more than 7

ft. apart for pipes between 1" and smaller, 10ft for pipes between 1-1/2" to

3", 14foot for pipes between 4" to 6" and 17ft for pipes above 6". Copper

piping 1" OD and below shall be supported at not more than 6ft centers and

above 1" OD at maximum 8ft centers. Supports shall be provided as near as

possible to the valves, strainers, tees, other special fittings and equipment

connections.

9. The horizontal piping hangers shall be supported from building steel

framing or concrete inserts of sufficient strength.

10. All vertical pipes shall be supported by heavy clamps resting on the

building structure.

11. Hangers for insulated piping shall have broad contact areas so as not to

damage insulation by load connection. The hangers shall also support

insulated pipe without piercing the insulation.

12. During installation, adequate temporary supports shall be provided so

that the piping is not supported by the equipment.

13. All pipe work shall be so arranged and assembled as to prevent under

strain or leak caused by expansion and contraction. The riser branches

shall be arranged to take up motion of risers and mains. The piping shall be

294

anchored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain or

piping and branches. Anchors shall be of approved design, of heavy welded

construction and entirely separate from hangers.

14. Expansion joints shall be installed in the piping at building expansion

points and where required at other locations to prevent undue stresses in

the piping. Expansion joints shall be hydraulically formed, pack less

stainless steel bellows type; self equalizing with external protection, internal

sleeve and factory installed flanged connections. The joints shall have

required traverse, temperature and pressure rating (minimum 100 psig). At

least one set of guides shall be installed on either side of the joints. Where

space is available, expansion loop shall be used instead of an expansion

joint

15. All pipes passing through floors or walls shall have 20 gauge G.I. sleeves

for the full depth of the finished floor construction or thickness of the

finished wall and extending ¼” beyond the finished face of the structure on

both sides. The sleeves shall be of sufficient size to cover pipe insulation or

any other pipe covering, and allow atleast 1/8" clearance in sleeve for free

movement of piping. The contractor shall be responsible for supplying

locating and setting of all necessary pipe sleeves.

16. The pipe shall be properly graded to secure easy circulation and prevent

noise and water hammer. Maximum possible pitch shall be allowed to the

points where vents, relief, drip and drain connections are provided. Capped

dirt pocket shall be provided at all riser bottoms, low points and other places

where dirt and scale may accumulate. Generally the contractor should

provide drain cocks at low points and automatic vents at high points. Drain

cocks at low points shall have threaded ends for hose connection. Inverted

ball-float straps shall be used for automatic venting of water mains at all

high points and where ever else required. The vents shall be connected to

the nearest drain point or the outlet piping so arranged that any water

leakage does not cause any damage.

295

17. The contractor shall provide drain cocks/vents at inlet/outlet

connections of each equipment and cooling and heating coils.

18. All elbows shall be long radius type except where space limitation

necessitates use of short radius type.

19. The contractor shall provide all stop valves, check valves, drain cocks,

steam straps, dirt traps, automatic vents, manual vents, thermometers,

pressure gauge, strainers and other specialties as are required for proper

operation of the whole system. Generally necessary valves etc. are shown in

the drawings.

20. All cast iron body valves shall have renewable bronze seat rings, bronze

spindles and to have self packing feature so that they can be packed while

open and under pressure. The valves in the plant rooms which are more

than 6ft above the floor level shall be provided with chain operated sheaves

and chains. Valves 1-1/2" and above should be with flanged bodies except

for drain piping where screwed end valves may be used with unions for easy

dismantling. All valves for throttling service, in pump discharges, water

chillers/heaters and condensers connections and where specified on the

drawings shall be of the globe type. The valves shall be of design and

construction to confirm with the working pressure of the system. No valve

shall be installed with its spindle downward.

21. Check valves in horizontal position shall be 15degrees swing check and

in vertical position balanced check valves of low pressure drop type.

22. The Contractor shall provide strainers where necessary to protect all

equipment, automatic control valves etc., where proper functioning would be

affected by the dirt on the seat or by scoring of the seat. The strainer shall

be provided in the inlet connection of each automatic control valves,

296

pressure reducing valves, pump suction, steam trap, make up water

connection etc.

23. All strainers in water, steam and condensate return line shall be of “Y”

pattern, preferably installed in horizontal, alternatively in vertical downward

length of pipe. The strainers shall be arranged not to trap piping and allow

easy disconnection for cleaning. The strainers shall have cast iron or bronze

bodies able to withstand the working pressure, removable screens of copper,

brass, nickel or stainless steel, flanged bodies with tapings for size 1-1/2"

and above, and of such a design as to allow blowing out of accumulated dirt

and easy removal and replacement of strainer screen without disconnecting

the main piping.

24. Main steam shut off valves shall be installed on the boiler and steam

supply line shall be so connected to the steam header as to prevent

condensate flow back to the boiler. The steam headers and piping shall be

pitched towards drip condensate traps and the condensate return piping

shall be pitched towards the condensate receiver.

25. Minimum 6" long vertical leg should be arranged at equipment

condensate outlet and the traps installed as near to the outlet as possible. A

strainer shall be installed at the trap inlet, check valve at outlet and shut off

valves on both sides.

26. Drip condensate collecting traps shall be installed in steam headers,

mains and piping ends and immediately ahead of a control valve or

equipment/coil inlet. Minimum 6" long pocket of full size pipe upto 1-1/2"

N.B. piping , 1-1/2" pipe for 2" to 3" N.B. , 2" pipe for 4" N.B. 3"pipe for 5"

and 6" N.B. , 4" pipe for 8" to 12" N.B. and 6" pipe for piping 14" N.B. and

larger shall be installed for collecting drip condensate from the main piping.

A strainer shall be installed at the trap inlet and shut off valves on both

sides.

297

27. All buried piping and weather exposed M.S. piping shall be protected

with a jacket of 45 lbs., roofing felt, all joints seals with hot bitumen PBS

PB4 or approved equal and the entire surface given two heavy coats of cold

bitumen PBS cold sticker or approved equal. In case of weather exposed

piping, the jacket shall be further mechanically secured to the piping with

¾" wide soft aluminum bends generally spaced at 18".

28. At the time complete plant is operated and tested and any of the coils

etc., do not have rapid and noiseless circulation due to trapped or air bound

connections or any other reason of defective installation and workmanship,

the contractor shall be responsible to make proper alterations in these

defective connections. In case the connections are concealed in false ceiling,

floors etc., and the same has to be taken down or broken and refinished the

contractor shall bear all expenses in this connection.

29. The piping installation shall not be accepted until it is free from foreign

matters to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The contractor shall repair,

replace without additional charge any and all control valves or other system

components which do not function properly because of imperfect cleaning of

any piping system during installation, testing etc.

30. The piping for fluorocarbon refrigerant circuits shall be hard drawn

copper tubing with silver soldered joints. Equipment, valves, strainers etc.,

shall have flanged joints as required for easy dismantling and servicing. In

case of size 5/8" O.D. and below, use of soft copper tubing with flared or

compression fittings may be permitted by the Engineer where tight space

condition so required.

31. The steel piping from USA and CANADIAN sources shall be according to

ASTM A-53 & A-120 schedule 40 and for all other sources according to B.S.

1387 – 1957 (medium weight) and B.S. 3601 1962 (medium weight). The

copper piping shall be according to ASTM A-88, type L for working pressure

below 150 psig and type “X” for higher working pressures.

298

The schedule of piping shall be as follows:-

i. The low pressure steam, condensate return and fuel piping shall

be hot finished seamless black carbon steel tubing.

ii. The condenser water piping shall be hot finished seamless black

carbon steel tubing.

iii. The chilled/hot water piping 2" and above shall be hot finished

seamless, below 2" hot finished seamless or welded black carbon

steel tubing.

iv. All water connections to fan coil units shall be of soft copper

tubing of refrigeration services quality.

v. All makeup water, vent, equipment drain and condensate drain

piping shall be galvanized steel tubing.

vi. Fluorocarbon refrigerant piping shall be copper tubing of

refrigeration service quality.

32. Pipe Support and Anchors:

All supports for steel piping shall be ferrous. Brackets or supports shall be

set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valves, flanges or other

fittings requiring maintenance.

All pipe work shall be supported by means of approved clips or hangers at

centers specified. In the event of two or more pipes being carried by a single

support the spacing shall be for the shorter interval.

All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging.

Unless otherwise indicated, pipe hangers are to be spaced as follows:

299

Normal Pipe size Max. Span (in) Min. Rod dia.

(in)

1.25 and smaller 6 3/8

1.5 9 3/8

2 10 3/8

2.5 12 1/2

3 13 1/2

4 14 5/8

5 16 5/8

6 17 3/4

8 19 7/8

10 22 7/8

12 23 7/8

Piping at all equipment, and control valves shall be supported to prevent

strains or distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves.

Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment valves and

accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional

supports after these items are removed.

All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc. necessary for Contractor shall

finish fastening hangers. All hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to

be supported. Oversized hangers shall not be permitted, without Engineer‟s

approval.

All hangers shall be provided with lock nuts and have provision for vertical

adjustments pipes.

Hangers consisting of malleable split rings with malleable iron sockets shall

support individual horizontal piping, or select clevis type hangers, or roller

hangers as directed by the Engineer.

300

Pipe stands with base flanges shall have heavy wrought iron and steel

clamps securely bolted on the piping with the end extensions bearing on the

structure of building.

Piping shall be anchored where required to localize expansion to prevent

undue strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate

from hangers and shall be heavy forged or welded construction of approved

design.

Hangers for cold piping shall have hardwood inserts or high density

insulation capable of withstanding the compression and allowing the hanger

to support pipe without any metal contact.

Upper ends of iron rods shall be welded to angles attached to ceiling

(concrete Slab) by anchor screws and heavy iron washers.

TS-09 PIPE INSULATION

1. No insulation shall be applied to any system of piping or to any surface until

all foreign matter has been removed from the surface to be insulated and

until the piping has been tested made tight, cleaned out and made operable.

All insulation shall be applied in a manner consistent with good practice and

methods. Sectional covering shall be applied with all end joints broken. All

longitudinal joints shall be top and bottom but staggered between sections.

Insulation shall be continuous through floor walls, partitions, etc. except

where otherwise indicated or specified. Where the application of insulation

will cover name-plates attached to equipment the insulation shall be

recessed so as to expose the name of rating plate. Where space will not

permit application of sectional insulation on pipes in a wall or slab chase,

the chase shall be packed full of 85% magnesia, mineral wool, asbestos

301

expanded polystyrene or fiberglass and protected with cover plates as

approved by the Engineer/Consultants.

2. Piping shall be insulated as specified in the schedule of equipment and

materials.

3. The thermal conductivity at 100 ºF for fiberglass insulation minimum

density 4.00 lbs. per cuft 64 KG/M3 shall be not over 0.24, for flexible

foamed plastic insulation average minimum density 5.5 lbs. per cuft 40

KG/M3 not over 0.29, for expanded polyurethane insulation minimum

density 2.5 lbs. per cuft not over 0.16 and that for fire retardant self

extinguishing type expanded polystyrene insulation minimum density 1.5

lbs. per cuft not over 0.25 BTUs. Inch / sq.ft. ºF hour.

4. For chilled / hot water piping, fiberglass insulation shall have 3 ply vapour

barrier of white craft, 0.001" aluminum foil and 55 lbs. asphalt saturated

draft. Expanded polyurethane and polystyrene insulation shall have 3 ply

vapour barrier comprising of 2 layers kraft paper and 1 layer bitumen, total

weight 30 gms per sq. meter. The factory applied vapour barrier shall form a

hinge along one side and an overlap along the other. The field applied

vapour barrier shall be fixed fully with the insulation with approved quality

adhesive recommended by the manufacturer and all longitudinal and

circumferential joints shall be wrapped at least 1". Great care will be

exercised that the vapour barrier is not damaged/pierced during insulation

and any damage shall be repaired with the same quality vapour barrier.

5. The insulation shall be fully fixed to the piping with approved adhesive

compound recommended by the manufacturer. Special PVC or resin based

adhesive compound shall be used for polystyrene insulation and mineral oil

based adhesive shall not be used. Adhesive to be Mayasol, Samadbond,

Dollar Industries or Polydex (m) or Hoechst 135 movilith or approved equal.

302

6. Each pipe shall be insulated separately with premoulded pipe insulation

material. All circumferential and longitudinal joints shall be sealed with at

least 2" wide self-adhesive tape of approved quality. In case of chilled water

piping, PVC impregnated canvas vapor seal type tape or polyethylene coated

tape shall be pressed down firmly to ensure an efficient seal and smooth out

to avoid any gap and wrinkles.

7. The flexible foamed plastic insulation shall be thoroughly sealed with

adhesive and all joints covered with 1.5" wide self adhesive PVC water proof

tape of approved quality.

8. Where specified, the piping shall be insulated with 85% magnesia in layers

not thicker than 1" till the required thickness is achieved 18 g. MS ¾" mesh

wire netting shall be stretched over the piping , securely wired in place and

then the first layer of insulation shall be applied. Each layer shall have wire

netting 1/8" thick finish coat shall be mixed 15% by weight with Portland

cement and troweled into wire netting to form smooth and hard finish. After

fully drying of the insulation a coating of hard setting compound shall be

applied. It shall then be painted.

9. All specialties (valves, fittings, flanges etc) shall be insulated with thickness

not less than adjoining straight pipe insulation thickness. In case of

chilled/hot water piping, equal/over-sized sections of premoulded insulation

shall be used duly mitered and trimmed to tailor-fit the specialties. In case

of fiberglass pipe insulation and where necessary for other types of

premoulded pipe insulation, fiberglass blanket of at least 2 lbs./cuft density

may be used instead of mitered sections for insulating the specialties. Loose

craps fiberglass insulation shall not be used for this purpose. The specialties

insulation shall be fully covered with self adhesive tape specified above form

a complete seal. In case of chilled water piping, a thick coating of liquid

vapour barrier shall be then applied.

303

10. All insulated piping within the building shall have a jacket of 8 oz canvas

suitably fixed to the insulation with seven seams or with approved adhesive

and joints lapped at least 1.5".

11. External and weather exposed insulated piping shall be protected with a

jacket of 45 lbs. roofing felt, all joints sealed with hot bitumen PBS4 or

approved equal and entire surface given two heavy coats of cold bitumen

PBS Cold Sticker or approved equal. In case of polystyrene insulation cold

bitumen should be used to seal the joints instead of hot bitumen.

12. The insulation and jacket shall be further mechanically secured with the

piping with ¾" wide soft aluminum bands, generally spaced at 18" and on

either side of elbows, tees, valves and other special fittings.

13. The hangers, guides, rollers, clamps etc. shall not pierce the insulation.

The insulation of steam and condensate return piping shall be protected by

wooden saddles and on all other piping it shall be protected by metal

shields. For piping above 2" size insulated with fiberglass or expanded

polystyrene insulation, bottom half or full section of cork insulation of heavy

density insulation of thickness equal to the main insulation shall be used at

the supports, hangers etc.

14. It would be preferable if indigenous asphalt impregnated Kraft paper,

canvas and roofing felt of approved quality are used.

15. The fiberglass insulation shall be of Gustin-Bacon/Fiberglass

Ltd./Owens-Corning/Johns-Manville AFICO, KSA, KIMCO manufacture or

approved equal, the fire retardant self extinguishing type expanded

polystyrene insulation of polypor/thermopole manufacture or approved

equal, and polyurethane of ICI manufacture or approved equal. The flexible

foamed plastic insulation to be Dunlop Semtex‟s or approved equal.

304

16. The tender shall confirm the type and thickness of insulation used, give

details of vapour barrier, covering jacket, finishing and adhesive, and supply

manufacturer‟s technical bulletins.

TS-10 CENTRIFUGAL WATER PUMPS

1. The centrifugal pump motor sets shall be heavy duty industrial type suitable

for continuous and quiet operation.

2. The centrifugal pumps shall be single stage, small sizes of vertically split

casing and large sizes of horizontally split casing as specified in the schedule

of equipment.

3. The pumps to be volute type, cast iron body, fully bronze fitted, bronze

impeller of radial type, with double curvature vanes, stainless steel shaft or

shaft sleeve, properly lubricated bearings, readily accessible stuffing box

with packing and seal cage, flanged suction and discharge connections,

integral cast iron base plate for the pump and the motor with drain outlet

for connection to the nearest drain point, flexible coupling between the

motor and the pump shafts covered with approved guard, pump casing to be

complete with drain and vent plugs and designed, tested and proven tight

for a test pressure at least equal to 1-1/2 times the maximum working

pressure.

4. The pumps to have gate valves and strainers on the suction side, globe

valves on the discharge side and pressure gauges on suction and discharge

sides. If pumps are operating in parallel than a check valve to be installed

on the discharge side of each pump.

5. The pumps shall be direct driven by a constant speed motor and provided

with a suitable starter. The pump motor BHP have been given for each

system for guidance but it is intended that motor of higher BHP shall be

305

provided if required to ensure that it is not over loaded under any possible

operating conditions of the pump.

6. Each pump shall be guaranteed for circulating the specified water quantity

against specified net discharge head under the specified conditions of

operation when operating continuously without overheating the motor,

bearings etc.

7. The pump shall be selected for quiet operation so that pump noise is not

audible outside the plant room. The pump sound shall not be transmitted to

the building structure.

8. The pups installed for one system should be suitable for parallel and motor

should be so selected that these are not overloaded when only one pump is

operating and increased water flow is to be handed due to reduced system

head.

9. The contractor shall supply anti vibration foundation material for isolating

the pump foundations from the building structure.

10. The number, size and conditions of operation for pumps required for

different systems are specified in the schedule of equipment and the pumps

location shown in the drawings.

11. Certified performance data and curves shall be submitted by the

contractor for approval prior to confirmation the purchase order on the

manufacturer/supplier.

12. All pumps to be supplied under this section to be of one manufacturer

and of same type.

13. The pump & motor sets to be of local manufactured by M/S KSB

Hasanabdal.

306

14. The tenderer to give the following information for all pumps:-

a. Pump capacity in US gpm against net discharge head, RPM and BHP of

motor.

b. Construction and other technical details.

c. Overall dimensions and operating weight.

15. Manufacturer‟s performance guarantees certificate, performance data,

curves and technical bulletins.

TS-11 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND STARTERS

1. Electric motors would be of the sizes and types as specified for driving all

plant and equipment. The motor shall be of at least the horsepower specified

but shall be of proper horsepower and speed to suit the specific plant and

equipment offered by the tenderer. Any adjustment in motor horsepower or

speed must be included in the tender and no additional cost will be allowed

on this account. The motors and starters shall be heavy duty type suitable

for continuous operation.

2. Generally all motors shall be constant speed. Three phase motors, 50 HP

and below shall be squirrel cage type and above 50 HP slip ring type motors

shall be supplied. Single phase motors shall be split phase type or capacitor

start induction run type.

3. The motors and starters shall be tropicalized and fungus proof, unless

otherwise specified drip proof construction for indoor installation, totally

enclosed weather proof ventilated construction for out door installation or

where coming in contact with high humidity air. The motors and starters

shall be suitable for operation under site conditions, ambient temperature at

least 50 º C and altitude 2000 ft.Where required, motors installed outside

shall be provided with sheet metal cover to protect from direct sun.

307

4. Fractional horsepower motors may be suitable for operation on 220 ± 10%

volts 50 cycle 1-phase AC, and all motors 1 HP and above should be suitable

for 400 ± 10% volts 50 cycles 3 phase AC.

5. Motors driving pumps shall be directly connected through flexible couplings,

while motors driving fans, compressor etc., shall be belt connected unless

otherwise specified. All belts connected motors should have sturdy

adjustable bases with arrangement to maintain proper belt tension and shall

be complete with proper belt guards. All belt connected fan driving motors

shall have variable pitch pulley for adjusting the fan speed ± 10% of design

selected speed.

6. All motors should be arranged for quiet operation and guaranteed to give the

required output and fulfil the requirements of the driven machinery without

producing any sound audible outside the machine room.

7. The slip ring motors shall have automatic brush lifting device when the

motor has attained full speed and the rotor resistances have been short

circuited. There shall be a safety control to ensure that the motor can not be

started without the brushes in position.

8. All starters for single phase motors 500 watt rating and above shall be

magnetic direct-on-line type with two adjustable overload cutouts, ,

start/stop/reset push buttons, where electric inter locking is required the

starters should be automatic magnetic type with hand/off/auto switch,

stop-reset push button and at least one auxiliary contact for electric

interlocking circuit. Motors below 500 watt rating may be provided with a

heavy duty on-off switch instead of starter.

9. All squirrel cage motor starters 10 HP and below shall be automatic

magnetic direct-on-line type with hand/off/auto switch, stop-reset push

button, three adjustable overload cutouts, low voltage cutout, single phasing

308

preventor, at least two auxiliary contacts for electric interlocking circuit and

one ammeter for motor above 5 HP.

10. Squirrel cage motors above 10 HP shall have automatic magnetic star

delta type reduced voltage starters with hand/off/auto switch, stop-reset

push button, three adjustable overload cutouts, low voltage cutout, single

phasing preventor, at least two auxiliary contacts for electric interlocking

circuit and one ammeter.

11. All slip ring motors shall have starter-rotor type starters, manually

operated unless otherwise specified to suit any automatic control of the

equipment. The automatic starters shall have hand/off/auto switch. The

manual starters shall have starting handle. All starters to have stop-reset

push button, three adjustable overload cutouts, low voltage cutout, single

phasing preventor, at least two auxiliary contacts for electric interlocking

circuit and one ammeter. The rotor resistance should be suitable for at least

10 starts per hour.

12. All starters control circuit and magnetic coils to be suitable for 230 volts

50 cycles 1-phase AC. For motors requiring electric interlocking or remote

control or sequence starting control or any other such feature, starters

should have necessary auxiliary contacts providing the desired control

arrangement. A separate set of terminals is required for each control circuit.

13. All starters for equipment not visible from the starters and for remote

control operation shall be provided with a pilot light. An on-off switch in the

starter control circuit shall be installed near the motor from which the

starter is not visible to ensure that the motor can not be started or electric

circuit energized by error. Alternatively a disconnect switch can be provided

near the motor.

14. All starters shall be provided with a disconnect switch with HRC time lag

link type fuses according to BS: 88:1952 and ASTA-20 certified. Two sets of

309

replacement HRC fuses shall be supplied as spare for each disconnect

switch.

15. The starter enclosure shall be of sheet metal with hinged cover and

arranged for wall or floor mounting. For outdoor installation the starter

enclosure shall be weather proof.

16. All motors and starters provided under this contract should be of one

manufacturer except for the equipment where special motors and starters

are provided as standard component.

17. Where single phasing preventor and any other safety devices specified

above are not part of standard control panel and/or starters supplied by the

equipment manufacturer as standard component, the contractor shall

supply all such controls and devices.

TS-12 ELECTRIC WIRING AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE

1. The contractor will be responsible for complete electric wiring and earthing

of the plant, equipment and controls. The employer shall only provide 3

phase and neutral, 4 wire supply point(s) with two earthing points and 1

phase, neutral and earth, 3 wires electric supply point(s) at locations shown

in the drawings and detailed elsewhere in the documents.

2. The electric wiring shall be carried out in steel conduit, sheet metal channel,

cable tray or G.I piping, all wiring buried in the floor to be in GI piping. The

wire sizes shall be selected for satisfactory operation at least 45ºC ambient

temperature. All wires shall be numbered, tied up for identification &

properly thimbled for connection. The wiring and earthing shall be carried

out according to the requirements of any local code and Pakistan P.W.D.

310

3. The terminal connections for motors and where required for starters, shall

be made by flexible conduit. The terminal wiring for 230 volt, 1 phase

fractional horse power motors, such as fan-coil unit fan motors, and their

starter control switches can be exposed PVC insulated and sheathed wiring

connections protected within the terminal box so that no live lead is

exposed.

4. The wiring for electric/electronic automatic controls shall preferably be with

single conductor wire which may be PVC insulated and sheathed wiring in

accordance with the recommendations of the control manufacturer. The live

connections shall be protected by the cover plates to avoid any hazard. The

wiring outside the plant rooms or fan-coil unit enclosures must be in

conduits to avoid any mechanical damage.

5. All control boards shall be factory fabricated.

6. On each control board incoming supply shall have an air circuit breaker for

800 Amps and higher capacity and MCCB for lower capacity, each outgoing

individual circuit shall have MCCB. The air circuit breaker shall be

automatic air-break type with short circuit protection, under voltage release

and adjustable thermal overload protection. Moulded case circuit breakers

(MCCB) may be adjustable having high rupture capacity heavy continuous

duty type. For single phase circuits up to 5 amps, MCBs with on-off switch

and “on” indicating light may be used.

7. Single phasing preventor relay shall be provided for each 3 phase circuit of 1

HP and above rating.

8. The contractor shall supply and install necessary electric control boards,

circuit breakers, disconnect switches, fuses, MCB‟s, earthing etc., to mount

all the circuit breakers, disconnect switches, fuses, starters, switches, relays

and controls in one machine room on one control board for ease of operation

except specified otherwise.

311

9. The control boards shall be of design and construction to provide easy

access to all internal components for servicing and replacement. The large

size boards to have multi panel type construction. The board shall have

hinged access doors at the front, swing not exceeding 450 mm, and of

design that all work of servicing, maintenance, replacement, additions and

alternations can be carried out from the front without requiring access from

the back .The back panels shall be bolted and easily removable. The board

to have protected busbars. The board to have indicator name plates for all

items.

10. Adequate front face illumination lights and internal lights shall be

provided, if required. All circuits shall be numbered and tags fixed with the

wires for identification.

11. The main control board in the central plant room shall have one 30 amps

3 phase MCCB, one 16 amps 3 phase MCCB with 5 pin industrial socket &

one 16 amps 1 phase MCB with 3 pin industrial socket with on-off switches.

12. Four sets of complete detail wiring diagram for each board shall be

supplied to the employer and one set to be kept in a pocket in the respective

board.

13. All squirrel cage motors shall be provided with automatic starters with

hand/off/auto switches.

14. The contractor shall submit schematic electric wiring diagrams,

manufacturer‟s construction drawings, technical literature for all

components proposed to be used to consultants for checking and approval

before the fabrication of the boards is commenced. The work will be carried

out only in accordance with the approved drawings and components. All

components shall be of France, Italy or Germany etc.

15. The central plant room control board shall incorporate three phase

indicating lights, incoming supply voltmeter with phase selector switch,

ammeter with selector switch, main incoming circuit breaker, MCCB for

312

each outgoing circuit, ammeters for motors above 5 HP, starters for motors

located within the central plant rooms each starter with hand/off/auto

switch and on-off-overload, green-yellow-red indicator lights and one each

pilot on-off switch / push button with “on” green indicator light for remote

operation of cooling tower fans, all such air handling units and exhaust fans

which are not installed within the central plant room. For chillers & duct

heaters only MCCB shall be provided.

16. The contractor shall supply and install control boards at other locations

as shown in the drawings. These control boards shall be for the cooling

tower air handling units, exhaust fans and fan coil units.

17. On each control board, there shall be three phase indicating lights,

incoming supply voltmeter with phase selector switch, ammeter for motors

above 5 HP, starters for motors with hand/off/auto switch and on-off-

overload, green-yellow-red indicator lights. With hand/off/auto switch in

“auto” position, the motor shall be operated from the main control board in

the plant room “hand” position would permit local operation and testing,

while the “off” position would ensure that all circuits are deenergised for

servicing and checking.

18. Fractional horsepower fans shall be operated from individual supply

points provided by the employer near each fan. The contractor shall provide

a switch board for each fan.

19. The control boards shall be as fabricated by AEG / FICO /

JOHNSON/PHILIPS / PEL / PREM / SIEMENS / ELECTROMECH / JEI.

Wire and cables shall be as manufactured by PAKISTAN CABLES LTD.,

PIONEER ELECTRECH or approved equal.

313

TS-13 GRILLES,REGISTERS,DIFFUSERS

1. The contractor shall install where shown in the drawing all air devices,

grilles, registers and linear diffusers, of sizes and types as indicated or of

equivalent areas and capacities as approved.

2. The contractor shall check and confirm with the air devices manufacturer

that proposed grilles, registers and diffusers shall meet the capacity and

“throw” requirements without draft, dead spots and noise. Any changes or

alternatives shall be notified to the Engineer/Consultants for approval.

3. All air devices shall have a sponge rubber gasket around the perimeter for

tight fit against adjoining structure.

4. All linear diffusers shall be furnished with multi louver type volume damper

in neck controlled from face of the diffuser.

5. All wall type supply air grilles and registers shall have horizontal and

vertical adjustable deflecting bars and registers shall also have opposed

blade volume control dampers adjustable from face with a removable key.

Registers and grilles shall have a minimum of 75% free area.

6. All return grilles shall be of the fixed bar type to match supply outlets and

have a minimum of 75% free area. Return air registers with opposed blade

volume control dampers adjustable from the face are to be fixed where

shown in the drawings.

7. Door louvers, where shown on the drawings, for return air shall be supplied

by the contractor if so specified on the drawings, otherwise these will be

arranged by the employer.

8. All air devices shall be thoroughly cleaned, given anticorrosion chemical

treatment, one coat of acrylic melamine base baked primer and finished with

anticorrosion and weather resistant acrylic-melamine plain or sty rented

alcyed hammer baked enamel paint of approved color.

9. Fresh air intake and exhaust discharge louvers shall be fixed where shown

on drawings. These louvers shall be of fixed blades, angled to provide

adequate weather protection and a free area of not less than 10%. They

should be constructed, unless otherwise specified, of aluminum with vertical

supports as necessary to ensure complete rigidity. In case of M.S.

314

construction they should be thoroughly cleaned, given anticorrosion

chemical treatment, one coat of chlorinated rubber based low temperature

baked paint approved color.

10. Wooden frames in the walls for fixing air devices shall be arranged by the

employer according to the drawings supplied by the contractor unless this

work is specified to be the contractor‟s responsibility in which case, the

contractor shall supply the necessary drawings. The frames shall be of

similar material and appearing as the main framing for false ceiling/boxing.

11. Unless otherwise specified, all grilles, registers, diffusers and louvers

shall be of local manufacture of approved design and quality.

TS-14 DAMPERS

1. Volume Dampers (V.D)

A substantially constructed manual volume damper of the butterfly or

multiple blade type as per latest SMACNA Duct Construction Standards

shall be fitted where shown on the Drawings and at all branches entries or

exits with main ducts for balancing purpose.

Dampers shall have galvanized or painted steel interlocking blades of 8"

maximum blade width. Blades shall be fabricated from 16-gauge steel with

seamed edges and a maximum length of 4 ft. It should be noted that these

dampers, should be separate and independent from the dampers,

hereinafter specified. Volume Dampers are not required where splitter

Dampers, as specified hereinafter, is installed.

2. Splitter Dampers (S.D)

At each point of division in a supply trunk duct where a branch is taken off

a trunk duct, an adjustable splitter or deflecting dampers, one gauge heavier

than the duct with operating rod and locking quadrant as above, shall be

installed. These deflecting dampers shall be permanently set and locked in

315

position after completion of the installation and adjustment with fans

running.

Operating rods are to be full blade length extending through the duct to

externally mounted bearing plates. Construction shall be as per latest

SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.

3. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers

1 Combination Fire/Smoke dampers meeting or exceeding the following

specifications shall be furnished and installed at locations shown on plans

or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the requirements of

NFPA90A, 92A, and 92B and shall be either Class I or Class II leakage rated

dampers for use in smoke control systems and 1-1/2 hour fire rating in

accordance with the latest version of UL555S.

2. As part of the UL qualification, fire/smoke dampers shall have demonstrated

a capacity to open and close under HVAC system operating conditions, with

pressures up to 4 inches w.c. in the closed position and 2,000 fpm air

velocity in the open position.

3. In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, the dampers and

their actuators shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature

of 250°F (121°C) or 350°F (177°C) depending upon the actuator.

4. Appropriate electric actuators shall be installed by the damper

manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper and actuator shall

be supplied as a single entity that meets all applicable UL555S

qualifications for both dampers and actuators.

5. Each damper shall be rated for leakage and airflow in either direction

through the damper. Damper and actuator assembly shall be factory cycled

at least 10 times to ensure operation.

316

TS-15 FILTERS

1. Filters shall be permanent, impingement, dry, washable, all metal, panel

type, at least 2" thick unless otherwise scheduled. Media shall be aluminum

screen, arranged in alternate layers of flat and herringbone-crimp, 4 layers

of each per 1" reinforced and enclose in frame of 6 gauge galvanized steel

with flush mitered corners. Pressure drop at 500 FPM shall not exceed 0.12"

WG.Holding frames shall be factory- built of 16 gauge steel; with felt air seal.

Filters to be installed with return air grilles shall be ½" thick.

2. Filters shall have at least 35% efficiency on 0-5 microns range when tested

in accordance with ASHRAE standard 52-76.

3. Bag Filter:

Front withdrawal type F –5 , F –6 , F –7 , F –8 bag type air filters to be with

holding frames, gaskets, etc. maximum face velocity 375 fpm,

recommended size 24” x 24” x 24” , initial resistance shall not be more than

0.40”wg.

The ASHRAE standard 52-76/DIN EN 779/DIN24185 atmospheric dust spot

test method average efficiency shall not be less than 85%.

Filter media shall be of high quality spun fiber-glass media specifically made

for separation of fine dust, suspended particles and aerosols or approved

equal.

Bag filters shall be provided completely with mounting bank consisting of

cell frame, special installation frame and flat steel stiffeners.

Filters shall be Trox F –7 (F –748) or approved equal

317

TS-15-A ALL AIR FILTERS

i. 100% spare filter bag filter inserts for each size and type to be offered.

ii. The tenderer to furnish the following information for each type of air

filters.

iii. Size, capacity in CFM, face velocity and velocity through filtering

media.

iv. Average minimum efficiency of each type according to the specified

test method.

v. Initial and recommended final operating air resistances for each type

of air filters.

vi. Overall dimensions of each type of air filters and operating weight.

vii. Manufacturers test certificate and technical bulletins.

HEPA FILTERS

The hepa filter shall have an extraction efficiency of 99.995% for 0.3 micron particles.

The nominal air flow rate shall be upto 3000 cu. Meter/ hour. The filtering media shall

be glass fibre of high quality and suitable for temperature upto 80 C and 100%

humidity. The filter media shall be folded into closely spaced shallow pleats with

textile thread spacers to ensure uniform spacing of the pleats. The casing shall be

constructed with a rigid galvanized, stove enameled sheet steel. The initial and final

pressure differential shall be 250-600 Pa respectively . the size of the filter shall be

592 x 592 x 292 mm or as required as per site application.

TS-16 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

1. All fan rating shall be based on tests made in accordance with the ASHRAE

Standard 51/AMCA Standard 210-74.

2. All fans shall be capable of operating over the minimum pressure class limit,

as specified in AMCA‟s Standard 2408-69.

318

3. Each fan shall be assembled and run at the factory prior to shipment. The

assembly shall be checked for balancing.

4. Fan Housings:

Housings are to be heavy gauge, continuously welded construction. In Class

I and II construction sizes 12" thru 27" shall have 10 gauge sides and 10

gauge scrolls, while sizes 30" thru 66" shall have 4 mm thick sides and

scrolls. All fan housings shall be equipped with flanged discharge, removable

inlet cones, Wheel inspection door and drain point. Structural re-

enforcement members shall of heavy gauge and of ample strength.

5. Fan Wheels:

All fan wheels shall have wheel cones. Blades shall be plate type or airfoil

shaped. All blades shall be welded to the inlet cone as well as the back plate.

Fan wheel shall have steel hubs. All wheels shall be true lined, statically and

dynamically balanced on electronic balancer.

6. Fan Shafts:

All sizes to have shafts of solid AISI C-1018. 1040 or 1045 hot rolled steel

accurately turned for accuracy. Close tolerances are to be made where the

shaft makes contact with the bearings.

7. Bearings:

All fan bearings shall be heavy duty, grease lubricated, precision anti-

friction ball or roller, self aligning pillow block type. Bearings shall be

selected for an average bearing life (AFBMA L-50) in excess of 100,000 hours

when operating at service speed.

8. Painting:

Each fan component shall be thoroughly degreased and deburred before the

application of a rust preventive primer. Two coats of primer shall be applied

and shall be finished with epoxy paint.

9. Fan Hub, Pulleys and bearings shall have tapered sleeve.

319

TS-17 INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES

1. All necessary gauges, and pipeline thermometers and other indicating and

measuring instruments as required, specified and shown shall be furnished

ad installed by the Contractor. All gauges and thermometers shall have

labels indicating their function.

2. Instruments shall include but not limited to:

i. Pressure gauge.

ii. Thermometers for water piping

iii. Testing and Maintenance instruments

These instruments shall e installed as shown on Drawings.

Portable testing and maintenances instruments shall be supplied

in carrying cases.

3. Pressure Gauge

i. Pressure gauge shall be of the Bourdon tube type.

ii. Working parts shall be of corrosion resisting metals.

iii. Dial diameter shall be 4.5" permit easy reading from floor with

black numerals on white background.

iv. Range shall place operating pressure at or near the middle of

scale. Dial face shall be calibrated in psi and KPa in suitable

increments with a range not less than one and half times the

maximum operating pressure. Pressure gauges shall be complete

with shut-off cock and necessary tubing with socket adapter.

v. When gauges are mounted in a panel board they shall be flush

mounted.

4. Thermometers

i. Thermometers for water line shall be mercury in steel with metal

guard steel bulb and separable sockets screwed ¾" dia; 9" length.

Thermometers shall be complete with well for piping.

320

ii. Calibrations shall be in degrees Fahrenheit with suitable

increments. Range shall place operating temperature at or near

the middle of scale. Range shall not be less than one and half

times the maximum operating temperature.

5. Testing and maintenance instruments

The contractor shall supply following testing and maintenance instruments.

I. 1 No. Digital meter with probes for measuring of air

velocity at duct, filters and grilles, static

pressure and relative humidity

II. 1 No. Tachometer

III. 6 No. Insertion type duct thermometer

IV. 2 No. Dry bulb and wet bulb measuring Sling

thermometer

V. 1 No. Clamp- on Ammeter

VI.1 No. Clamp-on Ultrasonic water flow meter suitable

for measuring water flow rates in pipes lines

of sizes used in this project.

VII. 1 No. Digital sound level measuring meter

Details of these instruments with catalogues shall be submitted to the

Engineer for approval.

321

TS-18 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

Flexible connections shall be provided wherever pipes cross building

expansion joints, at suction and discharge side of each pump and at

connections to chillers, and /or wherever shown on the drawings. These

connections shall be such that the working pressure, temperature and

movement encountered will not be more than 75% of that allowable for the

joint .One side of joints must have all piping and /or adjacent equipment

adequately anchored. The other side must be supported, aligned and guided

so as to allow free movement without imposing unnecessary stresses on the

joints.

Connectors shall have integral duct and rubber flanges. They shall have

individual soiled steel ring reinforced with a carcass of highest-grade woven

cotton or acceptable Synthetic fiber. Joints shall be constructed to pipeline

size and to meet working pressures conditionings and face measurements as

designed .They shall be of archetype construction with the number of

arches(corrugations) depending of the projected movement .All joints must

be finish coated with suitable paint to prevent ozone attack. Split back up or

retaining rings shall be furnished and fitted.

TS-19 WATER TREATMENT

1. Provision for treatment of temporary hardness and to inhibit corrosion and

organic growth shall be included for all water systems.

2. The treatment shall be adequate to provide the necessary degree of softness

as recommended by the equipment manufacturers and shall be based upon

the water supply analysis.

3. The Contractor shall supply and install chemical dosing equipment and

controls.

322

4. For chilled water and hot water systems, a manually controlled gravity feed

dosing arrangement, one for each system in each plant room.

5. In each case, equipment for chemical dosing and chemicals required for one

year operation for the specified operating hours for the complete plant along

with necessary testing instruments and apparatus and manufacturer‟s

detailed instruction manuals shall be supplied.

6. The tenderer shall supply the manufacturer‟s technical bulletins with his

tender.

7. Analysis of supply water at CPC plant:-

S.No. Tests Results (PPM)

1. Ph 7.40

2.

Electrical

Conductivity 2740us/cm

3.

Total Dissolved

Solids 3235

4. Carbonates 10

5. Bicarbonates 220

6. Sulphates 1073

7. Chlorides 110

8. Iron ND

9. Calcium 243

10. Magnesium 196

11. Sodium 130

12. Potassium 10

323

TS-20 PAINTING

1. The contractor shall paint all plants, equipment, ducting piping, hangers,

bracing and other surfaces exposed to air as specified and he shall also be

responsible for all finish painting. The minimum number of coats are

specified herein-under but sufficient coats shall be given to achieve desired

finish.

2. To the extent possible the contractor will carry out the painting along with

completion of installation particularly in the occupied areas to avoid

interference later on with other contractors or building completion schedule.

3. Material for painting shall be high grade products of well know

manufacturer and when approved shall be delivered on the site in original

unbroken packages bearing the maker‟s name and brand. Paints of

approved color only shall be used for each application.

4. Unplanted steel and iron and primed hardware shall match the work which

it is attached, unless otherwise directed.

5. Stainless steel devices shall not be painted.

6. All surfaces shall be clean, dry and free from dust at the time any coating is

applied. Base coats provided by others shall be in good condition and the

surface well covered by touching any bare or abraded spots. Base coats on

works subject to close inspection shall be rubbed smooth.

7. Interpire painting shall not be done when temperature below 30 F. Enamel

shall not be applied when temperature is below 10 F. External painting shall

not be done in frosty, fogy or damp weather or when the temperature is

below 50 F.

324

8. All cloths and cotton waste that might constitute fire hazard shall be placed

in closed metal containers or destroyed each day. Upon completion or work,

all containers shall be removed from the site and destroyed in an approved

manner. Paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces shall be removed.

9. All plants, equipment, pumps, and motors shall be provided with three coats

of enamel paint in the factory and shall be carefully cleaned and oiled after

installation. In case the original paint has been damaged, fresh coats of

enamel paint to match the original shall be given.

10. All duct, pipe and equipment M.S. hangers and supports shall be

thoroughly wire brushed and given one coat of red oxide zinc chromate

primer and one coat of synthetic enamel paint before installation. M.S.

hangers and supports visible in the occupied areas, plant rooms and other

locations shall be given finish coat of synthetic enamel paint on completion

of installation.

11. The interior of all ducts and outlet boxes at the back of air grilles,

registers and diffusers shall be painted with two coats of dull black paint.

12. All black steel ducting, piping and other equipment required to be

insulated shall be thoroughly wire brushed and applied with one coat of

black asphalt paint before insulation is fixed.

13. The interior of masonry built up fresh air and fan chambers shall be

applied two coats of odorless non ceiling paint. PVC based paints shall be

used for locations with relative humidity above 75%.

14. All uninsulated black steel ducting, piping, fan casings and chambers

shall be thoroughly wire brushed, given one coat red oxide zinc chromate

primer and finish with two coats of synthetic enamel paint.

15. All uninsulated GI ducting and piping concealed or in plant rooms shall

not be painted. The visible GI ducting and piping in the occupied areas shall

be given two coats of synthetic enamel paint.

325

16. 4 Oz eight cores cloth jacketed insulated ducting shall not be painted.

17. All 8 Oz eight canvas jacketed insulated ducting and piping in concealed

locations shall be given one coat of polyvinyl acetate with water repellent

emulsion.

18. All 8 Oz weight canvas jacketed insulated ducting and piping in plant

rooms or visible in the occupied areas shall given one coat of polyvinyl

acetate with water repellent emulsion and finished with two coats of

synthetic enamel paint. The ducting and piping shall be painted according

to color code approved by the engineer for identification. Where full painting

is not specified, color code strips shall be painted at intervals. Symbols shall

also be stenciled according to a schedule approved by the engineer.

19. All woods surfaces coming in contact with the building structure shall be

given a heavy coat of solignum wood preservative paint. All other concealed

wood surfaces shall be given one coat of water repellent primer. All boards

made of wood chipboard shall be give n one coat of black bituministic paint

on the inner surfaces. All visible surfaces shall be given dull mat finish with

synthetic enamel paint.

TS-21 CHARTS AND TAGS

1. The contractor shall supply tracings on linen base and four copies each of

charts or diagrams showing outline plans of the structure and describing

essential features of all the components of the installed systems for the

purpose of identifying the location of all control paints, valves etc for easy

operation maintenance and servicing.

2. The contractor shall provide identifying brass tags for all valves controls etc

with numbers corresponding to the given in the charts or diagrams specified

above. The 20g brass tags shall be at least 11/4” dia, the numbering shall

be stamped, and the tags fastened to the controls and valves with brass

chain and hooks.

326

3. The contractor shall supply tracings on linen base and four copies each or

charts indicating schedule of daily start-up and tenance, lubrication points

and schedule, and chart listing equipment model and serial Nos. conditions

of operation, n.c. settings of automatic and safety controls, data of

accessories and motors, manufacturer‟s name and address and reference

Nos. of technical and spare part catalogues supplied to the employer. The

engineer may accept reproducible sepia transparencies instead of linen base

tracings.

4. One set of charts and diagrams shall be mounted in glass frame and

permanently fixed according to the engineer‟s directions.

5. The contractor shall submit to the engineer for approval the list of charts,

diagrams, etc which he propose to supply.